diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:34:05 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:34:05 -0700 |
| commit | 888d061594ad37a78c6ac13c40b41ed34d429a63 (patch) | |
| tree | d293b229ba809094a3f4c6fc33628f47681eb9dc /old | |
Diffstat (limited to 'old')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-8.txt | 3508 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 60376 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 602572 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/10224-h.htm | 4651 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 170725 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/emblem.png | bin | 0 -> 1965 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/i008.jpg | bin | 0 -> 36027 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/i077.jpg | bin | 0 -> 54586 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/i087.jpg | bin | 0 -> 57706 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/i123.jpg | bin | 0 -> 54957 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/i139.jpg | bin | 0 -> 52043 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/i163.jpg | bin | 0 -> 62042 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/i182-back.jpg | bin | 0 -> 30008 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/title_bottom.png | bin | 0 -> 6745 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/title_left.png | bin | 0 -> 2882 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/title_right.png | bin | 0 -> 2887 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224-h/images/title_top.png | bin | 0 -> 1894 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224.txt | 3508 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/10224.zip | bin | 0 -> 60356 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/20031124-10224.txt | 2838 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/old/20031124-10224.zip | bin | 0 -> 54261 bytes |
21 files changed, 14505 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/10224-8.txt b/old/10224-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..52e9d6c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3508 @@ +Project Gutenberg's Our Little Alaskan Cousin, by Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Our Little Alaskan Cousin + +Author: Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +Release Date: August 1, 2013 [EBook #10224] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OUR LITTLE ALASKAN COUSIN *** + + + + +Produced by Emmy, Beth Baran, Juliet Sutherland, Mary +Meehan, and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images +generously made available by The Internet Archive) + + + + + + + +[Transcriber's Note: Bold text is surrounded by =equal signs= and italic +text is surrounded by _underscores_.] + + + +Our Little Alaskan Cousin + + + + +THE + +Little Cousin Series + +(TRADE MARK) + + Each volume illustrated with six or more full-page plates in + tint. Cloth, 12mo, with decorative cover, + per volume, 60 cents + + +LIST OF TITLES + +BY MARY HAZELTON WADE + +(unless otherwise indicated) + + + =Our Little African Cousin= + =Our Little Alaskan Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Arabian Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Armenian Cousin= + =Our Little Australian Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Brazilian Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Brown Cousin= + =Our Little Canadian Cousin= + By Elizabeth R. MacDonald + =Our Little Chinese Cousin= + By Isaac Taylor Headland + =Our Little Cuban Cousin= + =Our Little Dutch Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Egyptian Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little English Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Eskimo Cousin= + =Our Little French Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little German Cousin= + =Our Little Greek Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Hawaiian Cousin= + =Our Little Hindu Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Indian Cousin= + =Our Little Irish Cousin= + =Our Little Italian Cousin= + =Our Little Japanese Cousin= + =Our Little Jewish Cousin= + =Our Little Korean Cousin= + By H. Lee M. Pike + =Our Little Mexican Cousin= + By Edward C. Butler + =Our Little Norwegian Cousin= + =Our Little Panama Cousin= + By H. Lee M. Pike + =Our Little Philippine Cousin= + =Our Little Porto Rican Cousin= + =Our Little Russian Cousin= + =Our Little Scotch Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Siamese Cousin= + =Our Little Spanish Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Swedish Cousin= + By Claire M. Coburn + =Our Little Swiss Cousin= + =Our Little Turkish Cousin= + + L. C. PAGE & COMPANY + New England Building, Boston, Mass. + +[Illustration: "KALITAN FISHED DILIGENTLY BUT CAUGHT LITTLE." + +(_See page 3_)] + + + + + Our Little Alaskan + Cousin + + By + Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + + _Author of "Our Little Spanish Cousin," "With + a Pessimist in Spain," "God, the + King, My Brother," etc._ + + _Illustrated_ + + + [Illustration] + + Boston + L. C. Page & Company + _PUBLISHERS_ + + + + + _Copyright, 1907_ + BY L. C. PAGE & COMPANY + (INCORPORATED) + + _All rights reserved_ + + Third Impression, May, 1909 + + + + TO MY LITTLE SON + John Nixon de Roulet + + + + +Preface + + +AWAY up toward the frozen north lies the great peninsula, which the +United States bought from the Russians, and thus became responsible for +the native peoples from whom the Russians had taken the land. + +There are many kinds of people there, from Indians to Esquimos, and they +are under the American Government, yet they have no votes and are not +called American citizens. + +It is about this country and its people that this little story is +written, and in the hope of interesting American girls and boys in these +very strange people, their Little Alaskan Cousins. + + + + +Contents + + + CHAPTER PAGE + I. KALITAN TENAS 1 + II. AROUND THE CAMP-FIRE 12 + III. TO THE GLACIER 26 + IV. TED MEETS MR. BRUIN 38 + V. A MONSTER OF THE DEEP 48 + VI. THE ISLAND HOME OF KALITAN 60 + VII. TWILIGHT TALES AND TOTEMS 71 + VIII. THE BERRY DANCE 82 + IX. ON THE WAY TO NOME 93 + X. IN THE GOLD COUNTRY 108 + XI. AFTERNOON TEA IN AN EGLU 119 + XII. THE SPLENDOUR OF SAGHALIE TYEE 129 + + + + + +List of Illustrations + + + PAGE + "KALITAN FISHED DILIGENTLY BUT CAUGHT + LITTLE" (_See page 3_) _Frontispiece_ + "AWAY WENT ANOTHER STINGING LANCE" 57 + "A GROUP OF PEOPLE AWAITING THE CANOES" 64 + MOUNT SHISHALDIN 99 + "'LET'S WATCH THOSE TWO MEN. THEY HAVE + EVIDENTLY STAKED A CLAIM TOGETHER'" 113 + "TWO FUNNY LITTLE LAPP BABIES HE TOOK + TO RIDE ON A LARGE REINDEER" 134 + + + + +Our Little Alaskan Cousin + + + + +CHAPTER I + +KALITAN TENAS + + +IT was bitterly cold. Kalitan Tenas felt it more than he had in the long +winter, for then it was still and calm as night, and now the wind was +blowing straight in from the sea, and the river was frozen tight. + +A month before, the ice had begun to break and he had thought the cold +was over, and that the all too short Alaskan summer was at hand. Now it +was the first of May, and just as he had begun to think of summer +pleasures, lo! a storm had come which seemed to freeze the very marrow +of his bones. However, our little Alaskan cousin was used to cold and +trained to it, and would not dream of fussing over a little snow-storm. + +Kalitan started out to fish for his dinner, and though the snow came +down heavily and he had to break through the ice to make a fishing-hole, +and soon the ice was a wind-swept plain where even his own tracks were +covered with a white pall, he fished steadily on. He never dreamed of +stopping until he had fish enough for dinner, for, like most of his +tribe, he was persevering and industrious. + +Kalitan was a Thlinkit, though, if you asked him, he would say he was +"Klinkit." This is a tribe which has puzzled wise people for a long +time, for the Thlinkits are not Esquimos, not Indians, not coloured +people, nor whites. They are the tribes living in Southeastern Alaska +and along the coast. Many think that a long, long time ago, they came +from Japan or some far Eastern country, for they look something like +the Japanese, and their language has many words similar to Japanese in +it. + +Perhaps, long years ago, some shipwrecked Japanese were cast upon the +coast of Alaska, and, finding their boats destroyed and the land good to +live in, settled there, and thus began the Thlinkit tribes. + +The Chilcats, Haidahs, and Tsimsheans are all Thlinkits, and are by far +the best of the brown people of the Northland. They are honest, simple, +and kind, and more intelligent than the Indians living farther north, in +the colder regions. The Thlinkit coast is washed by the warm current +from the Japan Sea, and it is not much colder than Chicago or Boston, +though the winter is a little longer. + +Kalitan fished diligently but caught little. He was warmly clad in +sealskin; around his neck was a white bearskin ruff, as warm as toast, +and very pretty, too, as soft and fluffy as a lady's boa. On his feet +were moccasins of walrus hide. He had been perhaps an hour watching the +hole in the ice, and knelt there so still that he looked almost as +though he were frozen. Indeed, that was what those thought who saw him +there, for suddenly a dog-sledge came round the corner of the hill and a +loud halloo greeted his ears. + +"Boston men," he said to himself as he watched them, "lost the trail." + +They had indeed lost the trail, and Ted Strong had begun to think they +would never find it again. + +Chetwoof, their Indian guide, had not talked very much about it, but +lapsed into his favourite "No understan'," a remark he always made when +he did not want to answer what was said to him. + +Ted and his father were on their way from Sitka to the Copper River. Mr. +Strong was on the United States Geological Survey, which Ted knew meant +that he had to go all around the country and poke about all day among +rocks and mountains and glaciers. He had come with his father to this +far Alaskan clime in the happiest expectation of adventures with bears +and Indians, always dear to the heart of a boy. + +He was pretty tired of the sledge, having been in it since early +morning, and he was cold and hungry besides; so he was delighted when +the dogs stopped and his father said: + +"Hop out, son, and stretch your legs. We'll try to find out where we are +before we go any farther." + +Chetwoof meanwhile was interviewing the boy, who came quickly toward +them. + +"Who are you?" demanded Chetwoof. + +"Kalitan Tenas," was the brief reply. + +"Where are we?" was the next question. + +"Near to Pilchickamin River." + +"Where is a camp?" + +"There," said the boy, pointing toward a clump of pine-trees. "Ours." + +Ted by this time was tired of his own unwonted silence, and he came up +to Kalitan, holding out his hand. + +"My name is Ted Strong," he said, genially, grinning cheerfully at the +young Alaskan. "I say this is a jolly place. I wish you would teach me +to fish in a snow-hole. It must be great fun. I like you; let's be +friends!" Kalitan took the boy's hand in his own rough one. + +"Mahsie" (thank you), he said, a sudden quick smile sweeping his dark +face like a fleeting sunbeam, but disappearing as quickly, leaving it +grave again. "Olo?" (hungry). + +"Yes," said Mr. Strong, "hungry and cold." + +"Camp," said Kalitan, preparing to lead the way, with the hospitality of +his tribe, for the Thlinkits are always ready to share food and fire +with any stranger. The two boys strode off together, and Mr. Strong +could scarcely help smiling at the contrast between them. + +Ted was the taller, but slim even in the furs which almost smothered +him, leaving only his bright face exposed to the wind and weather. His +hair was a tangle of yellow curls which no parting could ever affect, +for it stood straight up from his forehead like a golden fleece; his +mother called it his aureole. His skin was fair as a girl's, and his +eyes as big and blue as a young Viking's; but the Indian boy's locks +were black as ink, his skin was swarthy, his eyes small and dark, and +his features that strange mixture of the Indian, the Esquimo, and the +Japanese which we often see in the best of our Alaskan cousins. + +Boys, however, are boys all the world over, and friendly animals, and +Ted was soon chattering away to his newly found friend as if he had +known him all his life. + +"What's your name?" he asked. + +"Kalitan," was the answer. "They call me Kalitan Tenas;[1] my father was +Tyee." + +"Where is he?" asked Ted. He wanted to see an Indian chief. + +"Dead," said Kalitan, briefly. + +"I'm sorry," said Ted. He adored his own father, and felt it was hard on +a boy not to have one. + +"He was killed," said Kalitan, "but we had blood-money from them," he +added, sternly. + +"What's that?" asked Ted, curiously. + +"Long time ago, when one man kill another, his clan must pay +with a life. One must be found from his tribe to cry, +'O-o-o-o-o-a-ha-a-ich-klu-kuk-ich-klu-kuk'" (ready to die, ready to +die). His voice wailed out the mournful chant, which was weird and +solemn and almost made Ted shiver. "But now," the boy went on, "Boston +men" (Americans) "do not like the blood-tax, so the murderer pays money +instead. We got many blankets and baskets and moneys for Kalitan Tyee. +He great chief." + +"Do you live here?" asked Ted. + +"No, live on island out there." Kalitan waved his hand seaward. "Come to +fish with my uncle, Klake Tyee. This good fishing-ground." + +"It's a pretty fine country," said Ted, glancing at the scene, which +bore charm to other than boyish eyes. To the east were the mountains +sheltering a valley through which the frozen river wound like a silver +ribbon, widening toward the sea. A cold green glacier filled the valley +between two mountains with its peaks of beauty. Toward the shore, which +swept in toward the river's mouth in a sheltered cove, were clumps of +trees, giant fir, aspen, and hemlock, green and beautiful, while seaward +swept the waves in white-capped loveliness. + +Kalitan ushered them to the camp with great politeness and considerable +pride. + +"You've a good place to camp," said Mr. Strong, "and we will gladly +share your fire until we are warm enough to go on." + +Ted's face fell. "Must we go right away?" he asked. "This is such a +jolly place." + +"No go to-day," said Kalitan, briefly, to Chetwoof. "_Colesnass._"[2] + +"Huh!" said Chetwoof. "Think some." + +"Here comes my uncle," said Kalitan, and he ran eagerly to meet an old +Indian who came toward the camp from the shore. He eagerly explained the +situation to the Tyee, who welcomed the strangers with grave politeness. +He was an old man, with a seamed, scarred face, but kindly eyes. Chief +of the Thlinkits, his tribe was scattered, his children dead, and +Kalitan about all left to him of interest in life. + +"There will be more snow," he said to Mr. Strong. "You are welcome. Stay +and share our fire and food." + +"Do let us stay, father," cried Ted, and his father smiled indulgently, +but Kalitan looked at him in astonishment. Alaskan boys are taught to +hold their tongues and let their elders decide matters, and Kalitan +would never have dreamed of teasing for anything. + +But Mr. Strong did not wish to face another snow-storm in the sledge, +and knew he could work but little till the storm was passed; so he +readily consented to stay a few days and let Ted see some real Alaskan +hunting and fishing. + +Both boys were delighted, and soon had the camp rearranged to +accommodate the strangers. The fire was built up, Ted and Kalitan +gathering cones and fir branches, which made a fragrant blaze, while +Chetwoof cared for the dogs, and the old chief helped Mr. Strong pitch +his tent in the lee of some fragrant firs. Soon all was prepared and +supper cooking over the coals,--a supper of fresh fish and seal fat, +which Alaskans consider a great delicacy, and to which Mr. Strong added +coffee and crackers from his stores,--and Indians and whites ate +together in friendliness and amity. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[1] Little Arrow. + +[2] Snow. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +AROUND THE CAMP-FIRE + + +"HOW does it happen that you speak English, Kalitan?" asked Mr. Strong +as they sat around the camp-fire that evening. The snow had continued +during the afternoon, and the boys had had an exciting time coasting and +snow-balling and enjoying themselves generally. + +"I went for a few months to the Mission School at Wrangel," said +Kalitan. "I learned much there. They teach the boys to read and write +and do sums and to work the ground besides. They learn much more than +the girls." + +"Huh!" said the old chief, grimly. "Girls learn too much. They no good +for Indian wives, and white men not marry them. Best for girls to stay +at home at the will of their fathers until they get husbands." + +"So you've been in Wrangel," said Ted to Kalitan. "We went there, too. +It's a dandy place. Do you remember the fringe of white mountains back +of the harbour? The people said the woods were full of game, but we +didn't have time to go hunting. There are a few shops there, but it +seemed to me a very small place to have been built since 1834. In the +States whole towns grow up in two or three weeks." + +"Huh!" said Kalitan, with a quick shrug of his shoulders, "quick grow, +sun fade and wind blow down." + +"I don't think the sun could ever fade in Wrangel," laughed Ted. "They +told me there it hadn't shone but fifteen days in three months. It +rained all the time." + +"Rain is nothing," said Kalitan. "It is when the Ice Spirit speaks in +the North Wind's roar and in the crackling of the floes that we +tremble. The glaciers are the children of the Mountain Spirit whom our +fathers worshipped. He is angry, and lo! he hurls down icebergs in his +wrath, he tosses them about, upon the streams he tosses the _kyaks_ like +feathers and washes the land with the waves of Sitth. When our people +are buried in the ground instead of being burnt with the fire, they must +go for ever to the place of Sitth, of everlasting cold, where never sun +abides, nor rain, nor warmth." + +Ted had listened spellbound to this poetic speech and gazed at Kalitan +in open-mouthed amazement. A boy who could talk like that was a new and +delightful playmate, and he said: + +"Tell me more about things, Kalitan," but the Indian was silent, ashamed +of having spoken. + +"What do you do all day when you are at home?" persisted the American. + +"In winter there is nothing to do but to hunt and fish," said Kalitan. +"Sometimes we do not find much game, then we think of how, when a +Thlinkit dies, he has plenty. If he has lived as a good tribesman, his +kyak glides smoothly over the silver waters into the sunset, until, o'er +gently flowing currents, it reaches the place of the mighty forest. A +bad warrior's canoe passes dark whirlpools and terrible rapids until he +reaches the place we speak not of, where reigns Sitth. + +"In the summer-time we still hunt and fish. Many have learned to till +the ground, and we gather berries and wood for the winter. The other +side of the inlet, the tree-trunks drift from the Yukon and are stranded +on the islands, so there is plenty for firewood. But upon our island the +women gather a vine and dry it. They collect seaweed for food in the +early spring, and dry it and press it into square cakes, which make good +food after they have hung long in the sun. They make baskets and sell +them to the white people. Often my uncle and I take them to Valdez, and +once we brought back fifty dollars for those my mother made. There is +always much to do." + +"Don't you get terribly cold hunting in the winter?" asked Ted. + +"Thlinkit boy not a baby," said Kalitan, a trifle scornfully. "We begin +to be hardened when we are babies. When I was five years old, I left my +father and went to my uncle to be taught. Every morning I bathed in the +ocean, even if I had to break ice to find water, and then I rolled in +the snow. After that my uncle brushed me with a switch bundle, and not +lightly, for his arm is strong. I must not cry out, no matter if he +hurt, for a chief's son must never show pain nor fear. That would give +his people shame." + +"Don't you get sick?" asked Ted, who felt cold all over at the idea of +being treated in such a heroic manner. + +"The _Kooshta_[3] comes sometimes," said Kalitan. "The Shaman[4] used to +cast him out, but now the white doctor can do it, unless the _kooshta_ +is too strong." + +Ted was puzzled as to Kalitan's exact meaning, but did not like to ask +too many questions for fear of being impolite, so he only said: + +"Being sick is not very nice, anyhow." + +"To be bewitched is the most terrible," said Kalitan, gravely. + +"How does that happen?" asked Ted, eagerly, but Kalitan shook his head. + +"It is not good to hear," he said. "The medicine-man must come with his +drum and rattle, and he is very terrible. If the white men will not +allow any more the punishing of the witches, they should send more of +the white medicine-men, if we are not to have any more of our own." + +"Boys should not talk about big things," said the old chief suddenly. He +had been sitting quietly over the fire, and spoke so suddenly that +Kalitan collapsed into silence. Ted, too, quieted down at the old +chief's stern voice and manner, and both boys sat and listened to the +men talking, while the snow still swirled about them. + +Tyee Klake told Mr. Strong many interesting things about the coast +country, and gave him valuable information as to the route he should +pursue in his search for interesting things in the mountains. + +"It will be two weeks before the snow will break so you can travel in +comfort," he said. "Camp with us. We remain here one week, then we go to +the island. We can take you there, you will see many things, and your +boy will hunt with Kalitan." + +"Where is your island?" asked Mr. Strong. + +Ted said nothing, but his eyes were fixed eagerly upon his father. It +was easy to see that he wished to accept the invitation. + +"Out there." Tyee Klake pointed toward where the white coast-line seemed +to fade into silvery blue. + +"There are many islands; on some lives no one, but we have a village. +Soon it will be nearly deserted, for many of our people rove during the +summer, and wander from one camping-ground to another, seeking the best +game or fish. But Kalitan's people remain always on the island. Him I +take with me to hunt the whale and seal, to gather the berries, and to +trap the little animals who bear fur. We find even seal upon our shores, +though fewer since your people have come among us." + +"Which were the best, Russians or Americans?" asked Mr. Strong, curious +to see what the old Indian would say, but the Tyee was not to be caught +napping. + +"Men all alike," he said. "Thlinkit, Russian, American, some good, some +bad. Russians used Indians more, gave them hunting and fishing, and only +took part of the skins. Americans like to hunt and fish all themselves +and leave nothing for the Indians. Russians teach _quass_, Americans +teach whiskey. Before white men came, Indians were healthy. They ate +fish, game, berries; now they must have other foods, and they are not +good for Indians here,"--he touched his stomach. "Indian used to dress +in skins and furs, now he must copy white man and shiver with cold. He +soon has the coughing sickness and then he goes into the unknown. + +"But the government of the Americans is best because it tries to do some +things for the Indian. It teaches our boys useful things in the +schools, and, if some of its people are bad, some Indians are bad, too. +Men all alike," he repeated with the calm stoicism of his race. + +"The government is far away," said Mr. Strong, "and should not be blamed +for the doings of all its servants. I should like to see this island +home of yours, and think we must accept your invitation; shall we, Ted?" +he smiled at the boy. + +"Yes, indeed; thank you, sir," said Ted, and he and Kalitan grinned at +each other happily. + +"We shall stay in camp until the blue jay comes," said the old chief, +smiling, "and then seek the village of my people." + +"What does the blue jay mean?" asked Ted, timidly, for he was very much +in awe of this grave old man. + +Kalitan said something in Thlinkit to his uncle, and the old chief, +looking kindly at the boy, replied with a nod: + +"I will tell you the story of the blue jay," he said. + +"My story is of the far, far north. Beside a salmon stream there dwelt +people rich in slaves. These caught and dried the salmon for the winter, +and nothing is better to eat than dried salmon dipped in seal oil. All +the fish were caught and stored away, when lo! the whiteness fell from +heaven and the snows were upon them. It was the time of snow and they +should not have complained, but the chief was evil and he cursed the +whiteness. No one should dare to speak evil of the Snow Spirit, which +comes from the Unknown! Deeper and deeper grew the snow. It flew like +feathers about the _eglu_,[5] and the slaves had many troubles in +putting in limbs for the fire. Then the snow came in flakes so large +they seemed like the wings of birds, and the house was covered, and they +could no longer keep their _kyaks_ on top of the snow. All were shut +tight in the house, and their fire and food ran low. They knew not how +many days they were shut in, for there was no way to tell the day from +night, only they knew they were sore hungry and that the Snow Spirit was +angry and terrible in his anger. + +"But each one spoke not; he only chose a place where he should lie down +and die when he could bear no more. + +"Only the chief spoke, and he once. 'Snow Spirit,' he said aloud, 'I +alone am evil. These are not so. Slay me and spare!' But the Snow Spirit +answered not, only the wind screamed around the _eglu_, and his screams +were terrible and sad. Then hope left the heart of the chief and he +prepared to die with all his people and all his slaves. + +"But on the day when their last bit of food was gone, lo! something +pecked at the top of the smoke-hole, and it sang 'Nuck-tee,' and it was +a blue jay. The chief heard and saw and wondered, and, looking 'neath +the smoke-hole, he saw a scarlet something upon the floor. Picking it +up, he found it was a bunch of Indian tomato berries, red and ripe, and +quickly hope sprang in his breast. + +"'Somewhere is summer,' he cried. 'Let us up and away.' + +"Then the slaves hastened to dig out the canoe, and they drew it with +mighty labour, for they were weak from fasting, over the snows to the +shore, and there they launched it without sail or paddle, with all the +people rejoicing. And after a time the wind carried them to a beach +where all was summer. Birds sang, flowers bloomed, and berries gleamed +scarlet in the sun, and there were salmon jumping in the blue water. +They ate and were satisfied, for it was summer on the earth and summer +in their hearts. + +"That is how the Thlinkits came to our island, and so we say when the +snow breaks, that now comes the blue jay." + +"Thank you for telling us such a dandy story," cried Ted, who had not +lost a word of this quaint tale, told so graphically over the camp-fire +of the old chief Klake. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[3] Kooshta, a spirit in animal's form which inhabits the body of sick +persons and must be cast out, according to Thlinkit belief. + +[4] Shaman, native medicine-man. + +[5] Hut. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +TO THE GLACIER + + +TED slept soundly all night, wrapped in the bearskins from the sledge, +in the little tent he shared with his father. When the morning broke, he +sprang to his feet and hurried out of doors, hopeful for the day's +pleasures. The snow had stopped, but the ground was covered with a thick +white pall, and the mountains were turned to rose colour in the morning +sun, which was rising in a blaze of glory. + +"Good morning, Kalitan," shouted Ted to his Indian friend, whom he spied +heaping wood upon the camp-fire. "Isn't it dandy? What can we do +to-day?" + +"Have breakfast," said Kalitan, briefly. "Then do what Tyee says." + +"Well, I hope he'll say something exciting," said Ted. + +"Think good day to hunt," said Kalitan, as he prepared things for the +morning meal. + +"Where did you get the fish?" asked Ted. + +"Broke ice-hole and fished when I got up," said the Thlinkit. + +"You don't mean you have been fishing already," exclaimed the lazy Ted, +and Kalitan smiled as he said: + +"White people like fish. Tyee said: 'Catch fish for Boston men's +breakfast,' and I go." + +"Do you always mind him like that?" asked Ted. He generally obeyed his +father, but there were times when he wasn't anxious to and argued a +little about it. Kalitan looked at him in astonishment. + +"He chief!" he said, simply. + +"What will we do with the camp if we all go hunting?" asked Ted. + +"Nothing," said Kalitan. + +"Leave Chetwoof to watch, I suppose," continued Ted. + +"Watch? Why?" asked Kalitan. + +"Why, everything; some one will steal our things," said Ted. + +"Thlinkits not steal," said Kalitan, with dignity. "Maybe white man come +along and steal from his brothers; Indians not. If we go away to long +hunt, we _cache_ blankets and no one would touch." + +"What do you mean by _cache_?" asked Ted. + +"We build a mound hut near the house, and put there the blankets and +stores. Sometime they stay there for years, but no one would take from a +_cache_. If one has plenty of wood by the seashore or in the forest, he +may cord it and go his way and no one will touch it. A deer hangs on a +tree where dogs may not reach it, but no stray hunter would slice even a +piece. We are not thieves." + +"It is a pity you could not send missionaries to the States, you +Thlinkits, my boy," said Mr. Strong, who had come up in time to hear +Kalitan's words. "I'm afraid white people are less honest." + +"Teddy, do you know we are to have some hunting to-day, and that you'll +get your first experience with a glacier." + +"Hurrah," shouted Ted, dancing up and down in excitement. + +"Tyee Klake says we can hunt toward the base of the glacier, and I shall +try to go a little ways upon it and see how the land lies, or, rather, +the ice. It is getting warmer, and, if it continues a few days, the snow +will melt enough to let us go over to that island you are so anxious to +see." + +Ted's eyes shone, and the amount of breakfast he put away quite prepared +him for his day's work, which, pleasant though it might be, certainly +was hard work. The chief said they must seek the glacier first before +the sun got hot, for it was blinding on the snow. So they set out soon +after breakfast, leaving Chetwoof in charge of the camp, and with orders +to catch enough fish for dinner. + +"We'll be ready to eat them, heads and tails," said Ted, and his father +added, laughingly: + +"'Bible, bones, and hymn-book, too.'" + +"What does that mean?" asked Ted, as Kalitan looked up inquiringly. + +"Once a writer named Macaulay said he could make a rhyme for any word in +the English language, and a man replied, 'You can't rhyme Timbuctoo.' +But he answered without a pause: + + "If I were a Cassowary + On the plains of Timbuctoo, + I'd eat up a missionary, + Bible, bones, and hymn-book, too." + +Ted laughed, but Kalitan said, grimly: + +"Not good to eat Boston missionary, he all skin and bone!" + +"Where did they get the name Alaska?" asked Ted, as they tramped over +the snow toward the glacier. + +"Al-ay-ck-sa--great country," said Kalitan. + +"It certainly is," said Ted. "It's fine! I never saw anything like this +at home," pointing as he spoke to the scene in front of him. + +A group of evergreen trees, firs and the Alaska spruce, so useful for +fires and torches, fringed the edge of the ice-field, green and verdant +in contrast to the gleaming snows of the mountain, which rose in a +gentle slope at first, then precipitously, in a dazzling and enchanting +combination of colour. It was as if some marble palace of old rose +before them against the heavens, for the ice was cut and serrated into +spires and gables, turrets and towers, all seeming to be ornamented with +fretwork where the sun's rays struck the peaks and turned them into +silver and gold. Lower down the ice looked like animals, so twisted was +it into fantastic shapes; fierce sea monsters with yawning mouths +seeming ready to devour; bears and wolves, whales, gigantic elephants, +and snowy tigers, tropic beasts looking strangely out of place in this +arctic clime. + +Deep crevices cut the ice-fields, and in their green-blue depths lurked +death, for the least misstep would dash the traveller into an abyss +which had no bottom. Beyond the glacier itself, the snow-capped +mountains rose grand and serene, their glittering peaks clear against +the blue sky, which hue the glacier reflected and played with in a +thousand glinting shades, from purpling amethyst to lapis lazuli and +turquoise. + +As they gazed spellbound, a strange thing occurred, a thing of such +wonder and beauty that Ted could but grasp his father's arm in silence. + +Suddenly the peaks seemed to melt away, the white ice-pinnacles became +real turrets, houses and cathedrals appeared, and before them arose a +wonderful city of white marble, dream-like and shadowy, but beautiful as +Aladdin's palace in the "Arabian Nights." At last Ted could keep silent +no longer. + +"What is it?" he cried, and the old chief answered, gravely: + +"The City of the Dead," but his father said: + +"A mirage, my boy. They are often seen in these regions, but you are +fortunate in seeing one of the finest I have ever witnessed." + +"What is a mirage?" demanded Ted. + +"An optical delusion," said his father, "and one I am sure I couldn't +explain so that you would understand it. The queer thing about a mirage +is that you usually see the very thing most unlikely to be found in that +particular locality. In the Sahara, men see flowers and trees and +fountains, and here on this glacier we see a splendid city." + +"It certainly is queer. What makes glaciers, daddy?" Ted was even more +interested than usual in his father's talk because of Kalitan, whose +dark eyes never left Mr. Strong's face, and who seemed to drink in every +word of information as eagerly as a thirsty bird drinks water. + +"The dictionaries tell you that glaciers are fields of ice, or snow and +ice, formed in the regions of perpetual snow, and moving slowly down the +mountain slopes or valleys. Many people say the glaciers are the fathers +of the icebergs which float at sea, and that these are broken off the +glacial stream, but others deny this. When the glacial ice and snow +reaches a point where the air is so warm that the ice melts as fast as +it is pushed down from above, the glacier ends and a river begins. These +are the finest glaciers in the world, except, perhaps, those of the +Himalayas. + +"This bids fair to be a wonderfully interesting place for my work, Ted, +and I'm glad you're likely to be satisfied with your new friends, for I +shall have to go to many places and do a lot of things less interesting +than the things Kalitan can show you. + +"See these blocks of fine marble and those superb masses of porphyry and +chalcedony,--but there's something which will interest you more. Take my +gun and see if you can't bring down a bird for supper." + +Wild ducks were flying low across the edge of the glacier and quite near +to the boys, and Ted grasped his father's gun in wild excitement. He was +never allowed to touch a gun at home. Dearly as he loved his mother, it +had always seemed very strange to him that she should show such poor +taste about firearms, and refuse to let him have any; and now that he +had a gun really in his hands, he could hardly hold it, he was so +excited. Of course it was not the first time, for his father had allowed +him to practise shooting at a mark ever since they had reached Alaska, +but this was the first time he had tried to shoot a living target. He +selected his duck, aimed quickly, and fired. Bang! Off went the gun, +and, wonder of wonders! two ducks fell instead of one. + +"Well done, Ted, that duck was twins," cried his father, laughing, +almost as excited as the boy himself, and they ran to pick up the birds. +Kalitan smiled, too, and quietly picked up one, saying: + +"This one Kalitan's," showing, as he spoke, his arrow through the bird's +side, for he had discharged an arrow as Ted fired his gun. + +"Too bad, Ted. I thought you were a mighty hunter, a Nimrod who killed +two birds with one stone," said Mr. Strong, but Ted laughed and said: + +"So I got the one I shot at, I don't care." + +They had wild duck at supper that night, for Chetwoof plucked the birds +and roasted them on a hot stone over the spruce logs, and Ted, tired and +wet and hungry, thought he had never tasted such a delicious meal in his +life. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +TED MEETS MR. BRUIN + + +IT seemed to Ted as if he had scarcely touched the pillow on the nights +which followed before it was daylight, and he would awake to find the +sun streaming in at his tent flap. He always meant to go fishing with +Kalitan before breakfast, so the moment he woke up he jumped out of bed, +if his pile of fragrant pine boughs covered with skins could be called a +bed, and hurried through his toilet. Quick as he tried to be, however, +he was never ready before Kalitan, for, when Ted appeared, the Indian +boy had always had his roll in the snow and was preparing his lines. + +Kalitan was perfectly fascinated with the American boy. He thought him +the most wonderful specimen of a boy that he had ever seen. He knew so +much that Kalitan did not, and talked so brightly that being with Ted +was to the Indian like having a book without the bother of reading. +There were some things about him that Kalitan could not understand, to +be sure. Ted talked to his father just as if he were another boy. He +even spoke to Tyee Klake on occasions when that august personage had not +only not asked him a question, but was not speaking at all. From the +Thlinkit point of view, this was a most remarkable performance on Ted's +part, but Kalitan thought it must be all right for a "Boston boy," for +even the stern old chief seemed to regard happy-go-lucky Ted with +approval. + +Ted, on the other hand, thought Kalitan the most remarkable boy he had +ever met in all his life. He had not been much with boys. His "Lady +Mother," as he always called the gentle, brown-eyed being who ruled his +father and himself, had not cared to have her little Galahad mingle +with the rougher city boys who thronged the streets, and had kept him +with herself a great deal. Ted had loved books, and he and his little +sister Judith had lived in a pleasant atmosphere of refinement, playing +happily together until the boy had grown almost to dread anything common +or low. His mother knew he had moral courage, and would face any issue +pluckily, but his father feared he would grow up a milksop, and thought +he needed hardening. + +Mrs. Strong objected to the hardening process if it consisted in turning +her boy loose to learn the ways of the city streets, but had consented +to his going with his father, urged thereto by fears for his health, +which was not of the best, and the knowledge that he had reached the +"bear and Indian" age, and it was certainly a good thing for him to have +his experiences first-hand. + +To Ted the whole thing was perfectly delightful. When he lay down at +night, he would often like to see "Mother and Ju," but he was generally +so tired that he was asleep before he had time to think enough to be +really homesick. During the day there was too much doing to have any +thinking time, and, since he had met this boy friend, he thought of +little else but him and what they were to do next. The Tyee had assured +Mr. Strong that it was perfectly safe for the boys to go about together. + +"Kalitan knows all the trails," he said. "He take care of white brother. +Anything come, call Chetwoof." + +As Mr. Strong was very anxious to penetrate the glacier under Klake's +guidance, and wanted Ted to enjoy himself to the full, he left the boys +to themselves, the only stipulation being that they should not go on the +water without Chetwoof. + +There seemed to be always something new to do. As the days grew warmer, +the ice broke in the river, and the boys tramped all over the country. +Ted learned to use the bow and arrow, and brought down many a bird for +supper, and proud he was when he served up for his father a wild duck, +shot, plucked, and cooked all by himself. + +They fished in the stream by day and set lines by night. They trapped +rabbits and hares in the woods, and one day even got a silver fox, a +skin greatly prized by the fur traders on account of its rarity. Kalitan +insisted that Ted should have it, though he could have gotten forty +dollars for it from a white trader, and Ted was rejoiced at the idea of +taking it home to make a set of furs for Judith. + +One day Ted had a strange experience, and not a very pleasant one, which +might have been very serious had it not been for Kalitan. He had noticed +a queer-looking plant on the river-bank the day before, and had stopped +to pick it up, when he received such a sudden and unexpected pricking +as to cause him to jump back and shout for Kalitan. His hand felt as if +it had been pierced by a thousand needles, and he flew to a snow-bank to +rub it with snow. + +"I must have gotten hold of some kind of a cactus," he said to Kalitan, +who only replied: + +"Huh! picked hedgehog," as he pointed to where Ted's cactus was ambling +indignantly away with every quill rattling and set straight out in anger +at having his morning nap disturbed. Kalitan wrapped Ted's hand in soft +mud, which took the pain out, but he couldn't use it much for the next +few days, and did not feel eager to hunt when his father and the Tyee +started out in the morning. Kalitan remained with him, although his eyes +looked wistful, for he had heard the chief talk about bear tracks having +been seen the day before. Bears were quite a rarity, but sometimes an +old cinnamon or even a big black bruin would venture down in search of +fresh fish, which he would catch cleverly with his great paws. + +Kalitan and Ted fished awhile, and then Ted wandered away a little, +wondering what lay around a point of rock which he had never yet +explored. Something lay there which he had by no means expected to see, +and he scarcely knew what to make of it. On the river-bank, close to the +edge of the stream, was a black figure, an Indian fishing, as he +supposed, and he paused to watch. The fisherman was covered with fur +from head to foot, and, as Ted watched him, he seemed to have no line or +rod. Going nearer, the boy grew even more puzzled, and, though the man's +back was toward him, he could easily see that there was something +unusual about the figure. Just as he was within hailing distance and +about to shout, the figure made a quick dive toward the water and sprang +back again with a fish between his paws, and Ted saw that it was a huge +bear. He gave a sharp cry and then stood stock-still. The creature +looked around and stood gnawing his fish and staring at Ted as stupidly +as the boy stared at him. Then Ted heard a halloo behind him and +Kalitan's voice: + +"Run for Chetwoof, quick!" + +Ted obeyed as the animal started to move off. He ran toward the camp, +hearing the report of Kalitan's gun as he ran. Chetwoof, hearing the +noise, hurried out, and it was but a few moments before he was at +Kalitan's side. To Ted it seemed like a day before he could get back and +see what was happening, but he arrived on the scene in time to see +Chetwoof despatch the animal. + +"Hurrah!" cried Ted. "You've killed a bear," but Chetwoof only grunted +crossly. + +"Very bad luck!" he said, and Kalitan explained: + +"Indians don't like to kill bears or ravens. Spirits in them, maybe +ancestors." + +Ted looked at him in great astonishment, but Kalitan explained: + +"Once, long ago, a Thlinkit girl laughed at a bear track in the snow and +said: 'Ugly animal must have made that track!' But a bear heard and was +angry. He seized the maiden and bore her to his den, and turned her into +a bear, and she dwelt with him, until one day her brother killed the +bear and she was freed. And from that day Thlinkits speak respectfully +of bears, and do not try to kill them, for they know not whether it is a +bear or a friend who hides within the shaggy skin." + +The Tyee and Mr. Strong were greatly surprised when they came home to +see the huge carcass of Mr. Bruin, and they listened to the account of +Kalitan's bravery. The old chief said little, but he looked approvingly +at Kalitan, and said "Hyas kloshe" (very good), which unwonted praise +made the boy's face glow with pleasure. They had a great discussion as +to whom the bear really belonged. Ted had found him, Kalitan had shot +him first, and Chetwoof had killed him, so they decided to go shares. +Ted wanted the skin to take home, and thought it would make a splendid +rug for his mother's library, so his father paid Kalitan and Chetwoof +what each would have received as their share had the skin been sold to a +trader, and they all had bear meat for supper. Ted thought it finer than +any beefsteak he had ever eaten, and over it Kalitan smacked his lips +audibly. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +A MONSTER OF THE DEEP + + +THE big bear occupied considerable attention for several days. He had to +be carefully skinned and part of the meat dried for future use. Alaskans +never use salt for preserving meat. Indeed they seem to dislike salt +very much. It had taken Ted some time to learn to eat all his meat and +fish quite fresh, without a taste of salt, but he had grown to like it. +There is something in the sun and wind of Alaska which cures meat +perfectly, and the bear's meat was strung on sticks and dried in the sun +so that they might enjoy it for a long time. + +It seemed as if the adventure with Bruin was enough to last the boys for +several days, for Ted's hand still pained him from the porcupine's +quills, and he felt tired and lazy. He lay by the camp-fire one +afternoon listening to Kalitan's tales of his island home, when his +father came in from a long tramp, and, looking at him a little +anxiously, asked: + +"What's the matter, son?" + +"Nothing, I'm only tired," said Ted, but Kalitan said: + +"Porcupine quills poison hand. Well in a few days." + +"So your live cactus is getting in his work, is he? I'm glad it wasn't +the bear you mistook for an Alaskan posy and tried to pick. I'm tired +myself," and Mr. Strong threw himself down to rest. + +"Daddy, how did we come to have Alaska, anyway?" + +"Well, that's a long story," said his father, "but an interesting one." + +"Do tell us about it," urged Ted. "I know we bought it, but what did we +pay the Indians for it? I shouldn't have thought they'd have sold such a +fine country." + +Kalitan looked up quickly, and there was a sudden gleam in his dark eyes +that Ted had never seen before. + +"Thlinkits never sell," he said. "Russians steal." + +Mr. Strong put his hand kindly on the boy's head. + +"You're right, Kalitan," he said. "The Russians never conquered the +Thlinkits, the bravest tribe in all Alaska. + +"You see, Teddy, it was this way. A great many years ago, about 1740, a +Danish sailor named Bering, who was in the service of the Russians, +sailed across the ocean and discovered the strait named for him, and a +number of islands. Some of these were not inhabited, others had Indians +or Esquimos on them, but, after the manner of the early discoverers, +Bering took possession of them all in the name of the Emperor of +Russia. It doesn't seem right as we look at things now, but in those +days 'might made right,' and it was just the same way the English did +when they came to America. + +"The Russians settled here, finding the fishing and furs fine things for +trade, and driving the Indians, who would not yield to them, farther and +farther inland. In 1790 the Czar made Alexander Baranoff manager of the +trading company. Baranoff established trading-posts in various places, +and settled at Sitka, where you can see the ruins of the splendid castle +he built. The Russians also sent missionaries to convert the Indians to +the Greek Church, which is the church of Russia. The Indians, however, +never learned to care for the Russians, and often were cruelly treated +by them. The Russians, however, tried to do something for their +education, and established several schools. One as early as 1775, on +Kadiak Island, had thirty pupils, who studied arithmetic, reading, +navigation, and four of the mechanical trades, and this is a better +record than the American purchasers can show, I am sorry to say. + +"One of the recent travellers[6] in Alaska says that he met in the +country 'American citizens who never in their lives heard a prayer for +the President of the United States, nor of the Fourth of July, nor the +name of the capital of the nation, but who have been taught to pray for +the Emperor of Russia, to celebrate his birthday, and to commemorate the +victories of ancient Greece.' In March, 1867, the Russians sold Alaska +to the United States for $7,200,000 in gold. It was bought for a song +almost, when we consider the immense amount of money made for the +government by the seal fisheries, the cod and salmon industries, and +the opening of the gold fields. The resources of the country are not +half-known, and the government is beginning to see this. That is one of +the reasons they have sent me here, with the other men, to find out what +the earth holds for those who do not know how to look for its treasures. +Gold is not the best thing the earth produces. There is land in Alaska +little known full of coal and other useful minerals. Other land is +covered with magnificent timber which could be shipped to all parts of +the world. There are pasture-lands where stock will fatten like pigs +without any other feeding; there are fertile soils which will raise +almost any crops, and there are intelligent Indians who can be taught to +work and be useful members of society. I do not mean dragged off to the +United States to learn things they could never use in their home lives, +but who should be educated here to make the best of their talents in +their home surroundings. + +"That is one crying shame to our government, that they have neglected +the Alaskan citizens. Forty years have been wasted, but we are beginning +to wake up now, and twenty years more will see the Indians of Kalitan's +generation industrious men and women, not only clever hunters and +fishermen, but lumbermen, coopers, furniture makers, farmers, miners, +and stock-raisers." + +At this moment their quiet conversation was interrupted by a wild shout +from the shore, and, springing to their feet, they saw Chetwoof +gesticulating wildly and shouting to the Tyee, who had been mending his +canoe by the river-bank. Kalitan dropped everything and ran without a +word, scudding like the arrow from which he took his name. Before Ted +could follow or ask what was the matter, from the ocean a huge body rose +ten feet out of the water, spouting jets of spray twenty feet into the +air, the sun striking his sides and turning them to glistening silver. +Then it fell back, the waters churning into frothy foam for a mile +around. + +"It's a whale, Ted, sure as you live. Luck certainly is coming your +way," said his father; but, at the word "whale," Ted had started after +Kalitan, losing no time in getting to the scene of action as fast as +possible. + +"Watch the Tyee!" called Kalitan over his shoulder, as both boys ran +down to the water's edge. + +The old chief was launching his _kiak_ into the seething waters, and to +Ted it seemed incredible that he meant to go in that frail bark in +pursuit of the mighty monster. The old man's face, however, was as calm +as though starting on a pleasure-trip in peaceful waters, and Ted +watched in breathless admiration to see what would happen next. + +Klake paddled swiftly out to sea, drawing as near as he dared to where +the huge monster splashed idly up and down like a great puppy at play. +He stopped the _kiak_ and watched; then poised his spear and threw it, +and so swift and graceful was his gesture that Ted exclaimed in +amazement. + +"Tyee Klake best harpoon-thrower of all the Thlinkits," said Kalitan, +proudly. "Watch!" + +Ted needed no such instructions. His keen eyes passed from fish to man +and back again, and no movement of the Tyee escaped him. + +The instant the harpoon was thrown, the Tyee paddled furiously away, for +when a harpoon strikes a whale, he is likely to lash violently with his +tail, and may destroy his enemy, and this is a moment of terrible danger +to the harpooner. But the whale was too much astonished to fight, and, +with a terrific splash, he dived deep, deep into the water, to get rid +of that stinging thing in his side, in the cold green waters below. + +[Illustration: "AWAY WENT ANOTHER STINGING LANCE."] + +The Tyee waited, his grim face tense and earnest. It might have been +fifteen minutes, for whales often stay under water for twenty minutes +before coming to the surface to breathe, but to Kalitan and Ted it +seemed an hour. + +Then the spray dashed high into the air again, and the instant the huge +body appeared, Klake drew near, and away went another stinging lance +again, swift and, oh! so sure of aim. This time the whale struck out +wildly, and Kalitan held his breath, while Ted gasped at the Tyee's +danger, for his _kiak_ rocked like a shell and then was quite hidden +from their sight by the spray which was dashed heavenward like clouds of +white smoke. + +Once more the creature dived, and this time he stayed down only a few +minutes, and, when he came up, blood spouted into the air and dyed the +sea crimson, and Kalitan exclaimed: + +"Pierced his lungs! Now he must die." + +There was one more bright, glancing weapon flying through the air, and +Ted noticed attached to it by a thong a curious-looking bulb, and asked +Kalitan: + +"What is on that lance?" + +"Sealskin buoy," said Kalitan. "We make the bag and blow it up, tie it +to the harpoon, and when the lance sticks into the whale, the buoy makes +it very hard for him to dive. After awhile he dies and drifts ashore." + +The waters about the whale were growing red, and the carcass seemed +drifting out to sea, and at last the Tyee seemed satisfied. He sent a +last look toward the huge body, then turned his _kiak_ toward the +watchers on the banks. + +"If it only comes to shore," said Kalitan. + +"What will you do with it?" asked Ted. + +"Oh, there are lots of things we can do with a whale," said Kalitan. +"The blubber is the best thing to eat in all the world. Then we use the +oil in a bowl with a bit of pith in it to light our huts. The bones are +all useful in building our houses. Whales were once bears, but they +played too much on the shore and ran away to sea, so they wore off all +their fur on the rocks, and had their feet nibbled off by the fishes." + +"Well, this one didn't have his tail nibbled off at any rate," laughed +Ted. "I saw it flap at the Tyee, and thought that was the last of him, +sure." + +"Tyee much big chief," said Kalitan, and just then the old man's _kiak_ +drew near them, and he stepped ashore as calmly as though he had not +just been through so exciting a scene with a mighty monster of the +deep. + +FOOTNOTE: + +[6] Dr. Sheldon Jackson, General Agent of Education in the Territory. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE ISLAND HOME OF KALITAN + + +SWIFT and even were the strokes of the paddles as the canoes sped over +the water toward Kalitan's island home. Ted was so excited that he could +hardly sit still, and Tyee Klake gave him a warning glance and a +muttered "Kooletchika."[7] + +The day before a big canoe had come to the camp, the paddlers bearing +messages for the Tyee, and he had had a long conversation with Mr. +Strong. The result was astonishing to Teddy, for his father told him +that he was to go for a month to the island with Kalitan. This delighted +him greatly, but he was a little frightened when he found that his +father was to stay behind. + +"It's just this way, son," Mr. Strong explained to him. "I'm here in +government employ, taking government pay to do government work. I must +do it and do it well in the shortest time possible. You will have a far +better time on the island with Kalitan than you could possibly have +loafing around the camp here. You couldn't go to many places where I am +going, and, if my mind is easy about you, I can take Chetwoof and do my +work in half the time. I'll come to the island in three or four weeks, +and we'll take a week's vacation together, and then we'll hit the trail +for the gold-fields. Are you satisfied with this arrangement?" + +"Yes, sir." Ted's tone was dubious, but his face soon cleared up. "A +month won't be very long, father." + +"No, I'll wager you'll be sorry to leave when I come for you. Try and +not make any trouble. Of course Indian ways are not ours, but you'll get +used to it all and enjoy it. It's a chance most boys would be crazy +over, and you'll have tales to tell when you get home to make your +playmates envy you. I'm glad I have a son I can trust to keep straight +when he is out of my sight," and he laid his hand affectionately on the +boy's shoulder. Ted looked his father squarely in the eye, but gave only +a little nod in answer, then he laughed his clear, ringing laugh. + +"Wouldn't mother have spasms!" he exclaimed. Mr. Strong laughed too, but +said: + +"You'll be just as well off tumbling around with Kalitan as falling off +a glacier or two, as you would be certain to do if you were with me." + +Teddy felt a little blue when he said good-bye to his father, but +Kalitan quickly dispelled his gloom by a great piece of news. + +"Great time on island," he said, as the canoe glided toward the dim +outline of land to which Ted's thoughts had so often turned. "Tyee's +whale came ashore. We go to see him cut up." + +"Hurrah!" cried Ted, delighted. "To think I shall see all that! What +else will we do, Kalitan?" + +"Hunt, fish, hear old Kala-kash stories. See berry dance if you stay +long enough, perhaps a potlatch; do many things," said the Indian. + +One of the Indian paddlers said something to Kalitan, and he laughed a +little, and Ted asked, curiously: "What did he say?" + +"Said Kalitan Tenas learned to talk as much as a Boston boy," said +Kalitan, laughing heartily, and Ted laughed, too. + +The canoes were nearing the shore of a wooded island, and Ted saw a +fringe of trees and some native houses clustered picturesquely against +them at the crest of a small hill which sloped down to the water's +edge, where stood a group of people awaiting the canoes. + +[Illustration: "A GROUP OF PEOPLE AWAITING THE CANOES."] + +"My home," said Kalitan, pointing to the largest house, "my people." +There was a great deal of pride in his tone and look, and he received a +warm welcome as the canoes touched land and their occupants sprang on +shore. The boys crowded around the young Indian and chattered and +gesticulated toward Ted, while a bright-looking little Malamute sprang +upon Kalitan and nearly knocked him down, covering his face with eager +puppy kisses. + +The girls were less boisterous, and regarded Teddy with shy curiosity. +Some of them were quite pretty, and the babies were as cunning as the +puppies. They barked every time the dogs did, in a funny, hoarse little +way, and, indeed, Alaskan babies learn to bark long before they learn to +talk. + +The Tyee's wife received Teddy kindly, and he soon found himself +quite at home among these hospitable people, who seemed always friendly +and natural. Nearly all spoke some English, and he rapidly added to his +store of Chinook, so that he had no trouble in making himself understood +or in understanding. Of course he missed his father, but he had little +time to be lonely. Life in the village was anything but uneventful. + +At first there was the whale to be attended to, and all the village +turned out for that. The huge creature had drifted ashore on the farther +side of the island, and Ted was much interested in seeing him gradually +disposed of. Great masses of blubber were stripped from the sides to be +used later both for food and fuel, the whalebone was carefully secured +to be sold to the traders, and it seemed to Ted that there was not one +thing in that vast carcass for which the Indians did not have some use. + +Ted soon tired of watching the many things done with the whale, but +there was plenty to do and see in the village. + +The village houses were all alike. There was one large room in which the +people cooked, ate, and slept. The girls had blankets strung across one +corner, behind which were their beds. Teddy was given one also for his +corner of the great room in the Tyee's house. + +He learned to eat the food and to like it very much. There was dried +fish, herons' eggs, berries, or those put up in seal oil, which is +obtained by frying the fat out of the blubber of the seal. The Alaskans +use this oil in nearly all their cooking, and are very fond of it. Ted +ate also dried seaweed, chopped and boiled in seal oil, which tasted +very much like boiled and salted leather, but he liked it very well. +Indeed he grew so strong and well, out-of-doors all day in the clear air +and bright sunshine of the Alaskan June, that he could eat anything and +tramp all day without being too tired to sleep like a top all night, +and wake ready for a new day with a zest he never felt at home. + +Fresh fish were plentiful. The boys caught salmon, smelts, and +whitefish, and many were dried for the coming winter, while clams, +gum-boots, sea-cucumbers, and devil-fish, found on the rocks of the +shore, were every-day diet. + +Kalitan's sister and Ted became great friends. She was older than +Kalitan, and, though only fifteen, was soon to be married to Tah-ge-ah, +a fine young Indian who was ready to pay high for her, which was not +strange, for she was both pretty and sweet. + +"At the next full moon," said Kalitan, "there will be a potlatch, and +Tanana will be sold to Tah-ge-ah. He says he will give four hundred +blankets for her, and my uncle is well pleased. Many only pay ten +blankets for a wife, but of course we would not sell my sister for that. +She is of high caste, chief's daughter, niece, and sister," the boy +spoke proudly, and Ted answered: + +"She's so pretty, too. She's not like the Indian girls I saw at Wrangel +and Juneau. Why, there the women sat around as dirty as dogs on the +sidewalk, and didn't seem to care how they looked. They had baskets to +sell, and were too lazy to care whether any one bought them or not. They +weren't a bit like Tanana. She's as pretty as a Japanese." + +Kalitan smiled, well pleased, and Ted added, "I guess the Thlinkits must +be the best Indians in Alaska." + +Kalitan laughed outright at this. + +"Thlinkits pretty good," he said. "Tanana good girl. She learned much +good at the mission school, marry Tah-ge-ah, and make people better. She +can weave blankets, make fine baskets, and keep house like a white +girl." + +"She's all right," said Ted. "But, Kalitan, what is a potlatch?" + +"Potlatch is a good-will feast," said his friend. "Very fine thing, but +white men do not like. Say Indian feasts are all bad. Why is it bad when +an Indian gives away all his goods for others? That is what a great +potlatch is. When white men give us whiskey and it is drunk too much, +then it is very bad. But Tyee will not have that for Tanana's feast. We +will drink only quass,[8] as my people made it before they learned evil +drinks and fire-water, which make them crazy." + +"I guess Tyee Klake was right when he said all men were alike," said +Ted, sagely. "It seems to me that there are good and bad ones in all +countries. It's a pity you have had such bad white ones here in Alaska, +but I guess you have had good ones, too." + +"Plenty good, plenty bad, Thlinkit men and Boston men," said Kalitan, +"all same." + +FOOTNOTES: + +[7] "Dangerous channel." + +[8] Quass is a native drink, harmless and acid, made with rye and water +fermented. The bad Indians mix it with sugar, flour, dried apples, and +hops, and make a terribly intoxicating drink. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +TWILIGHT TALES AND TOTEMS + + +"ONCE a small girl child went by night to bring water. In the skies +above she saw the Moon shining brightly, pale and placid, and she put +forth her tongue at it, which was an evil thing, for the Moon is old, +and a Thlinkit child should show respect for age. So the Moon would not +endure so rude a thing from a girl child, and it came down from the sky +and took her thither. She cried out in fear and caught at the long grass +to keep herself from going up, but the Moon was strong and took her with +her water-bucket and her bunch of grass, and she never came back. Her +mother wept for her, but her father said: 'Cease. We have other girl +children; she is now wedded to the Moon; to him we need not give a +potlatch.' + +"You may see her still, if you will look at the Moon, there, grass in +one hand, bucket in the other, and when the new Moon tips to one side +and the water spills from the clouds and it is the months of rain, it is +the bad Moon maiden tipping over her water-bucket upon the earth. No +Thlinkit child would dare ever to put her tongue forth at the Moon, for +fear of a like fate to that of Squi-ance, the Moon maiden." + +Tanana's voice was soft and low, and she looked very pretty as she sat +in the moonlight at the door of the hut and told Kalitan and Ted quaint +old stories. Ted was delighted with her tales, and begged for another +and yet another, and Tanana told the quaint story of Kagamil. + +"A mighty _toyon_[9] dwelt on the island of Kagamil. By name he was +Kat-haya-koochat, and he was of great strength and much to be feared. He +had long had a death feud with people of the next totem, but the bold +warrior Yakaga, chieftain of the tribe, married the toyon's daughter, +and there was no more feud. Zampa was the son of Kat-haya-koochat, and +his pride. He built for this son a fine _bidarka_,[10] and the boy +launched it on the sea. His father watched him sail and called him to +return, lest evil befall. But Zampa heard not his father's voice and +pursued diving birds,[11] and, lo! he was far from land and the dark +fell. He sailed to the nearest shore and beheld the village of Yakaga, +where the people of his sister's husband made him welcome, though Yakaga +was not within his hut. There was feasting and merry-making, and, +according to their custom, he, the stranger, was given a chieftain's +daughter to wife, and her name was Kitt-a-youx; and Zampa loved her and +she him, and he returned not home. But Kitt-a-youx's father liked him +not, and treated him with rudeness because of the old enmity with his +Tyee father, so Zampa said to Kitt-a-youx: 'Let us go hence. We cannot +be happy here. Let us go from your father, who is unfriendly to me, and +seek the _barrabora_ of my father, the mighty chief, that happiness may +come upon us,' and Kitt-a-youx said: 'What my lord says is well.' + +"Then Zampa placed her in his canoe, and alone beneath the stars they +sailed and it was well, and Zampa's arm was strong at his paddle. But, +lo! they heard another paddle, and one came after them, and soon arrows +flew about them, arrows swift and cruel, and one struck his paddle from +his hand and his canoe was overturned. The pursuer came and placed +Kitt-a-youx in his canoe, seeking, too, for Zampa, but, alas! Zampa was +drowned. And when his pursuer dragged his body to the surface, he gave +a mighty cry, for, lo! it was his brother-in-law whom he had pursued, +for he was Yakaga. Then fearing the terrible rage of Zampa's father, he +dared not return with the body, so he left it with the overturned canoe +in the kelp and weeds. Kitt-a-youx he bore with him to his own island. +There she was sad as the sea-gull's scream, for the lord she loved was +dead. And her father gave her to another _toyon_, who was cruel to her, +and her life was as a slave's, and she loathed her life until Zampa's +child was born to her, and for it she lived. Alas, it was a girl child +and her husband hated it, and Kitt-a-youx saw nothing for it but to be +sold as a slave as was she herself. And she looked by day and by night +at the sea, and its cold, cold waves seemed warmer to her than the arms +of men. 'With my girl child I shall go hence,' she whispered to herself, +'and the Great Unknown Spirit will be kind.' + +"So by night she stole away in a canoe and steered to sea, ere she knew +where she was, reaching the seaweeds where she had journeyed with her +young husband. The morning broke, and she saw the weeds and the kelp +where her lover had gone from her sight, and, with a glad sigh, she +clasped Zampa's child to her breast and sank down among the weeds where +he had died. So her tired spirit was at rest, for a woman is happier who +dies with him she loves. + +"Now Zampa's father had found his boy's body and mourned over it, and +buried it in a mighty cave, the which he had once made for his furs and +stores. With it he placed bows and arrows and many valuables in respect +for the dead. And Zampa's sister, going to his funeral feast, fell upon +a stone with her child, so that both were killed. Then broke the old +chief's heart. Beside her brother he laid her in the cave, and gave +orders that he himself should be placed there as well, when grief +should have made way with him. Then he died of sorrow for his children, +and his people interred him in his burial cave, and with him they put +much wealth and blankets and weapons. + +"When, therefore, the people of his tribe found the bodies of +Kitt-a-youx and her child among the kelp, having heard of her love for +Zampa, they bore them to the same cave, and, wrapping them in furs, they +placed Kitt-a-youx beside her beloved husband, and in her burial she +found her home and felt the kindness of the Great Spirit. This, then, is +the story of the burial cave of Kagamil, and since that day no man dwelt +upon the island, and it is known as the 'island of the dead.'" + +"I'd like to see it, I can tell you," said Ted. "Are there any burial +caves around here?" + +"The Thlinkits do not bury in caves," said Tanana. "We used to burn our +dead, but often we place them in totem-poles." + +"I thought those great poles by your doors were totems," said Ted, +puzzled. + +"Yes," said the girl. "They are caste totems, and all who are of any +rank have them. As we belong to the Raven, or Bear, or Eagle clan, we +have the carved poles to show our rank, but the totem of the dead is +quite different. It does not stand beside the door, but far away. It is +alone, as the soul of the dead in whose honour it is made. It is but +little carved. A square hole is cut at the back of the pole, and the +body of the dead, wrapped in a matting of cedar bark, is placed within, +a board being nailed so that the body will not fall to the ground. A +potlatch is given, and food from the feast is put in the fire for the +dead person." + +"It seems queer to put weapons and blankets and things to eat on +people's graves," said Ted. "Why do they do it?" + +"Of the dead we know nothing," said Tanana. "Perhaps the warrior spirit +wishes his arrows in the Land of the Great Unknown." + +"Yes, but he can't come back for them," persisted Ted. + +"At Wrangel, Boston man put flowers on his girl's grave," said Kalitan, +drily. "She come back and smell posy?" + +Having no answer ready, Ted changed the subject and asked: + +"Why do you have the raven at the top of your totem pole?" + +"Indian cannot marry same totem," said Kalitan. "My father was eagle +totem, my mother was raven totem. He carve her totem at the top of the +pole, then his totem and those of the family are carved below. The +greater the family the taller the totem." + +"How do you get these totems?" demanded Ted. + +"Clan totems we take from our parents, but a man may choose his own +totem. Before he becomes a man he must go alone into the forest to +fast, and there he chooses his totem, and he is brother to that animal +all his life, and may not kill it. When he comes forth, he may take part +in all the ceremonies of his tribe." + +"Why, it is something like knighthood and the vigil at arms and +escutcheons, and all those Round-Table things," exclaimed Ted, in +delight, for he dearly loved the stirring tales of King Arthur and his +knights and the doughty deeds of Camelot. + +"Tell us about that," said Kalitan, so Ted told them many tales in the +moonlight, as they sat beneath the shadows of the quaint and curious +totem-poles of Kalitan's tribe. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[9] Chieftain. + +[10] Canoe. + +[11] Ducks. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +THE BERRY DANCE + + +TEDDY'S month upon the island stretched out into two. His father came +and went, finding the boy so happy and well that he left him with an +easy mind. Ted's fair skin was tanned to a warm brown, and, clad in +Indian clothes, save for his aureole of copper-coloured hair, so strong +a contrast to the straight black locks of his Indian brothers, he could +hardly be told from one of the island lads who roamed all day by wood +and shore. They called him "Yakso pil chicamin,"[12] and all the village +liked him. + +Tanana's marriage-feast was held, and she and Tah-ge-ah went to +housekeeping in a little hut, where the one room was as clean and neat +as could be, and not a bit like the dirty rooms of some of the natives. +Tanana spent all her spare time weaving beautiful baskets, for her slim +fingers were very skilful. Some of the baskets which she made out of the +inner bark of the willow-tree were woven so closely that they would hold +water, and Teddy never tired of watching her weave the gay colours in +and out, nor of seeing the wonderful patterns grow. Tah-ge-ah would take +them to the mainland when she had enough made, and sell them to the +travellers from the States. Meantime Tah-ge-ah himself was very, very +busy carving the totem-pole for his new home, for Tanana was a +chieftain's daughter, and he, too, was of high caste, and their totem +must be carved and stand one hundred feet high beside their door, lest +they be reproached. + +Ted also enjoyed seeing old Kala-kash carve, for he was the finest +carver among the Indians, and it was wonderful to see him cut strange +figures out of bone, wood, horn, fish-bones, and anything his gnarled +old fingers could get hold of, and he would carve grasshoppers, bears, +minnows, whales, sea-gulls, babies, or idols. He made, too, a canoe for +Ted, a real Alaskan dugout, shaping the shell from a log and making it +soft by steam, filling the hole with water and throwing in red-hot +stones. The wood was then left to season, and Ted could hardly wait +patiently until sun and wind and rain had made his precious craft +seaworthy. Then it was painted with paint made by rubbing a certain rock +over the surface of a coarse stone and the powder mixed with oil or +water. + +At last it was done, a shapely thing, more beautiful in Ted's eyes than +any launch or yacht he had ever seen at home. His canoe had a carved +stern and a sharp prow which came out of the water, and which had carved +upon it a fine eagle. Kala-kash had not asked Ted what his totem was, +but supposing that the American eagle on the buttons of the boy's coat +was his emblem, had carved the rampant bird upon the canoe as the boy's +totem. Ted learned to paddle and to fish, never so well as Kalitan, of +course, for he was born to it, but still he did very well, and enjoyed +it hugely. + +Happily waned the summer days, and then came the time of the berry +dance, which Kalitan had spoken of so often that Ted was very anxious to +see it. + +The salmon-berry was fully ripe, a large and luscious berry, found in +two colours, yellow and dark red. Besides these there were other small +berries, maruskins, like the New England dewberries, huckleberries, and +whortleberries. + +"We have five kinds of berries on our island," said Kalitan. "All good. +The birds, flying from the mainland, first brought the seeds, and our +berries grow larger than almost any place in Alaska." + +"They're certainly good," said Ted, his mouth full as he spoke. "These +salmon-berries are a kind of a half-way between our blackberries and +strawberries. I never saw anything prettier than the way the red and +yellow berries grow so thick on the same bush--" + +"There come the canoes!" interrupted Kalitan, and the two boys ran down +to the water's edge, eager to be the first to greet the visitors. Tyee +Klake was giving a feast to the people of the neighbouring islands, and +a dozen canoes glided over the water from different directions. The +canoes were all gaily decorated, and they came swiftly onward to the +weird chant of the paddlers, which the breeze wafted to the listeners' +ears in a monotonous melody. + +Every one in the village had been astir since daybreak, preparing for +the great event. Parallel lines had been strung from the chief's house +to the shore, and from these were hung gay blankets, pieces of bright +calico, and festoons of leaves and flowers. As the canoes landed their +occupants, the dancers thronged to welcome their guests. The great drum +sounded its loud note, and the dancers, arrayed in wonderful blankets +woven in all manner of fanciful designs and trimmed with long woollen +fringes, swayed back and forth, up and down, to and fro, in a very +graceful manner, keeping time to the music. + +In the centre of the largest canoe stood the Tyee of a neighbouring +island, a tall Indian, dressed in a superb blanket with fringe a foot +long, fringed leggins and moccasins of walrus hide, and the chief's hat +to show his rank. It was a peculiar head-dress half a foot high, trimmed +in down and feathers. + +The Tyee, in perfect time to the music, swayed back and forth, never +ceasing for a moment, shaking his head so that the down was wafted in a +snowy cloud all over him. + +As the canoes reached the shallows, the shore Indians dashed into the +water to draw them up to land, and the company was joyously received. +Teddy was delighted, for in one of the canoes was his father, whom he +had not seen for several weeks. After the greetings were over, the +dancers arranged themselves in opposite lines, men on one side, women on +the other, and swayed their bodies while the drum kept up its unceasing +tum-tum-tum. + +"It's a little bit like square dances at home," said Ted. "It's ever so +pretty, isn't it? First they sway to the right, then to the left, over +and over and over; then they bend their bodies forward and backward +without bending their knees, then sway again, and bend to one side and +then the other, singing all the time. Isn't it odd, father?" + +"It certainly is, but it's very graceful," said Mr. Strong. "Some of the +girls are quite pretty, gentle-looking creatures, but the older women +are ugly." + +"The very old women look like the mummies in the museum at home," said +Ted. "There's one old woman, over a hundred years old, whose skin is +like a piece of parchment, and she wears the hideous lip-button which +most of the Thlinkits have stopped using. Kalitan says all the women +used to wear them. The girls used to make a cut in their chins between +the lip and the chin, and put in a piece of wood, changing it every few +days for a piece a little larger until the opening was stretched like a +second mouth. When they grew up, a wooden button like the bowl of a +spoon was set in the hole and constantly enlarged. The largest I have +seen was three inches long. Isn't it a curious idea, father?" + +"It certainly is, but there is no telling what women will admire. A +Chinese lady binds her feet, and an American her waist; a Maori woman +slits her nose, and an English belle pierces her ears. It's on the same +principle that your Thlinkit friends slit their chins for the +lip-button." + +"I'm mighty glad they don't do it now, for Tanana's as pretty as a pink, +and it would be a shame to spoil her face that way," said Ted. "The +dancing has stopped, father; let's see what they'll do next. There comes +Kalitan." + +A feast of berries was to follow the dance, and Kalitan led Mr. Strong +and Ted to the chief's house, which was gaily decorated with blankets +and bits of bright cloth. A table covered with a cloth was laid around +three sides of the room, and on this was spread hardtack and huge bowls +of berries of different colours. These were beaten up with sugar into a +foamy mixture, pink, purple, and yellow, according to the colour of the +berries, which tasted good and looked pretty. + +Ted and Kalitan had helped gather the berries, and their appetites were +quite of the best. Mr. Strong smiled to see how the once fussy little +gentleman helped himself with a right good-will to the Indian dainties +of his friends. + +Many pieces of goods had been provided for the potlatch, and these were +given away, given and received with dignified politeness. There was +laughing and merriment with the feast, and when it was all over, the +canoes floated away as they had come, into the sunset, which gilded all +the sea to rosy, golden beauty. + +Ted's share of the potlatch was a beautiful blanket of Tanana's weaving, +and he was delighted beyond measure. + +"You're a lucky boy, Ted," said his father. "People pay as high as +sixty-five dollars for an Alaskan blanket, and not always a perfect one +at that. Many of the Indians are using dyed yarns to weave them, but +yours is the genuine article, made from white goat's wool, long and +soft, and dyed only in the native reds and blacks. We shall have to do +something nice for Tanana when you leave." + +"I'd like to give her something, and Kalitan, too." Ted's face looked +very grave. "When do I have to go, father?" + +"Right away, I'm afraid," was the reply. "I've let you stay as long as +possible, and now we must start for our northern trip, if you are to see +anything at all of mines and Esquimos before we start home. The +mail-steamer passes Nuchek day after to-morrow, and we must go over +there in time to take it." + +"Yes, sir," said Ted, forlornly. He wanted to see the mines and all the +wonderful things of the far north, but he hated to leave his Indian +friends. + +"What's the trouble, Ted?" His father laid his hand on his shoulder, +disliking to see the bright face so clouded. + +"I was only thinking of Kalitan," said Ted. + +"Suppose we take Kalitan with us," said Mr. Strong. + +"Oh, daddy, could we really?" Ted jumped in excitement. + +"I'll ask the Tyee if he will lend him to us for a month," said Mr. +Strong, and in a few minutes it was decided, and Ted, with one great +bear's hug to thank his father, rushed off to find his friend and tell +him the glorious news. + +FOOTNOTE: + +[12] Copper hair. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +ON THE WAY TO NOME + + +"WELL, boys, we're off for a long sail, and I'm afraid you will be +rather tired with the steamer before you are done with her," said Mr. +Strong. They had boarded the mail-steamer late the night before, and, +going right to bed, had wakened early next day and rushed on deck to +find the August sun shining in brilliant beauty, the islands quite out +of sight, and nought but sea and sky around and above them. + +"Oh, I don't know; we'll find something to do," said Teddy. "You'll have +to tell us lots about the places we pass, and, if there aren't any other +boys on board, Kalitan and I will be together. What's the first place we +stop?" + +"We passed the Kenai Peninsula in the night. I wish you could have +caught a glimpse of some of the waterfalls, volcanoes, and glaciers. +They are as fine as any in Alaska," said Mr. Strong. "Our next stop will +be Kadiak Island." + +"Kadiak Island was once near the mainland," said Kalitan. "There was +only the narrowest passage of water, but a great Kenai otter tried to +swim the pass, and was caught fast. He struggled so that he made it +wider and wider, and at last pushed Kadiak way out to sea." + +"He must have been a whopper," said Ted, "to push it so far away. Is +that the island?" + +"Yes," said his father. "There are no splendid forests on the island as +there are on the mainland, but the grasses are superb, for the fog and +rain here keeps them green as emerald." + +"What a queer canoe that Indian has!" exclaimed Ted. "It isn't a bit +like yours, Kalitan." + +"It is _bidarka_," said Kalitan. "Kadiak people make canoe out of walrus +hide. They stretch it over frames of driftwood. It holds two people. +They sit in small hatch with apron all around their bodies, and the +_bidarka_ goes over the roughest sea and floats like a bladder. Big +_bidarka_ called an _oomiak_, and holds whole family." + +"Some one has called the _bidarkas_ the 'Cossacks of the sea,'" said Mr. +Strong. "They skim along like swallows, and are as perfectly built as +any vessel I ever saw." + +"What are those huge buildings on the small island?" asked Ted, as the +steamer wound through the shallows. + +"Ice-houses," said his father. "Before people learned to manufacture +ice, immense cargoes were shipped from here to as far south as San +Francisco." + +"It was fun to see them go fishing for ice from the steamer when we came +up to Skaguay," said Ted. "The sailors went out in a boat, slipped a +net around a block of ice and towed it to the side of the ship, then it +was hitched to a derrick and swung on deck." + +"Huh!" said Kalitan. "What people want ice for stored up? Think they'd +store sunshine!" + +"If you could invent a way to do that, you could make a fortune, my +boy," said Mr. Strong, laughing. "The next place of any interest is +Karluk. It's around on the other side of the island in Shelikoff Strait, +and is famous for its salmon canneries. Nearly half of the entire salmon +pack of Alaska comes from Kadiak Island, most of the fish coming from +the Karluk River." + +"Very bad for Indians," said Kalitan. "Used to have plenty fish. Tyee +Klake said salmon used to come up this river in shoal sixteen miles +long, and now Boston men take them all." + +"It does seem a pity that the Indians don't even have a chance to earn +their living in the canneries," said Mr. Strong. "The largest cannery in +the world is at Karluk. There are thousands of men employed, and in one +year over three million salmon were packed, yet with all this work for +busy hands to do, the canneries employ Chinese, Greek, Portuguese, and +American workmen in preference to the Indians, bringing them by the +shipload from San Francisco." + +"What other places do we pass?" asked Ted. + +"A lot of very interesting ones, and I wish we could coast along, +stopping wherever we felt like it," said Mr. Strong. "The Shumagin +Islands are where Bering, the great discoverer and explorer, landed in +1741 to bury one of his crew. Codfish were found there, and Captain +Cook, in his 'Voyages and Discoveries,' speaks of the same fish. There +is a famous fishery there now called the Davidson Banks, and the +codfishing fleet has its headquarters on Popoff Island. Millions of +codfish are caught here every year. These islands are also a favourite +haunt of the sea otter. Belofsky, at the foot of Mt. Pavloff, is the +centre of the trade." + +[Illustration: MOUNT SHISHALDIN.] + +"What kind of fur is otter?" asked Ted, whose mind was so inquiring that +his father often called him the "living catechism." + +"It is the court fur of China and Russia, and at one time the common +people were forbidden by law to wear it," said Mr. Strong. "It is a +rich, purplish brown sprinkled with silver-tipped hairs, and the skins +are very costly." + +"At one time any one could have otter," said Kalitan. "We hunted them +with spears and bows and arrows. Now they are very few, and we find them +only in dangerous spots, hiding on rocks or floating kelp. Sometimes the +hunters have to lie in hiding for days watching them. Only Indians can +kill the otter. Boston men can if they marry Indian women. That makes +them Indian." + +"Rather puts otter at a discount and women at a premium," laughed Mr. +Strong. "Now we pass along near the Alaska peninsula, past countless +isles and islets, through the Fox Islands to Unalaska, and then into the +Bering Sea. One of the most interesting things in this region is called +the 'Pacific Ring of Fire,' a chain of volcanoes which stretches along +the coast. Often the passengers can see from the ships at night a +strange red glow over the sky, and know that the fire mountains are +burning. The most beautiful of these volcanoes is Mt. Shishaldin, nearly +nine thousand feet high, and almost as perfect a cone in shape as Fuji +Yama, which the Japanese love so much and call 'the Honourable +Mountain.' At Unalaska or Ilinlink, the 'curving beach,' we stop. If we +could stay over for awhile, there are a great many interesting things we +could see; an old Greek church and the government school are in the +town, and Bogoslov's volcano and the sea-lion rookeries are on the +island of St. John, which rose right up out of the sea in 1796 after a +day's roaring and rumbling and thundering. In 1815 there was a similar +performance, and from time to time the island has grown larger ever +since. One fine day in 1883 there was a great shower of ashes, and, when +the clouds had rolled away, two peaks were seen where only one had been, +separated by a sandy isthmus. This last was reduced to a fine thread by +the earthquake of 1891, and I don't know what new freaks it may have +developed by now. I know some friends of mine landed there not long ago +and cooked eggs over the jets of steam which gush out of the +mountainside. Did you ever hear of using a volcano for a cook-stove?" + +"Well, I should say not," said Ted, amused. "These Alaskan volcanoes are +great things." + +"The one called Makushin has a crater filled with snow in a part of +which there is always a cloud of sulphurous smoke. That's making +extremes meet, isn't it?" + +"Yehl[13] made many strange things," said Kalitan, who had been taking +in all this information even more eagerly than Teddy. "He first dwelt on +Nass River, and turned two blades of grass into the first man and woman. +Then the Thlinkits grew and prospered, till darkness fell upon the +earth. A Thlinkit stole the sun and hid it in a box, but Yehl found it +and set it so high in the heavens that none could touch it. Then the +Thlinkits grew and spread abroad. But a great flood came, and all were +swept away save two, who tossed long upon the flood on a raft of logs +until Yehl pitied, and carried them to Mt. Edgecomb, where they dwelt +until the waters fell." + +"Old Kala-kash tells this story, and he says that one of these people, +when very old, went down through the crater of the mountain, and, given +long life by Yehl, stays there always to hold up the earth out of the +water. But the other lives in the crater as the Thunder Bird, Hahtla, +whose wing-flap is the thunder and whose glance is the lightning. The +osprey is his totem, and his face glares in our blankets and totems." + +"I've wondered what that fierce bird was," said Teddy, who was always +quite carried away with Kalitan's strange legends. + +"Well, what else do we see on the way to Nome, father?" + +"The most remarkable thing happening in the Bering Sea is the seal +industry, but I do not think we pass near enough to the islands to see +any of that. You'd better run about and see the ship now," and the boys +needed no second permission. + +It was not many days before they knew everybody on board, from captain +to deck hands, and were prime favourites with them all. Ted and Kalitan +enjoyed every moment. There was always something new to see or hear, and +ere they reached their journey's end, they had heard all about seals and +sealing, although the famous Pribylov Islands were too far to the west +of the vessel's route for them to see them. They sighted the United +States revenue cutter which plies about the seal islands to keep off +poachers, for no one is allowed to kill seals or to land on this +government reservation except from government vessels. The scent of the +rookeries, where millions of seals have been killed in the last hundred +years, is noticed far out at sea, and often the barking of the animals +can be heard by passing vessels. + +"Why is sealskin so valuable, father?" asked Ted. + +"It has always been admired because it is so warm and soft," replied Mr. +Strong. "All the ladies fancy it, and it never seems to go out of +fashion. There was a time, when the Pribylov Islands were first +discovered, that sealskins were so plentiful that they sold in Alaska +for a dollar apiece. Hunters killed so many, killing old and young, that +soon there were scarcely any left, so a law was passed by the Russian +government forbidding any killing for five years. Since the Americans +have owned Alaska they have protected the seals, allowing them to be +killed only at certain times, and only male seals from two to four years +old are killed. The Indians are always the killers, and are wonderfully +swift and clever, never missing a blow and always killing instantly, so +that there is almost no suffering." + +"How do they know where to find the seals?" asked Ted. + +"For half the year the seals swim about the sea, but in May they return +to their favourite haunts. In these rookeries families of them herd on +the rocks, the male staying at home with his funny little black +puppies, while the mother swims about seeking food. The seals are very +timid, and will rush into the water at the least strange noise. A story +is told that the barking of a little pet dog belonging to a Russian at +one of the rookeries lost him a hundred thousand dollars, for the seals +took fright and scurried away before any one could say 'Jack Robinson!'" + +"Rather an expensive pup!" commented Ted. "But what about the seals, +daddy?" + +"You seem to think I am an encyclopædia on the seal question," said his +father. "There is not much else to tell you." + +"How can they manage always to kill the right ones?" demanded Ted. + +"The gay bachelor seals herd together away from the rest and sleep at +night on the rocks. Early in the morning the Aleuts slip in between them +and the herd and drive them slowly to the killing-ground, where they are +quickly killed and skinned and the skins taken to the salting-house. +The Indians use the flesh and blubber, and the climate is such that +before another year the hollow bones are lost in the grass and earth." + +"What becomes of the skins after they are salted?" + +"They are usually sent to London, where they are prepared for market. +The work is all done by hand, which is one reason that they are so +expensive. They are first worked in sawdust, cleaned, scraped, washed, +shaved, plucked, dyed with a hand-brush from eight to twelve times, +washed again and freed from the least speck of grease by a last bath in +hot sawdust or sand." + +"I don't wonder a sealskin coat costs so much," said Ted, "if they have +got to go through all that performance. I wish we could have seen the +islands, but I'd hate to see the seals killed. It doesn't seem like +hunting just to knock them on the head. It's too much like the +stock-yards at home." + +"Yes, but it's a satisfaction to know that it's done in the easiest +possible way for the animals. + +"What a lot you are learning way up here in Alaska, aren't you, son? +To-morrow we'll be at Nome, and then your head will be so stuffed with +mines and mining that you will forget all about everything else." + +"I don't want to forget any of it," said Ted. "It's all bully." + +FOOTNOTE: + +[13] Yehl, embodied in the raven, is the Thlinkit Great Spirit. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +IN THE GOLD COUNTRY + + +A LOW, sandy beach, without a tree to break its level, rows of plain +frame-houses, some tents and wooden shanties scattered about, the surf +breaking over the shore in splendid foam,--this was Teddy's first +impression of Nome. They had sailed over from St. Michael's to see the +great gold-fields, and both the boys were full of eagerness to be on +land. It seemed, however, as if their desires were not to be realized, +for landing at Nome is a difficult matter. + +Nome is on the south shore of that part of Alaska known as Seward +Peninsula, and it has no harbour. It is on the open seacoast and catches +all the fierce storms that sweep northward over Bering Sea. Generally +seacoast towns are built in certain spots because there is a harbour, +but Nome was not really built, it "jes' growed," for, when gold was +found there, the miners sat down to gather the harvest, caring nothing +about a harbour. + +Ships cannot go within a mile of land, and passengers have to go ashore +in small lighters. Sometimes when they arrive, they cannot go ashore at +all, but have to wait several days, taking refuge behind a small island +ten miles away, lest they drag their anchors and be dashed to pieces on +the shore. + +There had been a tremendous storm at Nome the day before Ted arrived, +and landing was more difficult than usual, but, impatient as the boys +were, at last it seemed safe to venture, and the party left the steamer +to be put on a rough barge, flat-bottomed and stout, which was hauled by +cable to shore until it grounded on the sands. They were then put in a +sort of wooden cage, let down by chains from a huge wooden beam, and +swung round in the air like the unloading cranes of a great city, over +the surf to a high platform on the land. + +"Well, this is a new way to land," cried Ted, who had been rather quiet +during the performance, and his father thought a trifle frightened. +"It's a sort of a balloon ascension, isn't it?" + +"It must be rather hard for the miners, who have been waiting weeks for +their mail, when the boat can't land her bags at all," said Mr. Strong. +"That sometimes happens. From November to May, Nome is cut off from the +world by snow and ice. The only news they receive is by the monthly mail +when it comes. + +"Over at Kronstadt the Russians have ice-breaking boats which keep the +Baltic clear enough of ice for navigation, and plow their way through +ice fourteen feet thick for two hundred miles. The Nome miners are very +anxious for the government to try this ice-boat service at Nome." + +"Why did people settle here in such a forlorn place?" asked Ted, as they +made their way to the town, which they found anything but civilized. "I +like the Indian houses on the island better than this." + +"Your island is more picturesque," said Mr. Strong, "but people came +here for what they could get. + +"In 1898 gold was discovered on Anvil Creek, which runs into Snake +River, and this turned people's eyes in the direction of Nome. Miners +rushed here and set to work in the gulches inland, but it was not till +the summer of 1899 that gold was found on the beach. A soldier from the +barracks--you know this is part of a United States Military +Reservation--found gold while digging a well near the beach, and an old +miner took out $1,200 worth in twenty days. Then a perfect frenzy seized +the people. They flocked to Nome from far and near; they camped on the +beach in hundreds and staked their claims. Between one and two thousand +men were at work on the beach at one time, yet so good-natured were they +that no quarrels seem to have occurred. Doctors, lawyers, barkeepers, +and all dropped their business and went to rocking, as they call +beach-mining." + +[Illustration: "'LET'S WATCH THOSE TWO MEN. THEY HAVE EVIDENTLY STAKED A +CLAIM TOGETHER.'"] + +"Oh, dad, let's hurry and go and see it," cried Ted, as they hurried +through their dinner at the hotel. "I thought gold came out of deep +mines like copper, and had to be melted out or something, but this seems +to be different. Do they just walk along the beach and pick it up? I +wish I could." + +"Well, it's not quite so simple as that," said Mr. Strong, laughing. +"We'll go and see, and then you'll understand," and they went down the +crooked streets to the sandy beach. + +Men were standing about talking and laughing, others working hard. All +manner of men were there scattered over the _tundra_,[14] and Ted +became interested in two who were working together in silence. + +"What are they doing?" he asked his father. "I can't see how they expect +to get anything worth having out of this mess." + +"Beach-mining is quite different from any other," said his father. +"Let's watch those two men. They have evidently staked a claim together, +which means that nobody but these two can work on the ground they have +staked out, and that they must share all the gold they find. They came +here to prospect, and evidently found a block of ground which suited +them. They then dug a prospect hole down two to five feet until they +struck 'bedrock,' which happens to be clay around here. They passed +through several layers of sand and gravel before reaching this, and +these were carefully examined to see how much gold they contained. Upon +reaching a layer which seemed to be a good one, the gravel on top was +stripped off and thrown aside and the 'pay streak' worked with the +rocker." + +"What is that?" asked Ted, who was all ears, while Kalitan was taking in +everything with his sharp black eyes. + +"That arrangement that looks like a square pan on a saw-buck is the +rocker. The rockers usually have copper bottoms, and there is a great +demand for sheet copper at Nome, but often there is not enough of it, +and the miners have been known to cover them with silver coins. That man +you are watching has silver dollars in his, about fifty, I should say. +It seems extravagant, doesn't it, but he'll take out many times that +amount if he has good luck." + +The man, who had glanced up at them, smiled at that and said: + +"And, if I don't have luck, I'm broke, anyhow, so fifty or sixty plunks +won't make much difference. You going to be a miner, youngster?" + +"Not this trip," said Ted, with a smile. "Say, I'd like to know how you +get the gold out with that." + +"At first we used to put a blanket in the rocker, and wash the pay dirt +on that. Our prospect hole has water in it, and we can use it over and +over. Some of the holes are dry, and there the men have to pack their +pay dirt down to the shore and use surf water for washing. Most of our +gold is so fine that the blanket didn't stop it, so now we use 'quick.' +I reckon you'd call it mercury, but we call it quick. You see, it saves +time, and work-time up here is so short, on account of winter setting in +so early, that we have to save up our spare minutes and not waste 'em on +long words." + +Ted grinned cheerfully and asked: "What do you do with the quick?" + +"We paint it over the bottom of the rocker, and it acts like a charm +and catches every speck of gold that comes its way as the dirt is washed +over it. The quick and the gold make a sort of amalgam." + +"But how do you get at the gold after it amalgams, or whatever you call +it?" asked Ted. + +"Sure we fry it in the frying-pan, and it's elegant pancakes it makes," +said the man. "See here," and he pulled from his pocket several flat +masses that looked like pieces of yellow sponge. "This is pure gold. All +the quick has gone off, and this is the real stuff, just as good as +money. An ounce will buy sixteen dollars' worth of anything in Nome." + +"It looks mighty pretty," said Ted. "Seems to me it's redder than any +gold I ever saw." + +"It is," said his father. "Nome beach gold is redder and brighter than +any other Alaskan gold. I guess I'll have to get you each a piece for a +souvenir," and both boys were made happy by the present of a quaintly +shaped nugget, bought by Mr. Strong from the very miner who had mined +it, which of course added to its value. + +"You're gathering quite a lot of souvenirs, Ted," said his father. "It's +a great relief that you have not asked me for anything alive yet. I have +been expecting a modest request for a Malamute or a Husky pup, or +perhaps a pet reindeer to take home, but so far you have been quite +moderate in your demands." + +"Kalitan never asks for anything," said Ted. "I asked him once why it +was, and he said Indian boys never got what they asked for; that +sometimes they had things given to them that they hadn't asked for, but, +if he asked the Tyee for anything, all he got was 'Good Indian get +things for himself,' and he had to go to work to get the thing he +wanted. I guess it's a pretty good plan, too, for I notice that I get +just as much as I did when I used to tease you for things," Teddy added, +sagely. + +"Wise boy," said his father. "You're certainly more agreeable to live +with. The next thing you are to have is a visit to an Esquimo village, +and, if I can find some of the Esquimo carvings, you shall have +something to take home to mother. Kalitan, what would you like to +remember the Esquimos by?" + +Kalitan smiled and replied, simply, "_Mukluks_." + +"What are _mukluks_?" demanded Ted. + +"Esquimo moccasins," said Mr. Strong. "Well, you shall both have a pair, +and they are rather pretty things, too, as the Esquimos make them." + +FOOTNOTE: + +[14] The name given to the boggy soil of the beach. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +AFTERNOON TEA IN AN EGLU + + +THE Esquimo village was reached across the _tundra_, and Teddy and +Kalitan were much interested in the queer houses. Built for the long +winter of six or eight months, when it is impossible to do anything +out-of-doors, the _eglu_[15] seems quite comfortable from the Esquimo +point of view, but very strange to their American cousins. + +"I thought the Esquimos lived in snow houses," said Ted, as they looked +at the queer little huts, and Kalitan exclaimed: + +"Huh! Innuit queer Indian!" + +"No," said Mr. Strong; "his hut is built by digging a hole about six +feet deep and standing logs up side by side around the hole. On the top +of these are placed logs which rest even with the ground. Stringers are +put across these, and other logs and moss and mud roofed over it, +leaving an opening in the middle about two feet square. This is covered +with a piece of walrus entrail so thin and transparent that light easily +passes through it, and it serves as a window, the only one they have. A +smoke-hole is cut through the roof, but there is no door, for the hut is +entered through another room built in the same way, fifteen or twenty +feet distant, and connected by an underground passage about two feet +square with the main room. The entrance-room is entered through a hole +in the roof, from which a ladder reaches the bottom of the passage." + +"Can we go into a hut?" asked Ted. + +"I'll ask that woman cooking over there," said Mr. Strong, as they went +up to a woman who was cooking over a peat fire, holding over the coals +an old battered skillet in which she was frying fish. She nodded and +smiled at the boys, and, as Esquimos are always friendly and hospitable +souls, told them to go right into her _eglu_, which was close by. + +They climbed down the ladder, crawled along the narrow passage to where +a skin hung before an opening, and, pushing it aside, entered the +living-room. Here they found an old man busily engaged in carving a +walrus tooth, another sewing _mukluks_, while a girl was singing a +quaint lullaby to a child of two in the corner. + +The young girl rose, and, putting the baby down on a pile of skins, +spoke to them in good English, saying quietly: + +"You are welcome. I am Alalik." + +"May we see your wares? We wish to buy," said Mr. Strong, courteously. + +"You may see, whether you buy or not," she said, with a smile, which +showed a mouth full of even white teeth, and she spread out before them +a collection of Esquimo goods. There were all kinds of carvings from +walrus tusks, grass baskets, moccasins of walrus hide, stone bowls and +cups, _parkas_ made of reindeer skin, and one superb one of bird +feathers, _ramleikas_, and all manner of carved trinkets, the most +charming of which, to Ted's eyes, being a tiny _oomiak_ with an Esquimo +in it, made to be used as a breast-pin. This he bought for his mother, +and a carving of a baby for Judith; while his father made him and +Kalitan happy with presents. + +"Where did you learn such English?" asked Mr. Strong of Alalik, +wondering, too, where she learned her pretty, modest ways, for Esquimo +women are commonly free and easy. + +"I was for two years at the Mission at Holy Cross," she said. "There I +learned much that was good. Then my mother died, and I came home." + +She spoke simply, and Mr. Strong wondered what would be the fate of this +sweet-faced girl. + +"Did you learn to sew from the sisters?" asked Ted, who had been looking +at the garments she had made, in which the stitches, though made in +skins and sewn with deer sinew, were as even as though done with a +machine. + +"Oh, no," she said. "We learn that at home. When I was no larger than +Zaksriner there, my mother taught me to braid thread from deer and whale +sinew, and we must sew very much in winter if we have anything to sell +when summer comes. It is very hard to get enough to live. Since the +Boston men come, our people waste the summer in idleness, so we have +nothing stored for the winter's food. Hundreds die and many sicknesses +come upon us. In the village where my people lived, in each house lay +the dead of what the Boston men called measles, and there were not left +enough living to bury the dead. Only we escaped, and a Black Gown came +from the Mission to help, and he took me and Antisarlook, my brother, to +the school. The rest came here, where we live very well because there +are in the summer, people who buy what we make in the winter." + +"How do you get your skins so soft?" asked Ted, feeling the exquisite +texture of a bag she had just finished. It was a beautiful bit of work, +a tobacco-pouch or "Tee-rum-i-ute," made of reindeer skin, decorated +with beads and the soft creamy fur of the ermine in its summer hue. + +"We scrape it a very long time and pull and rub," she said. "Plenty of +time for patience in winter." + +"Your hands are too small and slim. I shouldn't think you could do much +with those stiff skins," said Teddy. + +Alalik smiled at the compliment, and a little flush crept into the clear +olive of her skin. She was clean and neat, and the _eglu_, though close +from being shut up, was neater than most of the Esquimo houses. The bowl +filled with seal oil, which served as fire and light, was unlighted, and +Alalik's father motioned to her and said something in Innuit, to which +she smilingly replied: + +"My father wishes you to eat with us," she said, and produced her flint +bag. In this were some wads of fibrous material used for wicks. Rolling +a piece of this in wood ashes, she held it between her thumb and a +flint, struck her steel against the stone, and sparks flew out which +lighted the fibre so that it burst into flame. This was thrown into the +bowl of oil, and she deftly began preparing tea. She served it in cups +of grass, and Ted thought he had never tasted anything nicer than the +cup of afternoon tea served in an _eglu_. + +"Alalik, what were you singing as we came in?" asked Ted. + +"A song my mother always sang to us," she replied. "It is called 'Ahmi,' +and is an Esquimo slumber song." + +"Will you sing it now?" asked Mr. Strong, and she smiled in assent and +sang the quaint, crooning lullaby of her Esquimo mother-- + + "The wind blows over the Yukon. + My husband hunts the deer on the Koyukun Mountains, + Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not. + Long since my husband departed. Why does he wait in the mountains? + Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, softly. + Where is my own? + Does he lie starving on the hillside? Why does he linger? + Comes he not soon, I will seek him among the mountains. + Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, sleep. + The crow has come laughing. + His beak is red, his eyes glisten, the false one. + 'Thanks for a good meal to Kuskokala the Shaman. + On the sharp mountain quietly lies your husband.' + Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not. + 'Twenty deers' tongues tied to the pack on his shoulders; + Not a tongue in his mouth to call to his wife with, + Wolves, foxes, and ravens are fighting for morsels. + Tough and hard are the sinews, not so the child in your bosom.' + Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not. + Over the mountains slowly staggers the hunter. + Two bucks' thighs on his shoulders with bladders of fat between them. + Twenty deers' tongues in his belt. Go, gather wood, old woman! + Off flew the crow, liar, cheat, and deceiver! + Wake, little sleeper, and call to your father. + He brings you back fat, marrow and venison fresh from the mountain. + Tired and worn, he has carved a toy of the deer's horn, + While he was sitting and waiting long for the deer on the hillside. + Wake, and see the crow hiding himself from the arrow, + Wake, little one, wake, for here is your father." + +Thanking Alalik for the quaint song, sung in a sweet, touching voice, +they all took their departure, laden with purchases and delighted with +their visit. + +"But you must not think this is a fair sample of Esquimo hut or Esquimo +life," said Mr. Strong to the boys. "These are near enough civilized to +show the best side of their race, but theirs must be a terrible +existence who are inland or on islands where no one ever comes, and +whose only idea of life is a constant struggle for food." + +"I think I would rather be an American," remarked Ted, while Kalitan +said, briefly: + +"I like Thlinkit." + +FOOTNOTES: + +[15] The _eglu_ is the Esquimo house. Often they occupy tents during the +summer, but return to the huts the first cool nights. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE SPLENDOUR OF SAGHALIE TYEE + + +THE _tundra_ was greenish-brown in colour, and looked like a great +meadow stretching from the beach, like a new moon, gently upward to the +cones of volcanic mountains far away. + +The ground, frozen solid all the year, thaws out for a foot or two on +the surface during the warm months, and here and there were scattered +wild flowers; spring beauties, purple primroses, yellow anemone, and +saxifrages bloomed in beauty, and wild honey-bees, gay bumblebees, and +fat mosquitoes buzzed and hummed everywhere. + +Ted and Kalitan were going to see the reindeer farm at Port Clarence, +and, as this was to be their last jaunt in Alaska, they were determined +to make the best of it. Next day they were to take ship from Cape Prince +of Wales and go straight to Sitka. Here Ted was to start for home, and +Mr. Strong was to leave Kalitan at the Mission School for a year's +schooling, which, to Kalitan's great delight, was to be a present to him +from his American friends. + +"Tell us about the reindeer farms, daddy. Have they always been here?" +demanded Ted, as they tramped over the _tundra_, covered with moss, +grass, and flowers. + +"No," said his father. "They are quite recent arrivals in Alaska. The +Esquimos used to live entirely upon the game they killed before the +whites came. There were many walruses, which they used for many things; +whales, too, they could easily capture before the whalers drove them +north, and then they hunted the wild reindeer, until now there are +scarcely any left. There was little left for them to eat but small +fish, for you see the whites had taken away or destroyed their food +supplies. + +"One day, in 1891, an American vessel discovered an entire village of +Esquimos starving, being reduced to eating their dogs, and it was +thought quite time that the government did something for these people +whose land they had bought. Finding that people of the same race in +Siberia were prosperous and healthy, they sent to investigate +conditions, and found that the Siberian Esquimos lived entirely by means +of the reindeer. The government decided to start a reindeer farm and see +if it would not benefit the natives." + +"How does it work?" asked Ted. + +"Very well, indeed," said his father. "At first about two hundred +animals were brought over, and they increased about fifty per cent. the +first year. Everywhere in the arctic region the _tundra_ gives the +reindeer the moss he lives on. It is never dry in summer because the +frost prevents any underground drainage, and even in winter the animals +feed upon it and thrive. There are, it is said, hundreds of thousands of +square miles of reindeer moss in Alaska, and reindeer stations have been +established in many places, and, as the natives are the only ones +allowed to raise them, it seems as if this might be the way found to +help the industrious Esquimos to help themselves." + +"But if it all belongs to the government, how can it help the natives?" +asked Ted. + +"Of course they have to be taught the business," said Mr. Strong. "The +government brought over some Lapps and Finlanders to care for the deer +at first, and these took young Esquimos to train. Each one serves five +years as herder, having a certain number of deer set apart for him each +year, and at the end of his service goes into business for himself." + +"Why, I think that's fine," cried Ted. "Oh, Daddy, what is that? It +looks like a queer, tangled up forest, all bare branches in the +summer." + +"That's a reindeer herd lying down for their noonday rest. What you see +are their antlers. How would you like to be in the midst of that forest +of branches?" asked Mr. Strong. + +"No, thank you," said Teddy, but Kalitan said: + +"Reindeer very gentle; they will not hurt unless very much frightened." + +"What queer-looking animals they are," said Ted, as they approached +nearer. "A sort of a cross between a deer and a cow." + +"Perhaps they are more useful than handsome, but I think there is +something picturesque about them, especially when hitched to sleds and +skimming over the frozen ground." + +The farm at Teller was certainly an interesting spot. Teddy saw the deer +fed and milked, the Lapland women being experts in that line, and found +the herders, in their quaint _parkas_ tied around the waist, and +conical caps, scarcely less interesting than the deer. Two funny little +Lapp babies he took to ride on a large reindeer, which proceeding did +not frighten the babies half so much as did the white boy who put them +on the deer. A reindeer was to them an every-day occurrence, but a +Boston boy was quite another matter. + +[Illustration: "TWO FUNNY LITTLE LAPP BABIES HE TOOK TO RIDE ON A LARGE +REINDEER."] + +Better than the reindeer, however, Teddy and Kalitan liked the draught +dogs who hauled the water at the station. A great cask on wheels was +pulled by five magnificent dogs, beautiful fellows with bright alert +faces. + +"They are the most faithful creatures in the world," said Mr. Strong, +"devoted to their masters, even though the masters are cruel to them. +Reindeer can work all day without a mouthful to eat, living on one meal +at night of seven pounds of corn-meal mush, with a pound or so of dried +fish cooked into it. On long journeys they can live on dried fish and +snow, and five dogs will haul four hundred pounds thirty-five miles a +day. They carry the United States mails all over Alaska." + +"I should think the dog would be worth more than the reindeer," said +Ted. + +"Many Alaskan travellers say he is by far the best for travelling, but +he cannot feed himself on the _tundra_, nor can he be eaten himself if +necessary. The Jarvis expedition proved the value of the reindeer," said +Mr. Strong. + +"What was that?" asked Ted. + +"Some years ago a whale fleet was caught in the ice near Point Barrow, +and in danger of starving to death, and word of this was sent to the +government. The President ordered the revenue cutter _Bear_ to go as far +north as possible and send a relief party over the ice by sledge with +provisions. + +"When the _Bear_ could go no farther, her commander landed Lieutenant +Jarvis, who was familiar with the region, and a relief party. They were +to seek the nearest reindeer station and drive a reindeer herd to the +relief of the starving people. The party reached Cape Nome and secured +some deer, and the rescue was made, but under such difficulties that it +is one of the most heroic stories of the age. These men drove four +hundred reindeer over two thousand miles north of the Arctic Circle, +over frozen seas and snow-covered mountains, and found the starving +sailors, who ate the fresh reindeer meat, which lasted until the ice +melted in the spring and set them free." + +"I think that was fine," said Ted. "But it seems a little hard on the +reindeer, doesn't it, to tramp all that distance just to be eaten?" + +"Animals made for man," said Kalitan, briefly. + + * * * * * + +A golden glory filled the sky, running upwards toward the zenith, +spreading there in varying colours from palest yellow to orange and +deepest, richest red. Glowing streams of light streamed heavenward like +feathery wings, as Ted and Kalitan sailed southward, and Ted exclaimed +in wonder: "What is it?" + +"The splendour of _Saghalie Tyee_,"[16] said Kalitan, solemnly. + +"The Aurora Borealis," said Mr. Strong, "and very fortunate you are to +see it. Indeed, Teddy, you seem to have brought good luck, for +everything has gone well this trip. Our faces are turned homeward now, +but we will have to come again next summer and bring mother and Judith." + +"I'll be glad to get home to mother again," said Ted, then noting +Kalitan's wistful face, "We'll find you at Sitka and go home with you to +the island," and he put his arm affectionately over the Indian boy's +shoulder. Kalitan pointed to the sky, whence the splendour was fading, +and a flock of birds was skimming southwards. + +"From the sky fades the splendour of _Saghalie Tyee_," he said. "The +summer is gone, the birds fly southward. The light goes from me when my +White Brother goes with the birds. Unless he return with them, all is +dark for Kalitan!" + + +THE END. + +FOOTNOTE: + +[16] Way-up High Chief, i.e., God. + + + + +THE LITTLE COUSIN SERIES + + +The most delightful and interesting accounts possible of child life in +other lands, filled with quaint sayings, doings, and adventures. + +Each one vol., 12mo, decorative cover, cloth, with six or more full-page +illustrations in color. + + Price per volume $0.60 + + +_By MARY HAZELTON WADE_ (_unless otherwise indicated_) + + =Our Little African Cousin= + =Our Little Alaskan Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Arabian Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Armenian Cousin= + =Our Little Brown Cousin= + =Our Little Canadian Cousin= + By Elizabeth R. Macdonald + =Our Little Chinese Cousin= + By Isaac Taylor Headland + =Our Little Cuban Cousin= + =Our Little Dutch Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little English Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Eskimo Cousin= + =Our Little French Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little German Cousin= + =Our Little Hawaiian Cousin= + =Our Little Hindu Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Indian Cousin= + =Our Little Irish Cousin= + =Our Little Italian Cousin= + =Our Little Japanese Cousin= + =Our Little Jewish Cousin= + =Our Little Korean Cousin= + By H. Lee M. Pike + =Our Little Mexican Cousin= + By Edward C. Butler + =Our Little Norwegian Cousin= + =Our Little Panama Cousin= + By H. Lee M. Pike + =Our Little Philippine Cousin= + =Our Little Porto Rican Cousin= + =Our Little Russian Cousin= + =Our Little Scotch Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Siamese Cousin= + =Our Little Spanish Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Swedish Cousin= + By Claire M. Coburn + =Our Little Swiss Cousin= + =Our Little Turkish Cousin= + + + + +THE GOLDENROD LIBRARY + + +The Goldenrod Library contains stories which appeal alike both to +children and to their parents and guardians. + +Each volume is well illustrated from drawings by competent artists, +which, together with their handsomely decorated uniform binding, showing +the goldenrod, usually considered the emblem of America, is a feature of +their manufacture. + + Each one volume, small 12mo, illustrated $0.35 + + +LIST OF TITLES + + =Aunt Nabby's Children.= By Frances Hodges White. + =Child's Dream of a Star, The.= By Charles Dickens. + =Flight of Rosy Dawn, The.= By Pauline Bradford Mackie. + =Findelkind.= By Ouida. + =Fairy of the Rhone, The.= By A. Comyns Carr. + =Gatty and I.= By Frances E. Crompton. + =Helena's Wonderworld.= By Frances Hodges White. + =Jerry's Reward.= By Evelyn Snead Barnett. + =La Belle Nivernaise.= By Alphonse Daudet. + =Little King Davie.= By Nellie Hellis. + =Little Peterkin Vandike.= By Charles Stuart Pratt. + =Little Professor, The.= By Ida Horton Cash. + =Peggy's Trial.= By Mary Knight Potter. + =Prince Yellowtop.= By Kate Whiting Patch. + =Provence Rose, A.= By Ouida. + =Seventh Daughter, A.= By Grace Wickham Curran. + =Sleeping Beauty, The.= By Martha Baker Dunn. + =Small, Small Child, A.= By E. Livingston Prescott. + =Susanne.= By Frances J. Delano. + =Water People, The.= By Charles Lee Sleight. + =Young Archer, The.= By Charles E. Brimblecom. + + + + +COSY CORNER SERIES + + It is the intention of the publishers that this series + shall contain only the very highest and purest + literature,--stories that shall not only appeal to the + children themselves, but be appreciated by all those + who feel with them in their joys and sorrows. + + The numerous illustrations in each book are by + well-known artists, and each volume has a separate + attractive cover design. + + Each 1 vol., 16mo, cloth $0.50 + + +_By ANNIE FELLOWS JOHNSTON_ + + +=The Little Colonel.= (Trade Mark.) + +The scene of this story is laid in Kentucky. Its heroine is a small +girl, who is known as the Little Colonel, on account of her fancied +resemblance to an old-school Southern gentleman, whose fine estate and +old family are famous in the region. + + +=The Giant Scissors.= + +This is the story of Joyce and of her adventures in France. Joyce is a +great friend of the Little Colonel, and in later volumes shares with her +the delightful experiences of the "House Party" and the "Holidays." + + +=Two Little Knights of Kentucky.= + +WHO WERE THE LITTLE COLONEL'S NEIGHBORS. + +In this volume the Little Colonel returns to us like an old friend, but +with added grace and charm. She is not, however, the central figure of +the story, that place being taken by the "two little knights." + + +=Mildred's Inheritance.= + +A delightful little story of a lonely English girl who comes to America +and is befriended by a sympathetic American family who are attracted by +her beautiful speaking voice. By means of this one gift she is enabled +to help a school-girl who has temporarily lost the use of her eyes, and +thus finally her life becomes a busy, happy one. + + +=Cicely and Other Stories for Girls.= + +The readers of Mrs. Johnston's charming juveniles will be glad to learn +of the issue of this volume for young people. + + +=Aunt 'Liza's Hero and Other Stories.= + +A collection of six bright little stories, which will appeal to all boys +and most girls. + +=Big Brother.= + +A story of two boys. The devotion and care of Steven, himself a small +boy, for his baby brother, is the theme of the simple tale. + + +=Ole Mammy's Torment.= + +"Ole Mammy's Torment" has been fitly called "a classic of Southern +life." It relates the haps and mishaps of a small negro lad, and tells +how he was led by love and kindness to a knowledge of the right. + + +=The Story of Dago.= + +In this story Mrs. Johnston relates the story of Dago, a pet monkey, +owned jointly by two brothers. Dago tells his own story, and the account +of his haps and mishaps is both interesting and amusing. + + +=The Quilt That Jack Built.= + +A pleasant little story of a boy's labor of love, and how it changed the +course of his life many years after it was accomplished. + + +=Flip's Islands of Providence.= + +A story of a boy's life battle, his early defeat, and his final triumph, +well worth the reading. + + +_By EDITH ROBINSON_ + + +=A Little Puritan's First Christmas.= + +A Story of Colonial times in Boston, telling how Christmas was invented +by Betty Sewall, a typical child of the Puritans, aided by her brother +Sam. + + +=A Little Daughter of Liberty.= + +The author introduces this story as follows: + +"One ride is memorable in the early history of the American Revolution, +the well-known ride of Paul Revere. Equally deserving of commendation is +another ride,--the ride of Anthony Severn,--which was no less historic +in its action or memorable in its consequences." + + +=A Loyal Little Maid.= + +A delightful and interesting story of Revolutionary days, in which the +child heroine, Betsey Schuyler, renders important services to George +Washington. + + +=A Little Puritan Rebel.= + +This is an historical tale of a real girl, during the time when the +gallant Sir Harry Vane was governor of Massachusetts. + + +=A Little Puritan Pioneer.= + +The scene of this story is laid in the Puritan settlement at +Charlestown. + + +=A Little Puritan Bound Girl.= + +A story of Boston in Puritan days, which is of great interest to +youthful readers. + + +=A Little Puritan Cavalier.= + +The story of a "Little Puritan Cavalier" who tried with all his boyish +enthusiasm to emulate the spirit and ideals of the dead Crusaders. + + +=A Puritan Knight Errant.= + +The story tells of a young lad in Colonial times who endeavored to carry +out the high ideals of the knights of olden days. + + +_By OUIDA_ (_Louise de la Ramée_) + + +=A Dog of Flanders=: A CHRISTMAS STORY. + +Too well and favorably known to require description. + + +=The Nurnberg Stove.= + +This beautiful story has never before been published at a popular price. + + +_By FRANCES MARGARET FOX_ + + +=The Little Giant's Neighbours.= + +A charming nature story of a "little giant" whose neighbours were the +creatures of the field and garden. + + +=Farmer Brown and the Birds.= + +A little story which teaches children that the birds are man's best +friends. + + +=Betty of Old Mackinaw.= + +A charming story of child-life, appealing especially to the little +readers who like stories of "real people." + + +=Brother Billy.= + +The story of Betty's brother, and some further adventures of Betty +herself. + + +=Mother Nature's Little Ones.= + +Curious little sketches describing the early lifetime, or "childhood," +of the little creatures out-of-doors. + + +=How Christmas Came to the Mulvaneys.= + +A bright, lifelike little story of a family of poor children, with an +unlimited capacity for fun and mischief. The wonderful never-to-be +forgotten Christmas that came to them is the climax of a series of +exciting incidents. + + +_By MISS MULOCK_ + + +=The Little Lame Prince.= + +A delightful story of a little boy who has many adventures by means of +the magic gifts of his fairy god-mother. + + +=Adventures of a Brownie.= + +The story of a household elf who torments the cook and gardener, but is +a constant joy and delight to the children who love and trust him. + + +=His Little Mother.= + +Miss Mulock's short stories for children are a constant source of +delight to them, and "His Little Mother," in this new and attractive +dress, will be welcomed by hosts of youthful readers. + + +=Little Sunshine's Holiday.= + +An attractive story of a summer outing. "Little Sunshine" is another of +those beautiful child-characters for which Miss Mulock is so justly +famous. + + +_By MARSHALL SAUNDERS_ + + +=For His Country.= + +A sweet and graceful story of a little boy who loved his country; +written with that charm which has endeared Miss Saunders to hosts of +readers. + + +=Nita, the Story of an Irish Setter.= + +In this touching little book, Miss Saunders shows how dear to her heart +are all of God's dumb creatures. + + +=Alpatok, the Story of an Eskimo Dog.= + +Alpatok, an Eskimo dog from the far north, was stolen from his master +and left to starve in a strange city, but was befriended and cared for, +until he was able to return to his owner. + + +_By WILL ALLEN DROMGOOLE_ + + +=The Farrier's Dog and His Fellow.= + +This story, written by the gifted young Southern woman, will appeal to +all that is best in the natures of the many admirers of her graceful and +piquant style. + + +=The Fortunes of the Fellow.= + +Those who read and enjoyed the pathos and charm of "The Farrier's Dog +and His Fellow" will welcome the further account of the adventures of +Baydaw and the Fellow at the home of the kindly smith. + + +=The Best of Friends.= + +This continues the experiences of the Farrier's dog and his Fellow, +written in Miss Dromgoole's well-known charming style. + + +=Down in Dixie.= + +A fascinating story for boys and girls, of a family of Alabama children +who move to Florida and grow up in the South. + + +_By MARIAN W. WILDMAN_ + + +=Loyalty Island.= + +An account of the adventures of four children and their pet dog on an +island, and how they cleared their brother from the suspicion of +dishonesty. + + +=Theodore and Theodora.= + +This is a story of the exploits and mishaps of two mischievous twins, +and continues the adventures of the interesting group of children in +"Loyalty Island." + + +_By CHARLES G. D. ROBERTS_ + + +=The Cruise of the Yacht Dido.= + +The story of two boys who turned their yacht into a fishing boat to earn +money to pay for a college course, and of their adventures while +exploring in search of hidden treasure. + + +=The Young Acadian.= + +The story of a young lad of Acadia who rescued a little English girl +from the hands of savages. + + +=The Lord of the Air.= + +THE STORY OF THE EAGLE + +=The King of the Mamozekel.= + +THE STORY OF THE MOOSE + +=The Watchers of the Camp-fire.= + +THE STORY OF THE PANTHER + +=The Haunter of the Pine Gloom.= + +THE STORY OF THE LYNX + +=The Return to the Trails.= + +THE STORY OF THE BEAR + +=The Little People of the Sycamore.= + +THE STORY OF THE RACCOON + + +_By OTHER AUTHORS_ + + +=The Great Scoop.= + +_By MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL_ + +A capital tale of newspaper life in a big city, and of a bright, +enterprising, likable youngster employed thereon. + + +=John Whopper.= + +The late Bishop Clark's popular story of the boy who fell through the +earth and came out in China, with a new introduction by Bishop Potter. + + +=The Dole Twins.= + +_By KATE UPSON CLARK_ + +The adventures of two little people who tried to earn money to buy +crutches for a lame aunt. An excellent description of child-life about +1812, which will greatly interest and amuse the children of to-day, +whose life is widely different. + + +=Larry Hudson's Ambition.= + +_By JAMES OTIS_, author of "Toby Tyler," etc. + +Larry Hudson is a typical American boy, whose hard work and enterprise +gain him his ambition,--an education and a start in the world. + + +=The Little Christmas Shoe.= + +_By JANE P. SCOTT WOODRUFF_ + +A touching story of Yule-tide. + + +=Wee Dorothy.= + +_By LAURA UPDEGRAFF_ + +A story of two orphan children, the tender devotion of the eldest, a +boy, for his sister being its theme and setting. With a bit of sadness +at the beginning, the story is otherwise bright and sunny, and +altogether wholesome in every way. + + +=The King of the Golden River=: A LEGEND OF STIRIA. _By JOHN RUSKIN_ + +Written fifty years or more ago, and not originally intended for +publication, this little fairy-tale soon became known and made a place +for itself. + + +=A Child's Garden of Verses.= + +_By R. L. STEVENSON_ + +Mr. Stevenson's little volume is too well known to need description. + + * * * * * + +Transcriber's Notes: + +Obvious punctuation errors repaired. Text uses both kyak and kiak for +our more modern kayak. This was retained. + +Final page of book ads, "L. R." changed to "R. L." (By R. L. Stevenson) + +Page 5, "alway" changed to "always" (always dear to a boy) + +Page 82, "Tahgeah" changed to "Tah-ge-ah" (Tah-ge-ah would take them) + +Page 83, "Kalakash" changed to "Kala-kash" (Kala-kash had not asked) + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Our Little Alaskan Cousin, by Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OUR LITTLE ALASKAN COUSIN *** + +***** This file should be named 10224-8.txt or 10224-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/2/10224/ + +Produced by Emmy, Beth Baran, Juliet Sutherland, Mary +Meehan, and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images +generously made available by The Internet Archive) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/10224-8.zip b/old/10224-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8304036 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-8.zip diff --git a/old/10224-h.zip b/old/10224-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dfa05db --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h.zip diff --git a/old/10224-h/10224-h.htm b/old/10224-h/10224-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f676168 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/10224-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,4651 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of Our Little Alaskan Cousin, by Mary F. Nixon-Roulet. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> + + p {margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + text-indent: 1.25em; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + img {border: 0;} + .tnote {border: dashed 1px; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em;} + ins {text-decoration:none; border-bottom: thin dotted gray;} + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + .tb {width: 50%;} + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + + .pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; + } /* page numbers */ + .copyright {text-align: center; font-size: 70%;} + .blockquot{margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 15%; text-align: justify;} + + .bbox {border: solid 2px; margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em;} + .small {font-size: 70%;} + .big {font-size: 110%;} + .adauthor {font-size: 150%; font-style: italic; text-align: left; margin-top: 2em;} + .trademark {text-align: left; font-size: 70%; margin-left: 10%;} + .adtitle2 {font-size: 150%; font-weight: bold; text-align: left; margin-top: 1em;} + .adtitle1 {font-size: 200%; font-weight: bold; text-align: center;} + .title {font-size: 200%; font-weight: bold; text-align: center;} + + .author {font-size: 120%; text-align: center;} + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + .chaptertitle {text-align: center; font-size: 110%; font-weight: bold; margin-bottom: 1.5em;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold; font-size: 90%;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + + .figleft {float: left; clear: left; margin-left: 0; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: + 1em; margin-right: 1em; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .figright {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; + margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + .unindent {margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + .right {text-align: right;} + .poem {margin-left: 30%; text-align: left;} + .poem2 {margin-left: 15%; text-align: left;} + .sig {margin-right: 10%; text-align: right;} + + .footnotes {border: dashed 1px;} + .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + .fnanchor {vertical-align:baseline; + position: relative; + bottom: 0.33em; + font-size: .8em; + text-decoration: none;} + .hang1 {text-indent: -3em; margin-left: 3em;} + + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's Our Little Alaskan Cousin, by Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Our Little Alaskan Cousin + +Author: Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +Release Date: August 1, 2013 [EBook #10224] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OUR LITTLE ALASKAN COUSIN *** + + + + +Produced by Emmy, Beth Baran, Juliet Sutherland, Mary +Meehan, and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images +generously made available by The Internet Archive) + + + + + + +</pre> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 534px;"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="534" height="800" alt="Cover" /> +</div> +<hr class="chap" /> + +<h1>Our Little Alaskan Cousin</h1> + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<div class='bbox'> +<div class='adtitle1'><span class='small'>THE</span><br /> + +Little Cousin Series</div> + +<div class='center'><span class='small'>(TRADE MARK)</span><br /> + +<br /> +Each volume illustrated with six or more full-page plates in<br /> +tint. Cloth, 12mo, with decorative cover,<br /> +per volume, 60 cents<br /> +<br /><br /> + + +<span class='big'>LIST OF TITLES</span><br /> + +<span class="smcap">By Mary Hazelton Wade</span><br /> + +(unless otherwise indicated)<br /><br /></div> + + + + +<div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" summary=""> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little African Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Alaskan Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Arabian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Armenian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Australian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Brazilian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Brown Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Canadian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Elizabeth R. MacDonald</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Chinese Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Isaac Taylor Headland</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Cuban Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Dutch Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Egyptian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little English Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Eskimo Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little French Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little German Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Greek Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Hawaiian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Hindu Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Indian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Irish Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Italian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Japanese Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Jewish Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Korean Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By H. Lee M. Pike</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Mexican Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Edward C. Butler</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Norwegian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Panama Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By H. Lee M. Pike</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Philippine Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Porto Rican Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Russian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Scotch Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Siamese Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Spanish Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Swedish Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Claire M. Coburn</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Swiss Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Turkish Cousin</b></td></tr> +</table></div> + +<div class='center'><br /> +<span class='big'>L. C. PAGE & COMPANY</span><br /> +New England Building, Boston, Mass.<br /> +</div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 361px;"><a id="frontispiece"></a> +<img src="images/i008.jpg" width="361" height="500" alt="boy ice fishing" /> +<span class="caption">"KALITAN FISHED DILIGENTLY BUT CAUGHT LITTLE."</span> + +<div class='right'>(<i><a href="#Page_3">See page 3</a></i>)</div> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> +<div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" summary="Title page"> +<tr><td align="center" colspan='3'><img src="images/title_top.png" width="350" height="18" alt="border top" /></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><img src="images/title_left.png" width="20" height="559" alt="border left" /></td> +<td align="center"><div class='title'> +Our Little Alaskan<br />Cousin</div> +<div class='center'> +By<br /> +<span class='author'>Mary F. Nixon-Roulet</span><br /> +<i>Author of "Our Little English Cousin," "Our<br /> +Little French Cousin," "Our Little Dutch<br /> +Cousin," "Our Little Scotch<br /> +Cousin," etc.</i><br /><br /> +<i>Illustrated</i><br /> +<br /> + +<img src="images/emblem.png" width="91" height="89" alt="Emblem: Spe Labor Levis" /> + +<br /> +Boston<br /> +L. C. Page & Company<br /> +<span class='small'><i>PUBLISHERS</i></span></div> + +</td> +<td align="right"><img src="images/title_right.png" width="20" height="559" alt="border-right" /></td></tr> +<tr><td align="center" colspan='3'><img src="images/title_bottom.png" width="350" height="18" alt="border bottom" /> +</td></tr> +</table></div> + + +<hr class="chap" /> + + +<div class='copyright'> +<i>Copyright, 1907</i><br /> +<span class="smcap">By L. C. Page & Company</span><br /> +(INCORPORATED)<br /> +<br /> +<i>All rights reserved</i><br /> +<br /> +Third Impression, May, 1909<br /> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class='center'> +TO MY LITTLE SON<br /> +<b>John Nixon de Roulet</b><br /> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + + +<h2>Preface</h2> + + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="smcap">Away</span> up toward the frozen north lies the +great peninsula, which the United States bought +from the Russians, and thus became responsible +for the native peoples from whom the Russians +had taken the land.</p> + +<p>There are many kinds of people there, from +Indians to Esquimos, and they are under the +American Government, yet they have no votes +and are not called American citizens.</p> + +<p>It is about this country and its people that +this little story is written, and in the hope of +interesting American girls and boys in these +very strange people, their Little Alaskan Cousins.</p> + + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<h2>Contents</h2> + + + + +<div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> +<tr><td align="left" colspan='2'><span class='small'>CHAPTER</span></td><td align="left"><span class='small'>PAGE</span></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">I.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">Kalitan Tenas</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_1">1</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">II.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">Around the Camp-fire</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_12">12</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">III.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">To the Glacier</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_26">26</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">IV.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">Ted Meets Mr. Bruin</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_38">38</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">V.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">A Monster of the Deep</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_48">48</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">VI.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">The Island Home of Kalitan</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_60">60</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">VII.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">Twilight Tales and Totems</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_71">71</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">VIII.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">The Berry Dance</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_81">82</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">IX.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">On the Way to Nome</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_93">93</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">X.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">In the Gold Country</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_108">108</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">XI.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">Afternoon Tea in an Eglu</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_119">119</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">XII.</td> +<td align="left"><span class="smcap">The Splendour of Saghalie Tyee</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td></tr> +</table></div> + + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>List of Illustrations</h2> + + + + +<div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="List of illustrations"> +<tr><td align="left"> </td> +<td align="right"><span class='small'>PAGE</span></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">"Kalitan fished diligently but caught little"</span> (<i>See <a href="#Page_3">page 3</a></i>)</td> +<td align="right"><i><a href="#frontispiece">Frontispiece</a></i></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">"Away went another stinging lance"</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_57">57</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">"A group of people awaiting the canoes"</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_64">64</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">Mount Shishaldin</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_99">99</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">"'Let's watch those two men. They have evidently staked a claim together'"</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_113">113</a></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><span class="smcap">"Two funny little Lapp babies he took to ride on a large reindeer"</span></td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_134">134</a></td></tr> +</table></div> + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[1]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>Our Little Alaskan Cousin</h2> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER I</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>KALITAN TENAS</div> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was bitterly cold. Kalitan Tenas felt it +more than he had in the long winter, for then +it was still and calm as night, and now the wind +was blowing straight in from the sea, and the +river was frozen tight.</p> + +<p>A month before, the ice had begun to break +and he had thought the cold was over, and that +the all too short Alaskan summer was at hand. +Now it was the first of May, and just as he +had begun to think of summer pleasures, lo! +a storm had come which seemed to freeze the +very marrow of his bones. However, our little<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[2]</a></span> +Alaskan cousin was used to cold and trained +to it, and would not dream of fussing over a +little snow-storm.</p> + +<p>Kalitan started out to fish for his dinner, +and though the snow came down heavily and +he had to break through the ice to make a +fishing-hole, and soon the ice was a wind-swept +plain where even his own tracks were covered +with a white pall, he fished steadily on. He +never dreamed of stopping until he had fish +enough for dinner, for, like most of his tribe, +he was persevering and industrious.</p> + +<p>Kalitan was a Thlinkit, though, if you asked +him, he would say he was "Klinkit." This is +a tribe which has puzzled wise people for a +long time, for the Thlinkits are not Esquimos, +not Indians, not coloured people, nor whites. +They are the tribes living in Southeastern +Alaska and along the coast. Many think that +a long, long time ago, they came from Japan +or some far Eastern country, for they look<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[3]</a></span> +something like the Japanese, and their language +has many words similar to Japanese in it.</p> + +<p>Perhaps, long years ago, some shipwrecked +Japanese were cast upon the coast of Alaska, +and, finding their boats destroyed and the land +good to live in, settled there, and thus began +the Thlinkit tribes.</p> + +<p>The Chilcats, Haidahs, and Tsimsheans are +all Thlinkits, and are by far the best of the +brown people of the Northland. They are +honest, simple, and kind, and more intelligent +than the Indians living farther north, in the +colder regions. The Thlinkit coast is washed +by the warm current from the Japan Sea, and +it is not much colder than Chicago or Boston, +though the winter is a little longer.</p> + +<p>Kalitan fished diligently but caught little. +He was warmly clad in sealskin; around his +neck was a white bearskin ruff, as warm as +toast, and very pretty, too, as soft and fluffy as +a lady's boa. On his feet were moccasins of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[4]</a></span> +walrus hide. He had been perhaps an hour +watching the hole in the ice, and knelt there +so still that he looked almost as though he were +frozen. Indeed, that was what those thought +who saw him there, for suddenly a dog-sledge +came round the corner of the hill and a loud +halloo greeted his ears.</p> + +<p>"Boston men," he said to himself as he +watched them, "lost the trail."</p> + +<p>They had indeed lost the trail, and Ted +Strong had begun to think they would never +find it again.</p> + +<p>Chetwoof, their Indian guide, had not talked +very much about it, but lapsed into his favourite +"No understan'," a remark he always made +when he did not want to answer what was said +to him.</p> + +<p>Ted and his father were on their way from +Sitka to the Copper River. Mr. Strong was +on the United States Geological Survey, which +Ted knew meant that he had to go all around<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span> +the country and poke about all day among rocks +and mountains and glaciers. He had come with +his father to this far Alaskan clime in the happiest +expectation of adventures with bears and +Indians, always dear to the heart of a boy.</p> + +<p>He was pretty tired of the sledge, having +been in it since early morning, and he was cold +and hungry besides; so he was delighted when +the dogs stopped and his father said:</p> + +<p>"Hop out, son, and stretch your legs. We'll +try to find out where we are before we go any +farther."</p> + +<p>Chetwoof meanwhile was interviewing the +boy, who came quickly toward them.</p> + +<p>"Who are you?" demanded Chetwoof.</p> + +<p>"Kalitan Tenas," was the brief reply.</p> + +<p>"Where are we?" was the next question.</p> + +<p>"Near to Pilchickamin River."</p> + +<p>"Where is a camp?"</p> + +<p>"There," said the boy, pointing toward a +clump of pine-trees. "Ours."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span></p> + +<p>Ted by this time was tired of his own unwonted +silence, and he came up to Kalitan, +holding out his hand.</p> + +<p>"My name is Ted Strong," he said, genially, +grinning cheerfully at the young Alaskan. "I +say this is a jolly place. I wish you would teach +me to fish in a snow-hole. It must be great fun. +I like you; let's be friends!" Kalitan took +the boy's hand in his own rough one.</p> + +<p>"Mahsie" (thank you), he said, a sudden +quick smile sweeping his dark face like a fleeting +sunbeam, but disappearing as quickly, leaving +it grave again. "Olo?" (hungry).</p> + +<p>"Yes," said Mr. Strong, "hungry and cold."</p> + +<p>"Camp," said Kalitan, preparing to lead the +way, with the hospitality of his tribe, for the +Thlinkits are always ready to share food and +fire with any stranger. The two boys strode +off together, and Mr. Strong could scarcely +help smiling at the contrast between them.</p> + +<p>Ted was the taller, but slim even in the furs<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[7]</a></span> +which almost smothered him, leaving only his +bright face exposed to the wind and weather. +His hair was a tangle of yellow curls which no +parting could ever affect, for it stood straight +up from his forehead like a golden fleece; his +mother called it his aureole. His skin was fair +as a girl's, and his eyes as big and blue as a +young Viking's; but the Indian boy's locks +were black as ink, his skin was swarthy, his +eyes small and dark, and his features that +strange mixture of the Indian, the Esquimo, +and the Japanese which we often see in the best +of our Alaskan cousins.</p> + +<p>Boys, however, are boys all the world over, +and friendly animals, and Ted was soon chattering +away to his newly found friend as if he had +known him all his life.</p> + +<p>"What's your name?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Kalitan," was the answer. "They call me +Kalitan Tenas;<a name="FNanchor_1_1" id="FNanchor_1_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a> my father was Tyee."</p> +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span></p> +<p>"Where is he?" asked Ted. He wanted to +see an Indian chief.</p> + +<p>"Dead," said Kalitan, briefly.</p> + +<p>"I'm sorry," said Ted. He adored his own +father, and felt it was hard on a boy not to +have one.</p> + +<p>"He was killed," said Kalitan, "but we had +blood-money from them," he added, sternly.</p> + +<p>"What's that?" asked Ted, curiously.</p> + +<p>"Long time ago, when one man kill another, +his clan must pay with a life. One must be +found from his tribe to cry, 'O-o-o-o-o-a-ha-a-ich-klu-kuk-ich-klu-kuk'" +(ready to die, +ready to die). His voice wailed out the mournful +chant, which was weird and solemn and +almost made Ted shiver. "But now," the boy +went on, "Boston men" (Americans) "do not +like the blood-tax, so the murderer pays money +instead. We got many blankets and baskets +and moneys for Kalitan Tyee. He great chief."</p> + +<p>"Do you live here?" asked Ted.</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span></p> + +<p>"No, live on island out there." Kalitan +waved his hand seaward. "Come to fish with +my uncle, Klake Tyee. This good fishing-ground."</p> + +<p>"It's a pretty fine country," said Ted, glancing +at the scene, which bore charm to other than +boyish eyes. To the east were the mountains +sheltering a valley through which the frozen +river wound like a silver ribbon, widening +toward the sea. A cold green glacier filled the +valley between two mountains with its peaks +of beauty. Toward the shore, which swept in +toward the river's mouth in a sheltered cove, +were clumps of trees, giant fir, aspen, and hemlock, +green and beautiful, while seaward swept +the waves in white-capped loveliness.</p> + +<p>Kalitan ushered them to the camp with great +politeness and considerable pride.</p> + +<p>"You've a good place to camp," said Mr. +Strong, "and we will gladly share your fire +until we are warm enough to go on."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span></p> + +<p>Ted's face fell. "Must we go right away?" +he asked. "This is such a jolly place."</p> + +<p>"No go to-day," said Kalitan, briefly, to +Chetwoof. "<i>Colesnass.</i>"<a name="FNanchor_2_2" id="FNanchor_2_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_2_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a></p> + +<p>"Huh!" said Chetwoof. "Think some."</p> + +<p>"Here comes my uncle," said Kalitan, and +he ran eagerly to meet an old Indian who came +toward the camp from the shore. He eagerly +explained the situation to the Tyee, who welcomed +the strangers with grave politeness. He +was an old man, with a seamed, scarred face, +but kindly eyes. Chief of the Thlinkits, his +tribe was scattered, his children dead, and Kalitan +about all left to him of interest in life.</p> + +<p>"There will be more snow," he said to Mr. +Strong. "You are welcome. Stay and share +our fire and food."</p> + +<p>"Do let us stay, father," cried Ted, and his +father smiled indulgently, but Kalitan looked +at him in astonishment. Alaskan boys are<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span> +taught to hold their tongues and let their elders +decide matters, and Kalitan would never have +dreamed of teasing for anything.</p> + +<p>But Mr. Strong did not wish to face another +snow-storm in the sledge, and knew he could +work but little till the storm was passed; so +he readily consented to stay a few days and let +Ted see some real Alaskan hunting and fishing.</p> + +<p>Both boys were delighted, and soon had the +camp rearranged to accommodate the strangers. +The fire was built up, Ted and Kalitan gathering +cones and fir branches, which made a fragrant +blaze, while Chetwoof cared for the +dogs, and the old chief helped Mr. Strong pitch +his tent in the lee of some fragrant firs. Soon +all was prepared and supper cooking over the +coals,—a supper of fresh fish and seal fat, +which Alaskans consider a great delicacy, and +to which Mr. Strong added coffee and crackers +from his stores,—and Indians and whites ate +together in friendliness and amity.</p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_1_1" id="Footnote_1_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_1_1"><span class="label">[1]</span></a> Little Arrow.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_2_2" id="Footnote_2_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_2_2"><span class="label">[2]</span></a> Snow.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span></p> + + + +<h2>CHAPTER II</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>AROUND THE CAMP-FIRE</div> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">How</span> does it happen that you speak English, +Kalitan?" asked Mr. Strong as they sat +around the camp-fire that evening. The snow +had continued during the afternoon, and the +boys had had an exciting time coasting and +snow-balling and enjoying themselves generally.</p> + +<p>"I went for a few months to the Mission +School at Wrangel," said Kalitan. "I learned +much there. They teach the boys to read and +write and do sums and to work the ground besides. +They learn much more than the girls."</p> + +<p>"Huh!" said the old chief, grimly. "Girls +learn too much. They no good for Indian +wives, and white men not marry them. Best<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span> +for girls to stay at home at the will of their +fathers until they get husbands."</p> + +<p>"So you've been in Wrangel," said Ted to +Kalitan. "We went there, too. It's a dandy +place. Do you remember the fringe of white +mountains back of the harbour? The people +said the woods were full of game, but we didn't +have time to go hunting. There are a few +shops there, but it seemed to me a very small +place to have been built since 1834. In the +States whole towns grow up in two or three +weeks."</p> + +<p>"Huh!" said Kalitan, with a quick shrug +of his shoulders, "quick grow, sun fade and +wind blow down."</p> + +<p>"I don't think the sun could ever fade in +Wrangel," laughed Ted. "They told me there +it hadn't shone but fifteen days in three months. +It rained all the time."</p> + +<p>"Rain is nothing," said Kalitan. "It is +when the Ice Spirit speaks in the North Wind's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span> +roar and in the crackling of the floes that we +tremble. The glaciers are the children of the +Mountain Spirit whom our fathers worshipped. +He is angry, and lo! he hurls down icebergs +in his wrath, he tosses them about, upon the +streams he tosses the <i>kyaks</i> like feathers and +washes the land with the waves of Sitth. When +our people are buried in the ground instead of +being burnt with the fire, they must go for ever +to the place of Sitth, of everlasting cold, where +never sun abides, nor rain, nor warmth."</p> + +<p>Ted had listened spellbound to this poetic +speech and gazed at Kalitan in open-mouthed +amazement. A boy who could talk like that +was a new and delightful playmate, and he +said:</p> + +<p>"Tell me more about things, Kalitan," but +the Indian was silent, ashamed of having +spoken.</p> + +<p>"What do you do all day when you are at +home?" persisted the American.</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span></p> + +<p>"In winter there is nothing to do but to +hunt and fish," said Kalitan. "Sometimes we +do not find much game, then we think of how, +when a Thlinkit dies, he has plenty. If he has +lived as a good tribesman, his kyak glides +smoothly over the silver waters into the sunset, +until, o'er gently flowing currents, it reaches +the place of the mighty forest. A bad warrior's +canoe passes dark whirlpools and terrible +rapids until he reaches the place we speak not +of, where reigns Sitth.</p> + +<p>"In the summer-time we still hunt and fish. +Many have learned to till the ground, and we +gather berries and wood for the winter. The +other side of the inlet, the tree-trunks drift +from the Yukon and are stranded on the islands, +so there is plenty for firewood. But upon our +island the women gather a vine and dry it. +They collect seaweed for food in the early +spring, and dry it and press it into square cakes, +which make good food after they have hung<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span> +long in the sun. They make baskets and sell +them to the white people. Often my uncle and +I take them to Valdez, and once we brought +back fifty dollars for those my mother made. +There is always much to do."</p> + +<p>"Don't you get terribly cold hunting in the +winter?" asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"Thlinkit boy not a baby," said Kalitan, a +trifle scornfully. "We begin to be hardened +when we are babies. When I was five years +old, I left my father and went to my uncle to +be taught. Every morning I bathed in the +ocean, even if I had to break ice to find water, +and then I rolled in the snow. After that my +uncle brushed me with a switch bundle, and +not lightly, for his arm is strong. I must not +cry out, no matter if he hurt, for a chief's son +must never show pain nor fear. That would +give his people shame."</p> + +<p>"Don't you get sick?" asked Ted, who felt<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span> +cold all over at the idea of being treated in such +a heroic manner.</p> + +<p>"The <i>Kooshta</i><a name="FNanchor_3_3" id="FNanchor_3_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_3_3" class="fnanchor">[3]</a> comes sometimes," said +Kalitan. "The Shaman<a name="FNanchor_4_4" id="FNanchor_4_4"></a><a href="#Footnote_4_4" class="fnanchor">[4]</a> used to cast him out, +but now the white doctor can do it, unless the +<i>kooshta</i> is too strong."</p> + +<p>Ted was puzzled as to Kalitan's exact meaning, +but did not like to ask too many questions +for fear of being impolite, so he only said:</p> + +<p>"Being sick is not very nice, anyhow."</p> + +<p>"To be bewitched is the most terrible," said +Kalitan, gravely.</p> + +<p>"How does that happen?" asked Ted, +eagerly, but Kalitan shook his head.</p> + +<p>"It is not good to hear," he said. "The +medicine-man must come with his drum and +rattle, and he is very terrible. If the white +men will not allow any more the punishing of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span> +the witches, they should send more of the white +medicine-men, if we are not to have any more +of our own."</p> + +<p>"Boys should not talk about big things," +said the old chief suddenly. He had been sitting +quietly over the fire, and spoke so suddenly +that Kalitan collapsed into silence. Ted, too, +quieted down at the old chief's stern voice and +manner, and both boys sat and listened to the +men talking, while the snow still swirled about +them.</p> + +<p>Tyee Klake told Mr. Strong many interesting +things about the coast country, and gave +him valuable information as to the route he +should pursue in his search for interesting +things in the mountains.</p> + +<p>"It will be two weeks before the snow will +break so you can travel in comfort," he said. +"Camp with us. We remain here one week, +then we go to the island. We can take you<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span> +there, you will see many things, and your boy +will hunt with Kalitan."</p> + +<p>"Where is your island?" asked Mr. Strong.</p> + +<p>Ted said nothing, but his eyes were fixed +eagerly upon his father. It was easy to see that +he wished to accept the invitation.</p> + +<p>"Out there." Tyee Klake pointed toward +where the white coast-line seemed to fade into +silvery blue.</p> + +<p>"There are many islands; on some lives +no one, but we have a village. Soon it will be +nearly deserted, for many of our people rove +during the summer, and wander from one camping-ground +to another, seeking the best game +or fish. But Kalitan's people remain always on +the island. Him I take with me to hunt the +whale and seal, to gather the berries, and to +trap the little animals who bear fur. We find +even seal upon our shores, though fewer since +your people have come among us."</p> + +<p>"Which were the best, Russians or Americans?"<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span> +asked Mr. Strong, curious to see what +the old Indian would say, but the Tyee was not +to be caught napping.</p> + +<p>"Men all alike," he said. "Thlinkit, Russian, +American, some good, some bad. Russians +used Indians more, gave them hunting +and fishing, and only took part of the skins. +Americans like to hunt and fish all themselves +and leave nothing for the Indians. Russians +teach <i>quass</i>, Americans teach whiskey. Before +white men came, Indians were healthy. They +ate fish, game, berries; now they must have +other foods, and they are not good for Indians +here,"—he touched his stomach. "Indian +used to dress in skins and furs, now he must +copy white man and shiver with cold. He soon +has the coughing sickness and then he goes into +the unknown.</p> + +<p>"But the government of the Americans is +best because it tries to do some things for the +Indian. It teaches our boys useful things in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span> +the schools, and, if some of its people are bad, +some Indians are bad, too. Men all alike," +he repeated with the calm stoicism of his race.</p> + +<p>"The government is far away," said Mr. +Strong, "and should not be blamed for the +doings of all its servants. I should like to see +this island home of yours, and think we must +accept your invitation; shall we, Ted?" he +smiled at the boy.</p> + +<p>"Yes, indeed; thank you, sir," said Ted, +and he and Kalitan grinned at each other happily.</p> + +<p>"We shall stay in camp until the blue jay +comes," said the old chief, smiling, "and then +seek the village of my people."</p> + +<p>"What does the blue jay mean?" asked Ted, +timidly, for he was very much in awe of this +grave old man.</p> + +<p>Kalitan said something in Thlinkit to his +uncle, and the old chief, looking kindly at the +boy, replied with a nod:</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I will tell you the story of the blue jay," +he said.</p> + +<p>"My story is of the far, far north. Beside +a salmon stream there dwelt people rich in +slaves. These caught and dried the salmon for +the winter, and nothing is better to eat than +dried salmon dipped in seal oil. All the fish +were caught and stored away, when lo! the +whiteness fell from heaven and the snows were +upon them. It was the time of snow and they +should not have complained, but the chief was +evil and he cursed the whiteness. No one +should dare to speak evil of the Snow Spirit, +which comes from the Unknown! Deeper and +deeper grew the snow. It flew like feathers +about the <i>eglu</i>,<a name="FNanchor_5_5" id="FNanchor_5_5"></a><a href="#Footnote_5_5" class="fnanchor">[5]</a> and the slaves had many troubles +in putting in limbs for the fire. Then the +snow came in flakes so large they seemed like +the wings of birds, and the house was covered, +and they could no longer keep their <i>kyaks</i> on<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span> +top of the snow. All were shut tight in the +house, and their fire and food ran low. They +knew not how many days they were shut in, +for there was no way to tell the day from night, +only they knew they were sore hungry and that +the Snow Spirit was angry and terrible in his +anger.</p> + +<p>"But each one spoke not; he only chose a +place where he should lie down and die when +he could bear no more.</p> + +<p>"Only the chief spoke, and he once. 'Snow +Spirit,' he said aloud, 'I alone am evil. These +are not so. Slay me and spare!' But the Snow +Spirit answered not, only the wind screamed +around the <i>eglu</i>, and his screams were terrible +and sad. Then hope left the heart of the chief +and he prepared to die with all his people and +all his slaves.</p> + +<p>"But on the day when their last bit of food +was gone, lo! something pecked at the top of +the smoke-hole, and it sang 'Nuck-tee,' and it<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span> +was a blue jay. The chief heard and saw and +wondered, and, looking 'neath the smoke-hole, +he saw a scarlet something upon the floor. +Picking it up, he found it was a bunch of Indian +tomato berries, red and ripe, and quickly +hope sprang in his breast.</p> + +<p>"'Somewhere is summer,' he cried. 'Let +us up and away.'</p> + +<p>"Then the slaves hastened to dig out the +canoe, and they drew it with mighty labour, +for they were weak from fasting, over the +snows to the shore, and there they launched +it without sail or paddle, with all the people +rejoicing. And after a time the wind carried +them to a beach where all was summer. Birds +sang, flowers bloomed, and berries gleamed +scarlet in the sun, and there were salmon jumping +in the blue water. They ate and were satisfied, +for it was summer on the earth and summer +in their hearts.</p> + +<p>"That is how the Thlinkits came to our<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span> +island, and so we say when the snow breaks, +that now comes the blue jay."</p> + +<p>"Thank you for telling us such a dandy +story," cried Ted, who had not lost a word of +this quaint tale, told so graphically over the +camp-fire of the old chief Klake.</p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_3_3" id="Footnote_3_3"></a><a href="#FNanchor_3_3"><span class="label">[3]</span></a> Kooshta, a spirit in animal's form which inhabits the +body of sick persons and must be cast out, according to +Thlinkit belief.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_4_4" id="Footnote_4_4"></a><a href="#FNanchor_4_4"><span class="label">[4]</span></a> Shaman, native medicine-man.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_5_5" id="Footnote_5_5"></a><a href="#FNanchor_5_5"><span class="label">[5]</span></a> Hut.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span></p> + + + +<h2>CHAPTER III</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>TO THE GLACIER</div> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Ted</span> slept soundly all night, wrapped in the +bearskins from the sledge, in the little tent he +shared with his father. When the morning +broke, he sprang to his feet and hurried out +of doors, hopeful for the day's pleasures. The +snow had stopped, but the ground was covered +with a thick white pall, and the mountains were +turned to rose colour in the morning sun, which +was rising in a blaze of glory.</p> + +<p>"Good morning, Kalitan," shouted Ted to +his Indian friend, whom he spied heaping wood +upon the camp-fire. "Isn't it dandy? What +can we do to-day?"</p> + +<p>"Have breakfast," said Kalitan, briefly. +"Then do what Tyee says."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Well, I hope he'll say something exciting," +said Ted.</p> + +<p>"Think good day to hunt," said Kalitan, as +he prepared things for the morning meal.</p> + +<p>"Where did you get the fish?" asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"Broke ice-hole and fished when I got up," +said the Thlinkit.</p> + +<p>"You don't mean you have been fishing +already," exclaimed the lazy Ted, and Kalitan +smiled as he said:</p> + +<p>"White people like fish. Tyee said: 'Catch +fish for Boston men's breakfast,' and I go."</p> + +<p>"Do you always mind him like that?" asked +Ted. He generally obeyed his father, but there +were times when he wasn't anxious to and argued +a little about it. Kalitan looked at him +in astonishment.</p> + +<p>"He chief!" he said, simply.</p> + +<p>"What will we do with the camp if we all +go hunting?" asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"Nothing," said Kalitan.</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Leave Chetwoof to watch, I suppose," continued +Ted.</p> + +<p>"Watch? Why?" asked Kalitan.</p> + +<p>"Why, everything; some one will steal our +things," said Ted.</p> + +<p>"Thlinkits not steal," said Kalitan, with dignity. +"Maybe white man come along and steal +from his brothers; Indians not. If we go away +to long hunt, we <i>cache</i> blankets and no one +would touch."</p> + +<p>"What do you mean by <i>cache</i>?" asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"We build a mound hut near the house, and +put there the blankets and stores. Sometime +they stay there for years, but no one would take +from a <i>cache</i>. If one has plenty of wood by +the seashore or in the forest, he may cord it and +go his way and no one will touch it. A deer +hangs on a tree where dogs may not reach it, +but no stray hunter would slice even a piece. +We are not thieves."</p> + +<p>"It is a pity you could not send missionaries<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span> +to the States, you Thlinkits, my boy," said Mr. +Strong, who had come up in time to hear Kalitan's +words. "I'm afraid white people are less +honest."</p> + +<p>"Teddy, do you know we are to have some +hunting to-day, and that you'll get your first +experience with a glacier."</p> + +<p>"Hurrah," shouted Ted, dancing up and +down in excitement.</p> + +<p>"Tyee Klake says we can hunt toward the +base of the glacier, and I shall try to go a little +ways upon it and see how the land lies, or, +rather, the ice. It is getting warmer, and, if +it continues a few days, the snow will melt +enough to let us go over to that island you are +so anxious to see."</p> + +<p>Ted's eyes shone, and the amount of breakfast +he put away quite prepared him for his +day's work, which, pleasant though it might be, +certainly was hard work. The chief said they +must seek the glacier first before the sun got<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span> +hot, for it was blinding on the snow. So they +set out soon after breakfast, leaving Chetwoof +in charge of the camp, and with orders to catch +enough fish for dinner.</p> + +<p>"We'll be ready to eat them, heads and +tails," said Ted, and his father added, laughingly:</p> + +<p>"'Bible, bones, and hymn-book, too.'"</p> + +<p>"What does that mean?" asked Ted, as +Kalitan looked up inquiringly.</p> + +<p>"Once a writer named Macaulay said he +could make a rhyme for any word in the English +language, and a man replied, 'You can't +rhyme Timbuctoo.' But he answered without +a pause:</p> + +<div class='poem'> +"If I were a Cassowary<br /> +<span style="margin-left: 0.5em;">On the plains of Timbuctoo,</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 0.5em;">I'd eat up a missionary,</span><br /> +<span style="margin-left: 0.5em;">Bible, bones, and hymn-book, too."</span><br /> +</div> + +<p>Ted laughed, but Kalitan said, grimly:</p> + +<p>"Not good to eat Boston missionary, he +all skin and bone!"</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Where did they get the name Alaska?" +asked Ted, as they tramped over the snow +toward the glacier.</p> + +<p>"Al-ay-ck-sa—great country," said Kalitan.</p> + +<p>"It certainly is," said Ted. "It's fine! I +never saw anything like this at home," pointing +as he spoke to the scene in front of him.</p> + +<p>A group of evergreen trees, firs and the +Alaska spruce, so useful for fires and torches, +fringed the edge of the ice-field, green and verdant +in contrast to the gleaming snows of the +mountain, which rose in a gentle slope at first, +then precipitously, in a dazzling and enchanting +combination of colour. It was as if some marble +palace of old rose before them against the +heavens, for the ice was cut and serrated into +spires and gables, turrets and towers, all seeming +to be ornamented with fretwork where the +sun's rays struck the peaks and turned them +into silver and gold. Lower down the ice +looked like animals, so twisted was it into fantastic<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span> +shapes; fierce sea monsters with yawning +mouths seeming ready to devour; bears and +wolves, whales, gigantic elephants, and snowy +tigers, tropic beasts looking strangely out of +place in this arctic clime.</p> + +<p>Deep crevices cut the ice-fields, and in their +green-blue depths lurked death, for the least +misstep would dash the traveller into an abyss +which had no bottom. Beyond the glacier itself, +the snow-capped mountains rose grand and +serene, their glittering peaks clear against the +blue sky, which hue the glacier reflected and +played with in a thousand glinting shades, from +purpling amethyst to lapis lazuli and turquoise.</p> + +<p>As they gazed spellbound, a strange thing occurred, +a thing of such wonder and beauty that +Ted could but grasp his father's arm in silence.</p> + +<p>Suddenly the peaks seemed to melt away, the +white ice-pinnacles became real turrets, houses<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span> +and cathedrals appeared, and before them arose +a wonderful city of white marble, dream-like +and shadowy, but beautiful as Aladdin's palace +in the "Arabian Nights." At last Ted could +keep silent no longer.</p> + +<p>"What is it?" he cried, and the old chief +answered, gravely:</p> + +<p>"The City of the Dead," but his father +said:</p> + +<p>"A mirage, my boy. They are often seen +in these regions, but you are fortunate in seeing +one of the finest I have ever witnessed."</p> + +<p>"What is a mirage?" demanded Ted.</p> + +<p>"An optical delusion," said his father, "and +one I am sure I couldn't explain so that you +would understand it. The queer thing about +a mirage is that you usually see the very thing +most unlikely to be found in that particular +locality. In the Sahara, men see flowers and +trees and fountains, and here on this glacier we +see a splendid city."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span></p> + +<p>"It certainly is queer. What makes glaciers, +daddy?" Ted was even more interested than +usual in his father's talk because of Kalitan, +whose dark eyes never left Mr. Strong's face, +and who seemed to drink in every word of +information as eagerly as a thirsty bird drinks +water.</p> + +<p>"The dictionaries tell you that glaciers are +fields of ice, or snow and ice, formed in the +regions of perpetual snow, and moving slowly +down the mountain slopes or valleys. Many +people say the glaciers are the fathers of the +icebergs which float at sea, and that these are +broken off the glacial stream, but others deny +this. When the glacial ice and snow reaches +a point where the air is so warm that the ice +melts as fast as it is pushed down from above, +the glacier ends and a river begins. These are +the finest glaciers in the world, except, perhaps, +those of the Himalayas.</p> + +<p>"This bids fair to be a wonderfully interesting<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span> +place for my work, Ted, and I'm glad +you're likely to be satisfied with your new +friends, for I shall have to go to many places +and do a lot of things less interesting than the +things Kalitan can show you.</p> + +<p>"See these blocks of fine marble and those +superb masses of porphyry and chalcedony,—but +there's something which will interest you +more. Take my gun and see if you can't bring +down a bird for supper."</p> + +<p>Wild ducks were flying low across the edge +of the glacier and quite near to the boys, and +Ted grasped his father's gun in wild excitement. +He was never allowed to touch a gun +at home. Dearly as he loved his mother, it had +always seemed very strange to him that she +should show such poor taste about firearms, +and refuse to let him have any; and now that +he had a gun really in his hands, he could hardly +hold it, he was so excited. Of course it was not +the first time, for his father had allowed him<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span> +to practise shooting at a mark ever since they +had reached Alaska, but this was the first time +he had tried to shoot a living target. He selected +his duck, aimed quickly, and fired. Bang! +Off went the gun, and, wonder of wonders! +two ducks fell instead of one.</p> + +<p>"Well done, Ted, that duck was twins," +cried his father, laughing, almost as excited as +the boy himself, and they ran to pick up the +birds. Kalitan smiled, too, and quietly picked +up one, saying:</p> + +<p>"This one Kalitan's," showing, as he spoke, +his arrow through the bird's side, for he had +discharged an arrow as Ted fired his gun.</p> + +<p>"Too bad, Ted. I thought you were a +mighty hunter, a Nimrod who killed two birds +with one stone," said Mr. Strong, but Ted +laughed and said:</p> + +<p>"So I got the one I shot at, I don't care."</p> + +<p>They had wild duck at supper that night, for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span> +Chetwoof plucked the birds and roasted them +on a hot stone over the spruce logs, and Ted, +tired and wet and hungry, thought he had never +tasted such a delicious meal in his life.</p><hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER IV</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>TED MEETS MR. BRUIN</div> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> seemed to Ted as if he had scarcely +touched the pillow on the nights which followed +before it was daylight, and he would awake to +find the sun streaming in at his tent flap. He +always meant to go fishing with Kalitan before +breakfast, so the moment he woke up he jumped +out of bed, if his pile of fragrant pine boughs +covered with skins could be called a bed, and +hurried through his toilet. Quick as he tried +to be, however, he was never ready before Kalitan, +for, when Ted appeared, the Indian boy +had always had his roll in the snow and was +preparing his lines.</p> + +<p>Kalitan was perfectly fascinated with the +American boy. He thought him the most wonderful<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span> +specimen of a boy that he had ever seen. +He knew so much that Kalitan did not, and +talked so brightly that being with Ted was to +the Indian like having a book without the +bother of reading. There were some things +about him that Kalitan could not understand, +to be sure. Ted talked to his father just as if +he were another boy. He even spoke to Tyee +Klake on occasions when that august personage +had not only not asked him a question, but was +not speaking at all. From the Thlinkit point +of view, this was a most remarkable performance +on Ted's part, but Kalitan thought it must +be all right for a "Boston boy," for even the +stern old chief seemed to regard happy-go-lucky +Ted with approval.</p> + +<p>Ted, on the other hand, thought Kalitan the +most remarkable boy he had ever met in all his +life. He had not been much with boys. His +"Lady Mother," as he always called the gentle, +brown-eyed being who ruled his father and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span> +himself, had not cared to have her little Galahad +mingle with the rougher city boys who +thronged the streets, and had kept him with +herself a great deal. Ted had loved books, and +he and his little sister Judith had lived in a +pleasant atmosphere of refinement, playing happily +together until the boy had grown almost +to dread anything common or low. His mother +knew he had moral courage, and would face +any issue pluckily, but his father feared he +would grow up a milksop, and thought he +needed hardening.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Strong objected to the hardening process +if it consisted in turning her boy loose to +learn the ways of the city streets, but had consented +to his going with his father, urged +thereto by fears for his health, which was not of +the best, and the knowledge that he had reached +the "bear and Indian" age, and it was certainly +a good thing for him to have his experiences +first-hand.</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span></p> + +<p>To Ted the whole thing was perfectly delightful. +When he lay down at night, he +would often like to see "Mother and Ju," but +he was generally so tired that he was asleep +before he had time to think enough to be really +homesick. During the day there was too much +doing to have any thinking time, and, since he +had met this boy friend, he thought of little +else but him and what they were to do next. +The Tyee had assured Mr. Strong that it was +perfectly safe for the boys to go about together.</p> + +<p>"Kalitan knows all the trails," he said. +"He take care of white brother. Anything +come, call Chetwoof."</p> + +<p>As Mr. Strong was very anxious to penetrate +the glacier under Klake's guidance, and wanted +Ted to enjoy himself to the full, he left the boys +to themselves, the only stipulation being that +they should not go on the water without Chetwoof.</p> + +<p>There seemed to be always something new<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span> +to do. As the days grew warmer, the ice broke +in the river, and the boys tramped all over the +country. Ted learned to use the bow and arrow, +and brought down many a bird for supper, +and proud he was when he served up for +his father a wild duck, shot, plucked, and +cooked all by himself.</p> + +<p>They fished in the stream by day and set +lines by night. They trapped rabbits and hares +in the woods, and one day even got a silver fox, +a skin greatly prized by the fur traders on +account of its rarity. Kalitan insisted that Ted +should have it, though he could have gotten +forty dollars for it from a white trader, and Ted +was rejoiced at the idea of taking it home to +make a set of furs for Judith.</p> + +<p>One day Ted had a strange experience, and +not a very pleasant one, which might have been +very serious had it not been for Kalitan. He +had noticed a queer-looking plant on the river-bank +the day before, and had stopped to pick<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span> +it up, when he received such a sudden and unexpected +pricking as to cause him to jump back +and shout for Kalitan. His hand felt as if it +had been pierced by a thousand needles, and he +flew to a snow-bank to rub it with snow.</p> + +<p>"I must have gotten hold of some kind of +a cactus," he said to Kalitan, who only replied:</p> + +<p>"Huh! picked hedgehog," as he pointed to +where Ted's cactus was ambling indignantly +away with every quill rattling and set straight +out in anger at having his morning nap disturbed. +Kalitan wrapped Ted's hand in soft +mud, which took the pain out, but he couldn't +use it much for the next few days, and did not +feel eager to hunt when his father and the Tyee +started out in the morning. Kalitan remained +with him, although his eyes looked wistful, for +he had heard the chief talk about bear tracks +having been seen the day before. Bears were +quite a rarity, but sometimes an old cinnamon +or even a big black bruin would venture down<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span> +in search of fresh fish, which he would catch +cleverly with his great paws.</p> + +<p>Kalitan and Ted fished awhile, and then Ted +wandered away a little, wondering what lay +around a point of rock which he had never yet +explored. Something lay there which he had +by no means expected to see, and he scarcely +knew what to make of it. On the river-bank, +close to the edge of the stream, was a black +figure, an Indian fishing, as he supposed, and +he paused to watch. The fisherman was covered +with fur from head to foot, and, as Ted +watched him, he seemed to have no line or rod. +Going nearer, the boy grew even more puzzled, +and, though the man's back was toward him, +he could easily see that there was something unusual +about the figure. Just as he was within +hailing distance and about to shout, the figure +made a quick dive toward the water and sprang +back again with a fish between his paws, and +Ted saw that it was a huge bear. He gave a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span> +sharp cry and then stood stock-still. The creature +looked around and stood gnawing his fish +and staring at Ted as stupidly as the boy stared +at him. Then Ted heard a halloo behind him +and Kalitan's voice:</p> + +<p>"Run for Chetwoof, quick!"</p> + +<p>Ted obeyed as the animal started to move +off. He ran toward the camp, hearing the report +of Kalitan's gun as he ran. Chetwoof, +hearing the noise, hurried out, and it was but +a few moments before he was at Kalitan's side. +To Ted it seemed like a day before he could +get back and see what was happening, but he +arrived on the scene in time to see Chetwoof +despatch the animal.</p> + +<p>"Hurrah!" cried Ted. "You've killed a +bear," but Chetwoof only grunted crossly.</p> + +<p>"Very bad luck!" he said, and Kalitan explained:</p> + +<p>"Indians don't like to kill bears or ravens. +Spirits in them, maybe ancestors."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span></p> + +<p>Ted looked at him in great astonishment, +but Kalitan explained:</p> + +<p>"Once, long ago, a Thlinkit girl laughed at +a bear track in the snow and said: 'Ugly animal +must have made that track!' But a bear heard +and was angry. He seized the maiden and bore +her to his den, and turned her into a bear, and +she dwelt with him, until one day her brother +killed the bear and she was freed. And from +that day Thlinkits speak respectfully of bears, +and do not try to kill them, for they know not +whether it is a bear or a friend who hides +within the shaggy skin."</p> + +<p>The Tyee and Mr. Strong were greatly surprised +when they came home to see the huge +carcass of Mr. Bruin, and they listened to the +account of Kalitan's bravery. The old chief +said little, but he looked approvingly at Kalitan, +and said "Hyas kloshe" (very good), +which unwonted praise made the boy's face +glow with pleasure. They had a great discussion<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span> +as to whom the bear really belonged. Ted +had found him, Kalitan had shot him first, and +Chetwoof had killed him, so they decided to +go shares. Ted wanted the skin to take home, +and thought it would make a splendid rug for +his mother's library, so his father paid Kalitan +and Chetwoof what each would have received +as their share had the skin been sold to a trader, +and they all had bear meat for supper. Ted +thought it finer than any beefsteak he had ever +eaten, and over it Kalitan smacked his lips audibly.</p><hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER V</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>A MONSTER OF THE DEEP</div> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> big bear occupied considerable attention +for several days. He had to be carefully +skinned and part of the meat dried for future +use. Alaskans never use salt for preserving +meat. Indeed they seem to dislike salt very +much. It had taken Ted some time to learn +to eat all his meat and fish quite fresh, without +a taste of salt, but he had grown to like it. +There is something in the sun and wind of +Alaska which cures meat perfectly, and the +bear's meat was strung on sticks and dried in +the sun so that they might enjoy it for a long +time.</p> + +<p>It seemed as if the adventure with Bruin was +enough to last the boys for several days, for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span> +Ted's hand still pained him from the porcupine's +quills, and he felt tired and lazy. He lay +by the camp-fire one afternoon listening to Kalitan's +tales of his island home, when his father +came in from a long tramp, and, looking at +him a little anxiously, asked:</p> + +<p>"What's the matter, son?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing, I'm only tired," said Ted, but +Kalitan said:</p> + +<p>"Porcupine quills poison hand. Well in a +few days."</p> + +<p>"So your live cactus is getting in his work, +is he? I'm glad it wasn't the bear you mistook +for an Alaskan posy and tried to pick. I'm +tired myself," and Mr. Strong threw himself +down to rest.</p> + +<p>"Daddy, how did we come to have Alaska, +anyway?"</p> + +<p>"Well, that's a long story," said his father, +"but an interesting one."</p> + +<p>"Do tell us about it," urged Ted. "I know<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span> +we bought it, but what did we pay the Indians +for it? I shouldn't have thought they'd have +sold such a fine country."</p> + +<p>Kalitan looked up quickly, and there was a +sudden gleam in his dark eyes that Ted had +never seen before.</p> + +<p>"Thlinkits never sell," he said. "Russians +steal."</p> + +<p>Mr. Strong put his hand kindly on the boy's +head.</p> + +<p>"You're right, Kalitan," he said. "The +Russians never conquered the Thlinkits, the +bravest tribe in all Alaska.</p> + +<p>"You see, Teddy, it was this way. A great +many years ago, about 1740, a Danish sailor +named Bering, who was in the service of the +Russians, sailed across the ocean and discovered +the strait named for him, and a number of +islands. Some of these were not inhabited, +others had Indians or Esquimos on them, but, +after the manner of the early discoverers, Bering<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span> +took possession of them all in the name of +the Emperor of Russia. It doesn't seem right +as we look at things now, but in those days +'might made right,' and it was just the same +way the English did when they came to America.</p> + +<p>"The Russians settled here, finding the fishing +and furs fine things for trade, and driving +the Indians, who would not yield to them, farther +and farther inland. In 1790 the Czar +made Alexander Baranoff manager of the trading +company. Baranoff established trading-posts +in various places, and settled at Sitka, +where you can see the ruins of the splendid +castle he built. The Russians also sent missionaries +to convert the Indians to the Greek +Church, which is the church of Russia. The +Indians, however, never learned to care for the +Russians, and often were cruelly treated by +them. The Russians, however, tried to do +something for their education, and established<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span> +several schools. One as early as 1775, on Kadiak +Island, had thirty pupils, who studied +arithmetic, reading, navigation, and four of the +mechanical trades, and this is a better record +than the American purchasers can show, I am +sorry to say.</p> + +<p>"One of the recent travellers<a name="FNanchor_6_6" id="FNanchor_6_6"></a><a href="#Footnote_6_6" class="fnanchor">[6]</a> in Alaska +says that he met in the country 'American citizens +who never in their lives heard a prayer for +the President of the United States, nor of the +Fourth of July, nor the name of the capital of +the nation, but who have been taught to pray +for the Emperor of Russia, to celebrate his +birthday, and to commemorate the victories of +ancient Greece.' In March, 1867, the Russians +sold Alaska to the United States for $7,200,000 +in gold. It was bought for a song almost, +when we consider the immense amount of +money made for the government by the seal<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span> +fisheries, the cod and salmon industries, and the +opening of the gold fields. The resources of the +country are not half-known, and the government +is beginning to see this. That is one of +the reasons they have sent me here, with the +other men, to find out what the earth holds for +those who do not know how to look for its +treasures. Gold is not the best thing the earth +produces. There is land in Alaska little known +full of coal and other useful minerals. Other +land is covered with magnificent timber which +could be shipped to all parts of the world. +There are pasture-lands where stock will fatten +like pigs without any other feeding; there are +fertile soils which will raise almost any crops, +and there are intelligent Indians who can be +taught to work and be useful members of society. +I do not mean dragged off to the United +States to learn things they could never use in +their home lives, but who should be educated<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span> +here to make the best of their talents in their +home surroundings.</p> + +<p>"That is one crying shame to our government, +that they have neglected the Alaskan citizens. +Forty years have been wasted, but we +are beginning to wake up now, and twenty +years more will see the Indians of Kalitan's generation +industrious men and women, not only +clever hunters and fishermen, but lumbermen, +coopers, furniture makers, farmers, miners, and +stock-raisers."</p> + +<p>At this moment their quiet conversation was +interrupted by a wild shout from the shore, +and, springing to their feet, they saw Chetwoof +gesticulating wildly and shouting to the Tyee, +who had been mending his canoe by the river-bank. +Kalitan dropped everything and ran +without a word, scudding like the arrow from +which he took his name. Before Ted could +follow or ask what was the matter, from the +ocean a huge body rose ten feet out of the water,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span> +spouting jets of spray twenty feet into the air, +the sun striking his sides and turning them to +glistening silver. Then it fell back, the waters +churning into frothy foam for a mile around.</p> + +<p>"It's a whale, Ted, sure as you live. Luck +certainly is coming your way," said his father; +but, at the word "whale," Ted had started +after Kalitan, losing no time in getting to the +scene of action as fast as possible.</p> + +<p>"Watch the Tyee!" called Kalitan over his +shoulder, as both boys ran down to the water's +edge.</p> + +<p>The old chief was launching his <i>kiak</i> into +the seething waters, and to Ted it seemed incredible +that he meant to go in that frail bark +in pursuit of the mighty monster. The old +man's face, however, was as calm as though +starting on a pleasure-trip in peaceful waters, +and Ted watched in breathless admiration to +see what would happen next.</p> + +<p>Klake paddled swiftly out to sea, drawing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span> +as near as he dared to where the huge monster +splashed idly up and down like a great puppy +at play. He stopped the <i>kiak</i> and watched; +then poised his spear and threw it, and so swift +and graceful was his gesture that Ted exclaimed +in amazement.</p> + +<p>"Tyee Klake best harpoon-thrower of all the +Thlinkits," said Kalitan, proudly. "Watch!"</p> + +<p>Ted needed no such instructions. His keen +eyes passed from fish to man and back again, +and no movement of the Tyee escaped him.</p> + +<p>The instant the harpoon was thrown, the +Tyee paddled furiously away, for when a harpoon +strikes a whale, he is likely to lash violently +with his tail, and may destroy his enemy, +and this is a moment of terrible danger to the +harpooner. But the whale was too much astonished +to fight, and, with a terrific splash, he +dived deep, deep into the water, to get rid of +that stinging thing in his side, in the cold green +waters below.</p> + +<div class="figleft" style="width: 355px;"> +<img src="images/i077.jpg" width="355" height="500" alt="Throwing a harpoon from a kayak, surrounded by floating ice" /> +<span class="caption">"AWAY WENT ANOTHER STINGING LANCE."</span> +</div> +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span></p> +<p>The Tyee waited, his grim face tense and +earnest. It might have been fifteen minutes, +for whales often stay under water for twenty +minutes before coming to the surface to breathe, +but to Kalitan and Ted it seemed an hour.</p> + +<p>Then the spray dashed high into the air +again, and the instant the huge body appeared, +Klake drew near, and away went another stinging +lance again, swift and, oh! so sure of aim. +This time the whale struck out wildly, and Kalitan +held his breath, while Ted gasped at the +Tyee's danger, for his <i>kiak</i> rocked like a shell +and then was quite hidden from their sight by +the spray which was dashed heavenward like +clouds of white smoke.</p> + +<p>Once more the creature dived, and this time +he stayed down only a few minutes, and, when +he came up, blood spouted into the air and dyed +the sea crimson, and Kalitan exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"Pierced his lungs! Now he must die."</p> + +<p>There was one more bright, glancing weapon<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span> +flying through the air, and Ted noticed attached +to it by a thong a curious-looking bulb, and +asked Kalitan:</p> + +<p>"What is on that lance?"</p> + +<p>"Sealskin buoy," said Kalitan. "We make +the bag and blow it up, tie it to the harpoon, +and when the lance sticks into the whale, the +buoy makes it very hard for him to dive. After +awhile he dies and drifts ashore."</p> + +<p>The waters about the whale were growing +red, and the carcass seemed drifting out to sea, +and at last the Tyee seemed satisfied. He sent +a last look toward the huge body, then turned +his <i>kiak</i> toward the watchers on the banks.</p> + +<p>"If it only comes to shore," said Kalitan.</p> + +<p>"What will you do with it?" asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"Oh, there are lots of things we can do with +a whale," said Kalitan. "The blubber is the +best thing to eat in all the world. Then we use +the oil in a bowl with a bit of pith in it to light +our huts. The bones are all useful in building<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span> +our houses. Whales were once bears, but they +played too much on the shore and ran away to +sea, so they wore off all their fur on the rocks, +and had their feet nibbled off by the fishes."</p> + +<p>"Well, this one didn't have his tail nibbled +off at any rate," laughed Ted. "I saw it flap +at the Tyee, and thought that was the last of +him, sure."</p> + +<p>"Tyee much big chief," said Kalitan, and +just then the old man's <i>kiak</i> drew near them, +and he stepped ashore as calmly as though he +had not just been through so exciting a scene +with a mighty monster of the deep.</p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTE:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_6_6" id="Footnote_6_6"></a><a href="#FNanchor_6_6"><span class="label">[6]</span></a> Dr. Sheldon Jackson, General Agent of Education in +the Territory.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span></p> + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VI</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>THE ISLAND HOME OF KALITAN</div> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Swift</span> and even were the strokes of the paddles +as the canoes sped over the water toward +Kalitan's island home. Ted was so excited that +he could hardly sit still, and Tyee Klake gave +him a warning glance and a muttered "Kooletchika."<a name="FNanchor_7_7" id="FNanchor_7_7"></a><a href="#Footnote_7_7" class="fnanchor">[7]</a></p> + +<p>The day before a big canoe had come to the +camp, the paddlers bearing messages for the +Tyee, and he had had a long conversation with +Mr. Strong. The result was astonishing to +Teddy, for his father told him that he was to +go for a month to the island with Kalitan. +This delighted him greatly, but he was a little<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span> +frightened when he found that his father was +to stay behind.</p> + +<p>"It's just this way, son," Mr. Strong explained +to him. "I'm here in government employ, +taking government pay to do government +work. I must do it and do it well in the shortest +time possible. You will have a far better +time on the island with Kalitan than you could +possibly have loafing around the camp here. +You couldn't go to many places where I am +going, and, if my mind is easy about you, I can +take Chetwoof and do my work in half the +time. I'll come to the island in three or four +weeks, and we'll take a week's vacation together, +and then we'll hit the trail for the gold-fields. +Are you satisfied with this arrangement?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir." Ted's tone was dubious, but +his face soon cleared up. "A month won't be +very long, father."</p> + +<p>"No, I'll wager you'll be sorry to leave when<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span> +I come for you. Try and not make any trouble. +Of course Indian ways are not ours, but you'll +get used to it all and enjoy it. It's a chance +most boys would be crazy over, and you'll have +tales to tell when you get home to make your +playmates envy you. I'm glad I have a son +I can trust to keep straight when he is out of +my sight," and he laid his hand affectionately +on the boy's shoulder. Ted looked his father +squarely in the eye, but gave only a little nod +in answer, then he laughed his clear, ringing +laugh.</p> + +<p>"Wouldn't mother have spasms!" he exclaimed. +Mr. Strong laughed too, but said:</p> + +<p>"You'll be just as well off tumbling around +with Kalitan as falling off a glacier or two, as +you would be certain to do if you were with +me."</p> + +<p>Teddy felt a little blue when he said good-bye +to his father, but Kalitan quickly dispelled +his gloom by a great piece of news.</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Great time on island," he said, as the canoe +glided toward the dim outline of land to which +Ted's thoughts had so often turned. "Tyee's +whale came ashore. We go to see him cut +up."</p> + +<p>"Hurrah!" cried Ted, delighted. "To +think I shall see all that! What else will we +do, Kalitan?"</p> + +<p>"Hunt, fish, hear old Kala-kash stories. See +berry dance if you stay long enough, perhaps a +potlatch; do many things," said the Indian.</p> + +<p>One of the Indian paddlers said something +to Kalitan, and he laughed a little, and Ted +asked, curiously: "What did he say?"</p> + +<p>"Said Kalitan Tenas learned to talk as much +as a Boston boy," said Kalitan, laughing heartily, +and Ted laughed, too.</p> + +<p>The canoes were nearing the shore of a +wooded island, and Ted saw a fringe of trees +and some native houses clustered picturesquely +against them at the crest of a small hill which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span> +sloped down to the water's edge, where stood a +group of people awaiting the canoes.</p> + +<div class="figright" style="width: 357px;"> +<img src="images/i087.jpg" width="357" height="500" alt="People waiting in front of a small cabin" /> +<span class="caption">"A GROUP OF PEOPLE AWAITING THE CANOES."</span> +</div> + +<p>"My home," said Kalitan, pointing to the +largest house, "my people." There was a +great deal of pride in his tone and look, and +he received a warm welcome as the canoes +touched land and their occupants sprang on +shore. The boys crowded around the young +Indian and chattered and gesticulated toward +Ted, while a bright-looking little Malamute +sprang upon Kalitan and nearly knocked him +down, covering his face with eager puppy +kisses.</p> + +<p>The girls were less boisterous, and regarded +Teddy with shy curiosity. Some of them were +quite pretty, and the babies were as cunning as +the puppies. They barked every time the dogs +did, in a funny, hoarse little way, and, indeed, +Alaskan babies learn to bark long before they +learn to talk.</p> + +<p>The Tyee's wife received Teddy kindly, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span> +he soon found himself quite at home among +these hospitable people, who seemed always +friendly and natural. Nearly all spoke some +English, and he rapidly added to his store of +Chinook, so that he had no trouble in making +himself understood or in understanding. Of +course he missed his father, but he had little time +to be lonely. Life in the village was anything +but uneventful.</p> + +<p>At first there was the whale to be attended +to, and all the village turned out for that. The +huge creature had drifted ashore on the farther +side of the island, and Ted was much interested +in seeing him gradually disposed of. Great +masses of blubber were stripped from the sides +to be used later both for food and fuel, the +whalebone was carefully secured to be sold to +the traders, and it seemed to Ted that there +was not one thing in that vast carcass for which +the Indians did not have some use.</p> + +<p>Ted soon tired of watching the many things<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span> +done with the whale, but there was plenty to do +and see in the village.</p> + +<p>The village houses were all alike. There +was one large room in which the people cooked, +ate, and slept. The girls had blankets strung +across one corner, behind which were their beds. +Teddy was given one also for his corner of the +great room in the Tyee's house.</p> + +<p>He learned to eat the food and to like it very +much. There was dried fish, herons' eggs, berries, +or those put up in seal oil, which is obtained +by frying the fat out of the blubber of +the seal. The Alaskans use this oil in nearly all +their cooking, and are very fond of it. Ted +ate also dried seaweed, chopped and boiled in +seal oil, which tasted very much like boiled and +salted leather, but he liked it very well. Indeed +he grew so strong and well, out-of-doors all day +in the clear air and bright sunshine of the Alaskan +June, that he could eat anything and tramp +all day without being too tired to sleep like a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span> +top all night, and wake ready for a new day +with a zest he never felt at home.</p> + +<p>Fresh fish were plentiful. The boys caught +salmon, smelts, and whitefish, and many were +dried for the coming winter, while clams, gum-boots, +sea-cucumbers, and devil-fish, found on +the rocks of the shore, were every-day diet.</p> + +<p>Kalitan's sister and Ted became great friends. +She was older than Kalitan, and, though only +fifteen, was soon to be married to Tah-ge-ah, +a fine young Indian who was ready to pay high +for her, which was not strange, for she was +both pretty and sweet.</p> + +<p>"At the next full moon," said Kalitan, +"there will be a potlatch, and Tanana will be +sold to Tah-ge-ah. He says he will give four +hundred blankets for her, and my uncle is well +pleased. Many only pay ten blankets for a +wife, but of course we would not sell my sister +for that. She is of high caste, chief's daughter,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span> +niece, and sister," the boy spoke proudly, and +Ted answered:</p> + +<p>"She's so pretty, too. She's not like the +Indian girls I saw at Wrangel and Juneau. +Why, there the women sat around as dirty as +dogs on the sidewalk, and didn't seem to care +how they looked. They had baskets to sell, +and were too lazy to care whether any one +bought them or not. They weren't a bit like +Tanana. She's as pretty as a Japanese."</p> + +<p>Kalitan smiled, well pleased, and Ted added, +"I guess the Thlinkits must be the best Indians +in Alaska."</p> + +<p>Kalitan laughed outright at this.</p> + +<p>"Thlinkits pretty good," he said. "Tanana +good girl. She learned much good at +the mission school, marry Tah-ge-ah, and +make people better. She can weave blankets, +make fine baskets, and keep house like a white +girl."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span></p> + +<p>"She's all right," said Ted. "But, Kalitan, +what is a potlatch?"</p> + +<p>"Potlatch is a good-will feast," said his +friend. "Very fine thing, but white men do +not like. Say Indian feasts are all bad. Why +is it bad when an Indian gives away all his goods +for others? That is what a great potlatch is. +When white men give us whiskey and it is +drunk too much, then it is very bad. But Tyee +will not have that for Tanana's feast. We will +drink only quass,<a name="FNanchor_8_8" id="FNanchor_8_8"></a><a href="#Footnote_8_8" class="fnanchor">[8]</a> as my people made it before +they learned evil drinks and fire-water, which +make them crazy."</p> + +<p>"I guess Tyee Klake was right when he said +all men were alike," said Ted, sagely. "It +seems to me that there are good and bad ones +in all countries. It's a pity you have had such<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span> +bad white ones here in Alaska, but I guess you +have had good ones, too."</p> + +<p>"Plenty good, plenty bad, Thlinkit men and +Boston men," said Kalitan, "all same."</p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTE:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_7_7" id="Footnote_7_7"></a><a href="#FNanchor_7_7"><span class="label">[7]</span></a> "Dangerous channel."</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_8_8" id="Footnote_8_8"></a><a href="#FNanchor_8_8"><span class="label">[8]</span></a> Quass is a native drink, harmless and acid, made with +rye and water fermented. The bad Indians mix it with +sugar, flour, dried apples, and hops, and make a terribly intoxicating +drink.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VII</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>TWILIGHT TALES AND TOTEMS</div> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Once</span> a small girl child went by night to +bring water. In the skies above she saw the +Moon shining brightly, pale and placid, and she +put forth her tongue at it, which was an evil +thing, for the Moon is old, and a Thlinkit child +should show respect for age. So the Moon +would not endure so rude a thing from a girl +child, and it came down from the sky and took +her thither. She cried out in fear and caught at +the long grass to keep herself from going up, +but the Moon was strong and took her with +her water-bucket and her bunch of grass, and +she never came back. Her mother wept for +her, but her father said: 'Cease. We have<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span> +other girl children; she is now wedded to the +Moon; to him we need not give a potlatch.'</p> + +<p>"You may see her still, if you will look at +the Moon, there, grass in one hand, bucket in +the other, and when the new Moon tips to one +side and the water spills from the clouds and +it is the months of rain, it is the bad Moon +maiden tipping over her water-bucket upon the +earth. No Thlinkit child would dare ever to +put her tongue forth at the Moon, for fear of +a like fate to that of Squi-ance, the Moon +maiden."</p> + +<p>Tanana's voice was soft and low, and she +looked very pretty as she sat in the moonlight +at the door of the hut and told Kalitan and +Ted quaint old stories. Ted was delighted +with her tales, and begged for another and yet +another, and Tanana told the quaint story of +Kagamil.</p> + +<p>"A mighty <i>toyon</i><a name="FNanchor_9_9" id="FNanchor_9_9"></a><a href="#Footnote_9_9" class="fnanchor">[9]</a> dwelt on the island<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span> +of Kagamil. By name he was Kat-haya-koochat, +and he was of great strength and much +to be feared. He had long had a death feud +with people of the next totem, but the bold +warrior Yakaga, chieftain of the tribe, married +the toyon's daughter, and there was no more +feud. Zampa was the son of Kat-haya-koochat, +and his pride. He built for this son a fine +<i>bidarka</i>,<a name="FNanchor_10_10" id="FNanchor_10_10"></a><a href="#Footnote_10_10" class="fnanchor">[10]</a> and the boy launched it on the sea. +His father watched him sail and called him +to return, lest evil befall. But Zampa heard not +his father's voice and pursued diving birds,<a name="FNanchor_11_11" id="FNanchor_11_11"></a><a href="#Footnote_11_11" class="fnanchor">[11]</a> +and, lo! he was far from land and the dark +fell. He sailed to the nearest shore and beheld +the village of Yakaga, where the people of +his sister's husband made him welcome, though +Yakaga was not within his hut. There was +feasting and merry-making, and, according to +their custom, he, the stranger, was given a chieftain's +daughter to wife, and her name was Kitt-a-youx;<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span> +and Zampa loved her and she him, +and he returned not home. But Kitt-a-youx's +father liked him not, and treated him with +rudeness because of the old enmity with his +Tyee father, so Zampa said to Kitt-a-youx: +'Let us go hence. We cannot be happy here. +Let us go from your father, who is unfriendly +to me, and seek the <i>barrabora</i> of my father, +the mighty chief, that happiness may come upon +us,' and Kitt-a-youx said: 'What my lord says +is well.'</p> + +<p>"Then Zampa placed her in his canoe, and +alone beneath the stars they sailed and it was +well, and Zampa's arm was strong at his paddle. +But, lo! they heard another paddle, and +one came after them, and soon arrows flew +about them, arrows swift and cruel, and one +struck his paddle from his hand and his canoe +was overturned. The pursuer came and placed +Kitt-a-youx in his canoe, seeking, too, for +Zampa, but, alas! Zampa was drowned. And<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span> +when his pursuer dragged his body to the surface, +he gave a mighty cry, for, lo! it was his +brother-in-law whom he had pursued, for he +was Yakaga. Then fearing the terrible rage +of Zampa's father, he dared not return with +the body, so he left it with the overturned canoe +in the kelp and weeds. Kitt-a-youx he bore +with him to his own island. There she was sad +as the sea-gull's scream, for the lord she loved +was dead. And her father gave her to another +<i>toyon</i>, who was cruel to her, and her life was +as a slave's, and she loathed her life until +Zampa's child was born to her, and for it she +lived. Alas, it was a girl child and her husband +hated it, and Kitt-a-youx saw nothing for +it but to be sold as a slave as was she herself. +And she looked by day and by night at the sea, +and its cold, cold waves seemed warmer to her +than the arms of men. 'With my girl child I +shall go hence,' she whispered to herself, 'and +the Great Unknown Spirit will be kind.'</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span></p> + +<p>"So by night she stole away in a canoe and +steered to sea, ere she knew where she was, +reaching the seaweeds where she had journeyed +with her young husband. The morning broke, +and she saw the weeds and the kelp where her +lover had gone from her sight, and, with a glad +sigh, she clasped Zampa's child to her breast +and sank down among the weeds where he had +died. So her tired spirit was at rest, for a +woman is happier who dies with him she +loves.</p> + +<p>"Now Zampa's father had found his boy's +body and mourned over it, and buried it in a +mighty cave, the which he had once made for +his furs and stores. With it he placed bows +and arrows and many valuables in respect for +the dead. And Zampa's sister, going to his +funeral feast, fell upon a stone with her child, +so that both were killed. Then broke the old +chief's heart. Beside her brother he laid her +in the cave, and gave orders that he himself<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span> +should be placed there as well, when grief +should have made way with him. Then he died +of sorrow for his children, and his people interred +him in his burial cave, and with him they +put much wealth and blankets and weapons.</p> + +<p>"When, therefore, the people of his tribe +found the bodies of Kitt-a-youx and her child +among the kelp, having heard of her love for +Zampa, they bore them to the same cave, and, +wrapping them in furs, they placed Kitt-a-youx +beside her beloved husband, and in her burial +she found her home and felt the kindness of the +Great Spirit. This, then, is the story of the +burial cave of Kagamil, and since that day no +man dwelt upon the island, and it is known as +the 'island of the dead.'"</p> + +<p>"I'd like to see it, I can tell you," said Ted. +"Are there any burial caves around here?"</p> + +<p>"The Thlinkits do not bury in caves," said +Tanana. "We used to burn our dead, but +often we place them in totem-poles."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I thought those great poles by your doors +were totems," said Ted, puzzled.</p> + +<p>"Yes," said the girl. "They are caste totems, +and all who are of any rank have them. +As we belong to the Raven, or Bear, or Eagle +clan, we have the carved poles to show our +rank, but the totem of the dead is quite different. +It does not stand beside the door, but far +away. It is alone, as the soul of the dead in +whose honour it is made. It is but little carved. +A square hole is cut at the back of the pole, +and the body of the dead, wrapped in a matting +of cedar bark, is placed within, a board being +nailed so that the body will not fall to the +ground. A potlatch is given, and food from +the feast is put in the fire for the dead person."</p> + +<p>"It seems queer to put weapons and blankets +and things to eat on people's graves," said Ted. +"Why do they do it?"</p> + +<p>"Of the dead we know nothing," said Tanana.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span> +"Perhaps the warrior spirit wishes his +arrows in the Land of the Great Unknown."</p> + +<p>"Yes, but he can't come back for them," +persisted Ted.</p> + +<p>"At Wrangel, Boston man put flowers on +his girl's grave," said Kalitan, drily. "She +come back and smell posy?"</p> + +<p>Having no answer ready, Ted changed the +subject and asked:</p> + +<p>"Why do you have the raven at the top of +your totem pole?"</p> + +<p>"Indian cannot marry same totem," said +Kalitan. "My father was eagle totem, my +mother was raven totem. He carve her totem +at the top of the pole, then his totem and those +of the family are carved below. The greater +the family the taller the totem."</p> + +<p>"How do you get these totems?" demanded +Ted.</p> + +<p>"Clan totems we take from our parents, but +a man may choose his own totem. Before he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span> +becomes a man he must go alone into the forest +to fast, and there he chooses his totem, and he +is brother to that animal all his life, and may +not kill it. When he comes forth, he may take +part in all the ceremonies of his tribe."</p> + +<p>"Why, it is something like knighthood and +the vigil at arms and escutcheons, and all those +Round-Table things," exclaimed Ted, in delight, +for he dearly loved the stirring tales of +King Arthur and his knights and the doughty +deeds of Camelot.</p> + +<p>"Tell us about that," said Kalitan, so Ted +told them many tales in the moonlight, as they +sat beneath the shadows of the quaint and curious +totem-poles of Kalitan's tribe.</p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_9_9" id="Footnote_9_9"></a><a href="#FNanchor_9_9"><span class="label">[9]</span></a> Chieftain.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_10_10" id="Footnote_10_10"></a><a href="#FNanchor_10_10"><span class="label">[10]</span></a> Canoe.</p></div> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_11_11" id="Footnote_11_11"></a><a href="#FNanchor_11_11"><span class="label">[11]</span></a> Ducks.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VIII</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>THE BERRY DANCE</div> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Teddy's</span> month upon the island stretched +out into two. His father came and went, finding +the boy so happy and well that he left him +with an easy mind. Ted's fair skin was tanned +to a warm brown, and, clad in Indian clothes, +save for his aureole of copper-coloured hair, +so strong a contrast to the straight black locks +of his Indian brothers, he could hardly be told +from one of the island lads who roamed all +day by wood and shore. They called him +"Yakso pil chicamin,"<a name="FNanchor_12_12" id="FNanchor_12_12"></a><a href="#Footnote_12_12" class="fnanchor">[12]</a> and all the village +liked him.</p> + +<p>Tanana's marriage-feast was held, and she +and Tah-ge-ah went to housekeeping in a little<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span> +hut, where the one room was as clean and neat +as could be, and not a bit like the dirty rooms +of some of the natives. Tanana spent all her +spare time weaving beautiful baskets, for her +slim fingers were very skilful. Some of the +baskets which she made out of the inner bark +of the willow-tree were woven so closely that +they would hold water, and Teddy never tired +of watching her weave the gay colours in and +out, nor of seeing the wonderful patterns grow. +Tah-ge-ah would take them to the mainland +when she had enough made, and sell them to +the travellers from the States. Meantime Tah-ge-ah +himself was very, very busy carving the +totem-pole for his new home, for Tanana was +a chieftain's daughter, and he, too, was of high +caste, and their totem must be carved and stand +one hundred feet high beside their door, lest +they be reproached.</p> + +<p>Ted also enjoyed seeing old Kala-kash carve, +for he was the finest carver among the Indians,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span> +and it was wonderful to see him cut strange +figures out of bone, wood, horn, fish-bones, and +anything his gnarled old fingers could get hold +of, and he would carve grasshoppers, bears, +minnows, whales, sea-gulls, babies, or idols. +He made, too, a canoe for Ted, a real Alaskan +dugout, shaping the shell from a log and making +it soft by steam, filling the hole with water +and throwing in red-hot stones. The wood was +then left to season, and Ted could hardly wait +patiently until sun and wind and rain had made +his precious craft seaworthy. Then it was +painted with paint made by rubbing a certain +rock over the surface of a coarse stone and the +powder mixed with oil or water.</p> + +<p>At last it was done, a shapely thing, more +beautiful in Ted's eyes than any launch or yacht +he had ever seen at home. His canoe had a +carved stern and a sharp prow which came out +of the water, and which had carved upon it a +fine eagle. Kala-kash had not asked Ted what<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span> +his totem was, but supposing that the American +eagle on the buttons of the boy's coat was his +emblem, had carved the rampant bird upon the +canoe as the boy's totem. Ted learned to paddle +and to fish, never so well as Kalitan, of +course, for he was born to it, but still he did +very well, and enjoyed it hugely.</p> + +<p>Happily waned the summer days, and then +came the time of the berry dance, which Kalitan +had spoken of so often that Ted was very +anxious to see it.</p> + +<p>The salmon-berry was fully ripe, a large and +luscious berry, found in two colours, yellow and +dark red. Besides these there were other small +berries, maruskins, like the New England dewberries, +huckleberries, and whortleberries.</p> + +<p>"We have five kinds of berries on our +island," said Kalitan. "All good. The birds, +flying from the mainland, first brought the +seeds, and our berries grow larger than almost +any place in Alaska."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span></p> + +<p>"They're certainly good," said Ted, his +mouth full as he spoke. "These salmon-berries +are a kind of a half-way between our blackberries +and strawberries. I never saw anything +prettier than the way the red and yellow berries +grow so thick on the same bush—"</p> + +<p>"There come the canoes!" interrupted Kalitan, +and the two boys ran down to the water's +edge, eager to be the first to greet the visitors. +Tyee Klake was giving a feast to the people +of the neighbouring islands, and a dozen canoes +glided over the water from different directions. +The canoes were all gaily decorated, and they +came swiftly onward to the weird chant of the +paddlers, which the breeze wafted to the listeners' +ears in a monotonous melody.</p> + +<p>Every one in the village had been astir since +daybreak, preparing for the great event. Parallel +lines had been strung from the chief's +house to the shore, and from these were hung +gay blankets, pieces of bright calico, and festoons<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span> +of leaves and flowers. As the canoes +landed their occupants, the dancers thronged +to welcome their guests. The great drum +sounded its loud note, and the dancers, arrayed +in wonderful blankets woven in all manner of +fanciful designs and trimmed with long woollen +fringes, swayed back and forth, up and down, +to and fro, in a very graceful manner, keeping +time to the music.</p> + +<p>In the centre of the largest canoe stood the +Tyee of a neighbouring island, a tall Indian, +dressed in a superb blanket with fringe a foot +long, fringed leggins and moccasins of walrus +hide, and the chief's hat to show his rank. It +was a peculiar head-dress half a foot high, +trimmed in down and feathers.</p> + +<p>The Tyee, in perfect time to the music, +swayed back and forth, never ceasing for a +moment, shaking his head so that the down +was wafted in a snowy cloud all over him.</p> + +<p>As the canoes reached the shallows, the shore<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span> +Indians dashed into the water to draw them +up to land, and the company was joyously received. +Teddy was delighted, for in one of +the canoes was his father, whom he had not +seen for several weeks. After the greetings +were over, the dancers arranged themselves in +opposite lines, men on one side, women on the +other, and swayed their bodies while the drum +kept up its unceasing tum-tum-tum.</p> + +<p>"It's a little bit like square dances at home," +said Ted. "It's ever so pretty, isn't it? First +they sway to the right, then to the left, over +and over and over; then they bend their bodies +forward and backward without bending their +knees, then sway again, and bend to one side +and then the other, singing all the time. Isn't +it odd, father?"</p> + +<p>"It certainly is, but it's very graceful," said +Mr. Strong. "Some of the girls are quite +pretty, gentle-looking creatures, but the older +women are ugly."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span></p> + +<p>"The very old women look like the mummies +in the museum at home," said Ted. +"There's one old woman, over a hundred years +old, whose skin is like a piece of parchment, +and she wears the hideous lip-button which +most of the Thlinkits have stopped using. Kalitan +says all the women used to wear them. The +girls used to make a cut in their chins between +the lip and the chin, and put in a piece of wood, +changing it every few days for a piece a little +larger until the opening was stretched like a +second mouth. When they grew up, a wooden +button like the bowl of a spoon was set in the +hole and constantly enlarged. The largest I +have seen was three inches long. Isn't it a +curious idea, father?"</p> + +<p>"It certainly is, but there is no telling what +women will admire. A Chinese lady binds her +feet, and an American her waist; a Maori +woman slits her nose, and an English belle +pierces her ears. It's on the same principle that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span> +your Thlinkit friends slit their chins for the lip-button."</p> + +<p>"I'm mighty glad they don't do it now, for +Tanana's as pretty as a pink, and it would be +a shame to spoil her face that way," said Ted. +"The dancing has stopped, father; let's see +what they'll do next. There comes Kalitan."</p> + +<p>A feast of berries was to follow the dance, +and Kalitan led Mr. Strong and Ted to the +chief's house, which was gaily decorated with +blankets and bits of bright cloth. A table covered +with a cloth was laid around three sides +of the room, and on this was spread hardtack +and huge bowls of berries of different colours. +These were beaten up with sugar into a foamy +mixture, pink, purple, and yellow, according +to the colour of the berries, which tasted good +and looked pretty.</p> + +<p>Ted and Kalitan had helped gather the berries, +and their appetites were quite of the best. +Mr. Strong smiled to see how the once fussy<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span> +little gentleman helped himself with a right +good-will to the Indian dainties of his friends.</p> + +<p>Many pieces of goods had been provided for +the potlatch, and these were given away, given +and received with dignified politeness. There +was laughing and merriment with the feast, +and when it was all over, the canoes floated +away as they had come, into the sunset, which +gilded all the sea to rosy, golden beauty.</p> + +<p>Ted's share of the potlatch was a beautiful +blanket of Tanana's weaving, and he was delighted +beyond measure.</p> + +<p>"You're a lucky boy, Ted," said his father. +"People pay as high as sixty-five dollars for +an Alaskan blanket, and not always a perfect +one at that. Many of the Indians are using +dyed yarns to weave them, but yours is the +genuine article, made from white goat's wool, +long and soft, and dyed only in the native reds +and blacks. We shall have to do something +nice for Tanana when you leave."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I'd like to give her something, and Kalitan, +too." Ted's face looked very grave. +"When do I have to go, father?"</p> + +<p>"Right away, I'm afraid," was the reply. +"I've let you stay as long as possible, and now +we must start for our northern trip, if you are +to see anything at all of mines and Esquimos +before we start home. The mail-steamer passes +Nuchek day after to-morrow, and we must go +over there in time to take it."</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir," said Ted, forlornly. He wanted +to see the mines and all the wonderful things +of the far north, but he hated to leave his Indian +friends.</p> + +<p>"What's the trouble, Ted?" His father +laid his hand on his shoulder, disliking to see +the bright face so clouded.</p> + +<p>"I was only thinking of Kalitan," said +Ted.</p> + +<p>"Suppose we take Kalitan with us," said +Mr. Strong.</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Oh, daddy, could we really?" Ted +jumped in excitement.</p> + +<p>"I'll ask the Tyee if he will lend him to us +for a month," said Mr. Strong, and in a few +minutes it was decided, and Ted, with one great +bear's hug to thank his father, rushed off to +find his friend and tell him the glorious news.</p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTE:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_12_12" id="Footnote_12_12"></a><a href="#FNanchor_12_12"><span class="label">[12]</span></a> Copper hair.</p></div></div> + + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span></p> + + +<h2>CHAPTER IX</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>ON THE WAY TO NOME</div> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Well</span>, boys, we're off for a long sail, and +I'm afraid you will be rather tired with the +steamer before you are done with her," said +Mr. Strong. They had boarded the mail-steamer +late the night before, and, going right +to bed, had wakened early next day and rushed +on deck to find the August sun shining in brilliant +beauty, the islands quite out of sight, and +nought but sea and sky around and above them.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I don't know; we'll find something +to do," said Teddy. "You'll have to tell us +lots about the places we pass, and, if there aren't +any other boys on board, Kalitan and I will +be together. What's the first place we stop?"</p> + +<p>"We passed the Kenai Peninsula in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span> +night. I wish you could have caught a glimpse +of some of the waterfalls, volcanoes, and glaciers. +They are as fine as any in Alaska," said +Mr. Strong. "Our next stop will be Kadiak +Island."</p> + +<p>"Kadiak Island was once near the mainland," +said Kalitan. "There was only the narrowest +passage of water, but a great Kenai +otter tried to swim the pass, and was caught +fast. He struggled so that he made it wider +and wider, and at last pushed Kadiak way out +to sea."</p> + +<p>"He must have been a whopper," said Ted, +"to push it so far away. Is that the island?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," said his father. "There are no +splendid forests on the island as there are on +the mainland, but the grasses are superb, for the +fog and rain here keeps them green as emerald."</p> + +<p>"What a queer canoe that Indian has!" exclaimed +Ted. "It isn't a bit like yours, Kalitan."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span></p> + +<p>"It is <i>bidarka</i>," said Kalitan. "Kadiak +people make canoe out of walrus hide. They +stretch it over frames of driftwood. It holds +two people. They sit in small hatch with apron +all around their bodies, and the <i>bidarka</i> goes +over the roughest sea and floats like a bladder. +Big <i>bidarka</i> called an <i>oomiak</i>, and holds whole +family."</p> + +<p>"Some one has called the <i>bidarkas</i> the 'Cossacks +of the sea,'" said Mr. Strong. "They +skim along like swallows, and are as perfectly +built as any vessel I ever saw."</p> + +<p>"What are those huge buildings on the small +island?" asked Ted, as the steamer wound +through the shallows.</p> + +<p>"Ice-houses," said his father. "Before people +learned to manufacture ice, immense cargoes +were shipped from here to as far south +as San Francisco."</p> + +<p>"It was fun to see them go fishing for ice +from the steamer when we came up to Skaguay,"<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span> +said Ted. "The sailors went out in a +boat, slipped a net around a block of ice and +towed it to the side of the ship, then it was +hitched to a derrick and swung on deck."</p> + +<p>"Huh!" said Kalitan. "What people want +ice for stored up? Think they'd store sunshine!"</p> + +<p>"If you could invent a way to do that, you +could make a fortune, my boy," said Mr. +Strong, laughing. "The next place of any +interest is Karluk. It's around on the other +side of the island in Shelikoff Strait, and is +famous for its salmon canneries. Nearly half +of the entire salmon pack of Alaska comes from +Kadiak Island, most of the fish coming from +the Karluk River."</p> + +<p>"Very bad for Indians," said Kalitan. +"Used to have plenty fish. Tyee Klake said +salmon used to come up this river in shoal sixteen +miles long, and now Boston men take them +all."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span></p> + +<p>"It does seem a pity that the Indians don't +even have a chance to earn their living in the +canneries," said Mr. Strong. "The largest +cannery in the world is at Karluk. There are +thousands of men employed, and in one year +over three million salmon were packed, yet with +all this work for busy hands to do, the canneries +employ Chinese, Greek, Portuguese, and American +workmen in preference to the Indians, +bringing them by the shipload from San Francisco."</p> + +<p>"What other places do we pass?" asked +Ted.</p> + +<p>"A lot of very interesting ones, and I wish +we could coast along, stopping wherever we felt +like it," said Mr. Strong. "The Shumagin +Islands are where Bering, the great discoverer +and explorer, landed in 1741 to bury one of +his crew. Codfish were found there, and Captain +Cook, in his 'Voyages and Discoveries,' +speaks of the same fish. There is a famous<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span> +fishery there now called the Davidson Banks, +and the codfishing fleet has its headquarters on +Popoff Island. Millions of codfish are caught +here every year. These islands are also a favourite +haunt of the sea otter. Belofsky, at the +foot of Mt. Pavloff, is the centre of the trade."</p> + +<div class="figleft" style="width: 357px;"> +<img src="images/i123.jpg" width="357" height="500" alt="mountain in water with flock of birds flying by" /> +<span class="caption">MOUNT SHISHALDIN.</span> +</div> + +<p>"What kind of fur is otter?" asked Ted, +whose mind was so inquiring that his father +often called him the "living catechism."</p> + +<p>"It is the court fur of China and Russia, and +at one time the common people were forbidden +by law to wear it," said Mr. Strong. "It is a +rich, purplish brown sprinkled with silver-tipped +hairs, and the skins are very costly."</p> + +<p>"At one time any one could have otter," said +Kalitan. "We hunted them with spears and +bows and arrows. Now they are very few, and +we find them only in dangerous spots, hiding +on rocks or floating kelp. Sometimes the hunters +have to lie in hiding for days watching them. +Only Indians can kill the otter. Boston men<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span> +can if they marry Indian women. That makes +them Indian."</p> + +<p>"Rather puts otter at a discount and women +at a premium," laughed Mr. Strong. "Now +we pass along near the Alaska peninsula, past +countless isles and islets, through the Fox +Islands to Unalaska, and then into the Bering +Sea. One of the most interesting things in this +region is called the 'Pacific Ring of Fire,' a +chain of volcanoes which stretches along the +coast. Often the passengers can see from the +ships at night a strange red glow over the sky, +and know that the fire mountains are burning. +The most beautiful of these volcanoes is Mt. +Shishaldin, nearly nine thousand feet high, and +almost as perfect a cone in shape as Fuji Yama, +which the Japanese love so much and call 'the +Honourable Mountain.' At Unalaska or Ilinlink, +the 'curving beach,' we stop. If we could +stay over for awhile, there are a great many +interesting things we could see; an old Greek<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span> +church and the government school are in the +town, and Bogoslov's volcano and the sea-lion +rookeries are on the island of St. John, which +rose right up out of the sea in 1796 after a day's +roaring and rumbling and thundering. In 1815 +there was a similar performance, and from time +to time the island has grown larger ever since. +One fine day in 1883 there was a great shower +of ashes, and, when the clouds had rolled away, +two peaks were seen where only one had been, +separated by a sandy isthmus. This last was +reduced to a fine thread by the earthquake of +1891, and I don't know what new freaks it +may have developed by now. I know some +friends of mine landed there not long ago and +cooked eggs over the jets of steam which gush +out of the mountainside. Did you ever hear of +using a volcano for a cook-stove?"</p> + +<p>"Well, I should say not," said Ted, amused. +"These Alaskan volcanoes are great things."</p> + +<p>"The one called Makushin has a crater filled<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span> +with snow in a part of which there is always a +cloud of sulphurous smoke. That's making +extremes meet, isn't it?"</p> + +<p>"Yehl<a name="FNanchor_13_13" id="FNanchor_13_13"></a><a href="#Footnote_13_13" class="fnanchor">[13]</a> made many strange things," said +Kalitan, who had been taking in all this information +even more eagerly than Teddy. "He +first dwelt on Nass River, and turned two blades +of grass into the first man and woman. Then +the Thlinkits grew and prospered, till darkness +fell upon the earth. A Thlinkit stole the sun +and hid it in a box, but Yehl found it and set +it so high in the heavens that none could touch +it. Then the Thlinkits grew and spread abroad. +But a great flood came, and all were swept away +save two, who tossed long upon the flood on a +raft of logs until Yehl pitied, and carried them +to Mt. Edgecomb, where they dwelt until the +waters fell."</p> + +<p>"Old Kala-kash tells this story, and he says<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span> +that one of these people, when very old, went +down through the crater of the mountain, and, +given long life by Yehl, stays there always to +hold up the earth out of the water. But the +other lives in the crater as the Thunder Bird, +Hahtla, whose wing-flap is the thunder and +whose glance is the lightning. The osprey is +his totem, and his face glares in our blankets +and totems."</p> + +<p>"I've wondered what that fierce bird was," +said Teddy, who was always quite carried away +with Kalitan's strange legends.</p> + +<p>"Well, what else do we see on the way to +Nome, father?"</p> + +<p>"The most remarkable thing happening in +the Bering Sea is the seal industry, but I do not +think we pass near enough to the islands to see +any of that. You'd better run about and see +the ship now," and the boys needed no second +permission.</p> + +<p>It was not many days before they knew<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span> +everybody on board, from captain to deck +hands, and were prime favourites with them +all. Ted and Kalitan enjoyed every moment. +There was always something new to see or hear, +and ere they reached their journey's end, they +had heard all about seals and sealing, although +the famous Pribylov Islands were too far to +the west of the vessel's route for them to see +them. They sighted the United States revenue +cutter which plies about the seal islands to keep +off poachers, for no one is allowed to kill seals +or to land on this government reservation except +from government vessels. The scent of +the rookeries, where millions of seals have been +killed in the last hundred years, is noticed far +out at sea, and often the barking of the animals +can be heard by passing vessels.</p> + +<p>"Why is sealskin so valuable, father?" +asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"It has always been admired because it is so +warm and soft," replied Mr. Strong. "All the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span> +ladies fancy it, and it never seems to go out of +fashion. There was a time, when the Pribylov +Islands were first discovered, that sealskins were +so plentiful that they sold in Alaska for a dollar +apiece. Hunters killed so many, killing old and +young, that soon there were scarcely any left, +so a law was passed by the Russian government +forbidding any killing for five years. Since the +Americans have owned Alaska they have protected +the seals, allowing them to be killed only +at certain times, and only male seals from two +to four years old are killed. The Indians are +always the killers, and are wonderfully swift and +clever, never missing a blow and always killing +instantly, so that there is almost no suffering."</p> + +<p>"How do they know where to find the +seals?" asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"For half the year the seals swim about the +sea, but in May they return to their favourite +haunts. In these rookeries families of them +herd on the rocks, the male staying at home<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span> +with his funny little black puppies, while the +mother swims about seeking food. The seals +are very timid, and will rush into the water +at the least strange noise. A story is told that +the barking of a little pet dog belonging to a +Russian at one of the rookeries lost him a hundred +thousand dollars, for the seals took fright +and scurried away before any one could say +'Jack Robinson!'"</p> + +<p>"Rather an expensive pup!" commented +Ted. "But what about the seals, daddy?"</p> + +<p>"You seem to think I am an encyclopædia +on the seal question," said his father. "There +is not much else to tell you."</p> + +<p>"How can they manage always to kill the +right ones?" demanded Ted.</p> + +<p>"The gay bachelor seals herd together away +from the rest and sleep at night on the rocks. +Early in the morning the Aleuts slip in between +them and the herd and drive them slowly to +the killing-ground, where they are quickly killed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span> +and skinned and the skins taken to the salting-house. +The Indians use the flesh and blubber, +and the climate is such that before another year +the hollow bones are lost in the grass and +earth."</p> + +<p>"What becomes of the skins after they are +salted?"</p> + +<p>"They are usually sent to London, where +they are prepared for market. The work is all +done by hand, which is one reason that they +are so expensive. They are first worked in sawdust, +cleaned, scraped, washed, shaved, plucked, +dyed with a hand-brush from eight to twelve +times, washed again and freed from the least +speck of grease by a last bath in hot sawdust +or sand."</p> + +<p>"I don't wonder a sealskin coat costs so +much," said Ted, "if they have got to go +through all that performance. I wish we could +have seen the islands, but I'd hate to see the +seals killed. It doesn't seem like hunting just<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span> +to knock them on the head. It's too much like +the stock-yards at home."</p> + +<p>"Yes, but it's a satisfaction to know that +it's done in the easiest possible way for the +animals.</p> + +<p>"What a lot you are learning way up here +in Alaska, aren't you, son? To-morrow we'll be +at Nome, and then your head will be so stuffed +with mines and mining that you will forget all +about everything else."</p> + +<p>"I don't want to forget any of it," said Ted. +"It's all bully."</p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTE:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_13_13" id="Footnote_13_13"></a><a href="#FNanchor_13_13"><span class="label">[13]</span></a> Yehl, embodied in the raven, is the Thlinkit Great +Spirit.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span></p> + + + +<h2>CHAPTER X</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>IN THE GOLD COUNTRY</div> + + +<p><span class="smcap">A low</span>, sandy beach, without a tree to break +its level, rows of plain frame-houses, some tents +and wooden shanties scattered about, the surf +breaking over the shore in splendid foam,—this +was Teddy's first impression of Nome. +They had sailed over from St. Michael's to +see the great gold-fields, and both the boys were +full of eagerness to be on land. It seemed, +however, as if their desires were not to be realized, +for landing at Nome is a difficult matter.</p> + +<p>Nome is on the south shore of that part of +Alaska known as Seward Peninsula, and it has +no harbour. It is on the open seacoast and +catches all the fierce storms that sweep northward +over Bering Sea. Generally seacoast<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span> +towns are built in certain spots because there +is a harbour, but Nome was not really built, +it "jes' growed," for, when gold was found +there, the miners sat down to gather the harvest, +caring nothing about a harbour.</p> + +<p>Ships cannot go within a mile of land, and +passengers have to go ashore in small lighters. +Sometimes when they arrive, they cannot go +ashore at all, but have to wait several days, +taking refuge behind a small island ten miles +away, lest they drag their anchors and be dashed +to pieces on the shore.</p> + +<p>There had been a tremendous storm at Nome +the day before Ted arrived, and landing was +more difficult than usual, but, impatient as the +boys were, at last it seemed safe to venture, and +the party left the steamer to be put on a rough +barge, flat-bottomed and stout, which was +hauled by cable to shore until it grounded on +the sands. They were then put in a sort of +wooden cage, let down by chains from a huge<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span> +wooden beam, and swung round in the air like +the unloading cranes of a great city, over the +surf to a high platform on the land.</p> + +<p>"Well, this is a new way to land," cried Ted, +who had been rather quiet during the performance, +and his father thought a trifle frightened. +"It's a sort of a balloon ascension, isn't +it?"</p> + +<p>"It must be rather hard for the miners, who +have been waiting weeks for their mail, when +the boat can't land her bags at all," said Mr. +Strong. "That sometimes happens. From November +to May, Nome is cut off from the world +by snow and ice. The only news they receive +is by the monthly mail when it comes.</p> + +<p>"Over at Kronstadt the Russians have ice-breaking +boats which keep the Baltic clear +enough of ice for navigation, and plow their +way through ice fourteen feet thick for two +hundred miles. The Nome miners are very<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span> +anxious for the government to try this ice-boat +service at Nome."</p> + +<p>"Why did people settle here in such a forlorn +place?" asked Ted, as they made their way +to the town, which they found anything but +civilized. "I like the Indian houses on the +island better than this."</p> + +<p>"Your island is more picturesque," said Mr. +Strong, "but people came here for what they +could get.</p> + +<p>"In 1898 gold was discovered on Anvil +Creek, which runs into Snake River, and this +turned people's eyes in the direction of Nome. +Miners rushed here and set to work in the +gulches inland, but it was not till the summer +of 1899 that gold was found on the beach. A +soldier from the barracks—you know this is +part of a United States Military Reservation—found +gold while digging a well near the beach, +and an old miner took out $1,200 worth in +twenty days. Then a perfect frenzy seized the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span> +people. They flocked to Nome from far and +near; they camped on the beach in hundreds +and staked their claims. Between one and two +thousand men were at work on the beach at one +time, yet so good-natured were they that no +quarrels seem to have occurred. Doctors, lawyers, +barkeepers, and all dropped their business +and went to rocking, as they call beach-mining."</p> + +<div class="figright" style="width: 356px;"> +<img src="images/i139.jpg" width="356" height="500" alt="one man poking fire another standing by" /> +<span class="caption">"'LET'S WATCH THOSE TWO MEN. THEY HAVE EVIDENTLY +STAKED A CLAIM TOGETHER.'"</span> +</div> + +<p>"Oh, dad, let's hurry and go and see it," +cried Ted, as they hurried through their dinner +at the hotel. "I thought gold came out of deep +mines like copper, and had to be melted out or +something, but this seems to be different. Do +they just walk along the beach and pick it up? +I wish I could."</p> + +<p>"Well, it's not quite so simple as that," said +Mr. Strong, laughing. "We'll go and see, and +then you'll understand," and they went down +the crooked streets to the sandy beach.</p> + +<p>Men were standing about talking and laughing, +others working hard. All manner of men +were there scattered over the <i>tundra</i>,<a name="FNanchor_14_14" id="FNanchor_14_14"></a><a href="#Footnote_14_14" class="fnanchor">[14]</a> and Ted +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span>became interested in two who were working +together in silence.</p> + +<p>"What are they doing?" he asked his father. +"I can't see how they expect to get anything +worth having out of this mess."</p> + +<p>"Beach-mining is quite different from any +other," said his father. "Let's watch those +two men. They have evidently staked a claim +together, which means that nobody but these +two can work on the ground they have staked +out, and that they must share all the gold they +find. They came here to prospect, and evidently +found a block of ground which suited +them. They then dug a prospect hole down +two to five feet until they struck 'bedrock,' +which happens to be clay around here. They +passed through several layers of sand and +gravel before reaching this, and these were carefully +examined to see how much gold they contained.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span> +Upon reaching a layer which seemed +to be a good one, the gravel on top was stripped +off and thrown aside and the 'pay streak' +worked with the rocker."</p> + +<p>"What is that?" asked Ted, who was all +ears, while Kalitan was taking in everything +with his sharp black eyes.</p> + +<p>"That arrangement that looks like a square +pan on a saw-buck is the rocker. The rockers +usually have copper bottoms, and there is a +great demand for sheet copper at Nome, but +often there is not enough of it, and the miners +have been known to cover them with silver +coins. That man you are watching has silver +dollars in his, about fifty, I should say. It seems +extravagant, doesn't it, but he'll take out many +times that amount if he has good luck."</p> + +<p>The man, who had glanced up at them, +smiled at that and said:</p> + +<p>"And, if I don't have luck, I'm broke, anyhow, +so fifty or sixty plunks won't make much<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span> +difference. You going to be a miner, youngster?"</p> + +<p>"Not this trip," said Ted, with a smile. +"Say, I'd like to know how you get the gold +out with that."</p> + +<p>"At first we used to put a blanket in the +rocker, and wash the pay dirt on that. Our +prospect hole has water in it, and we can use +it over and over. Some of the holes are dry, +and there the men have to pack their pay dirt +down to the shore and use surf water for washing. +Most of our gold is so fine that the +blanket didn't stop it, so now we use 'quick.' +I reckon you'd call it mercury, but we call it +quick. You see, it saves time, and work-time +up here is so short, on account of winter setting +in so early, that we have to save up our spare +minutes and not waste 'em on long words."</p> + +<p>Ted grinned cheerfully and asked: "What +do you do with the quick?"</p> + +<p>"We paint it over the bottom of the rocker,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span> +and it acts like a charm and catches every speck +of gold that comes its way as the dirt is washed +over it. The quick and the gold make a sort +of amalgam."</p> + +<p>"But how do you get at the gold after it +amalgams, or whatever you call it?" asked +Ted.</p> + +<p>"Sure we fry it in the frying-pan, and it's +elegant pancakes it makes," said the man. "See +here," and he pulled from his pocket several +flat masses that looked like pieces of yellow +sponge. "This is pure gold. All the quick +has gone off, and this is the real stuff, just as +good as money. An ounce will buy sixteen dollars' +worth of anything in Nome."</p> + +<p>"It looks mighty pretty," said Ted. "Seems +to me it's redder than any gold I ever saw."</p> + +<p>"It is," said his father. "Nome beach gold +is redder and brighter than any other Alaskan +gold. I guess I'll have to get you each a piece +for a souvenir," and both boys were made happy<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span> +by the present of a quaintly shaped nugget, +bought by Mr. Strong from the very miner who +had mined it, which of course added to its value.</p> + +<p>"You're gathering quite a lot of souvenirs, +Ted," said his father. "It's a great relief that +you have not asked me for anything alive yet. +I have been expecting a modest request for a +Malamute or a Husky pup, or perhaps a pet +reindeer to take home, but so far you have been +quite moderate in your demands."</p> + +<p>"Kalitan never asks for anything," said Ted. +"I asked him once why it was, and he said Indian +boys never got what they asked for; that +sometimes they had things given to them that +they hadn't asked for, but, if he asked the Tyee +for anything, all he got was 'Good Indian get +things for himself,' and he had to go to work +to get the thing he wanted. I guess it's a pretty +good plan, too, for I notice that I get just as +much as I did when I used to tease you for +things," Teddy added, sagely.</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Wise boy," said his father. "You're certainly +more agreeable to live with. The next +thing you are to have is a visit to an Esquimo +village, and, if I can find some of the Esquimo +carvings, you shall have something to take home +to mother. Kalitan, what would you like to +remember the Esquimos by?"</p> + +<p>Kalitan smiled and replied, simply, "<i>Mukluks</i>."</p> + +<p>"What are <i>mukluks</i>?" demanded Ted.</p> + +<p>"Esquimo moccasins," said Mr. Strong. +"Well, you shall both have a pair, and they +are rather pretty things, too, as the Esquimos +make them."</p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTE:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_14_14" id="Footnote_14_14"></a><a href="#FNanchor_14_14"><span class="label">[14]</span></a> The name given to the boggy soil of the beach.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span></p> + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XI</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>AFTERNOON TEA IN AN EGLU</div> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> Esquimo village was reached across the +<i>tundra</i>, and Teddy and Kalitan were much interested +in the queer houses. Built for the long +winter of six or eight months, when it is impossible +to do anything out-of-doors, the <i>eglu</i><a name="FNanchor_15_15" id="FNanchor_15_15"></a><a href="#Footnote_15_15" class="fnanchor">[15]</a> +seems quite comfortable from the Esquimo +point of view, but very strange to their American +cousins.</p> + +<p>"I thought the Esquimos lived in snow +houses," said Ted, as they looked at the queer +little huts, and Kalitan exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"Huh! Innuit queer Indian!"</p> + +<p>"No," said Mr. Strong; "his hut is built<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span> +by digging a hole about six feet deep and standing +logs up side by side around the hole. On +the top of these are placed logs which rest even +with the ground. Stringers are put across these, +and other logs and moss and mud roofed over +it, leaving an opening in the middle about two +feet square. This is covered with a piece of +walrus entrail so thin and transparent that light +easily passes through it, and it serves as a window, +the only one they have. A smoke-hole is +cut through the roof, but there is no door, for +the hut is entered through another room built +in the same way, fifteen or twenty feet distant, +and connected by an underground passage about +two feet square with the main room. The entrance-room +is entered through a hole in the +roof, from which a ladder reaches the bottom +of the passage."</p> + +<p>"Can we go into a hut?" asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"I'll ask that woman cooking over there," +said Mr. Strong, as they went up to a woman<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span> +who was cooking over a peat fire, holding over +the coals an old battered skillet in which she +was frying fish. She nodded and smiled at the +boys, and, as Esquimos are always friendly and +hospitable souls, told them to go right into her +<i>eglu</i>, which was close by.</p> + +<p>They climbed down the ladder, crawled +along the narrow passage to where a skin hung +before an opening, and, pushing it aside, entered +the living-room. Here they found an old man +busily engaged in carving a walrus tooth, another +sewing <i>mukluks</i>, while a girl was singing +a quaint lullaby to a child of two in the corner.</p> + +<p>The young girl rose, and, putting the baby +down on a pile of skins, spoke to them in good +English, saying quietly:</p> + +<p>"You are welcome. I am Alalik."</p> + +<p>"May we see your wares? We wish to buy," +said Mr. Strong, courteously.</p> + +<p>"You may see, whether you buy or not," she +said, with a smile, which showed a mouth full<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span> +of even white teeth, and she spread out before +them a collection of Esquimo goods. There +were all kinds of carvings from walrus tusks, +grass baskets, moccasins of walrus hide, stone +bowls and cups, <i>parkas</i> made of reindeer skin, +and one superb one of bird feathers, <i>ramleikas</i>, +and all manner of carved trinkets, the most +charming of which, to Ted's eyes, being a tiny +<i>oomiak</i> with an Esquimo in it, made to be used +as a breast-pin. This he bought for his mother, +and a carving of a baby for Judith; while his +father made him and Kalitan happy with presents.</p> + +<p>"Where did you learn such English?" asked +Mr. Strong of Alalik, wondering, too, where +she learned her pretty, modest ways, for Esquimo +women are commonly free and easy.</p> + +<p>"I was for two years at the Mission at Holy +Cross," she said. "There I learned much that +was good. Then my mother died, and I came +home."</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span></p> + +<p>She spoke simply, and Mr. Strong wondered +what would be the fate of this sweet-faced girl.</p> + +<p>"Did you learn to sew from the sisters?" +asked Ted, who had been looking at the garments +she had made, in which the stitches, +though made in skins and sewn with deer sinew, +were as even as though done with a machine.</p> + +<p>"Oh, no," she said. "We learn that at +home. When I was no larger than Zaksriner +there, my mother taught me to braid thread +from deer and whale sinew, and we must sew +very much in winter if we have anything to sell +when summer comes. It is very hard to get +enough to live. Since the Boston men come, +our people waste the summer in idleness, so +we have nothing stored for the winter's food. +Hundreds die and many sicknesses come upon +us. In the village where my people lived, in +each house lay the dead of what the Boston +men called measles, and there were not left +enough living to bury the dead. Only we escaped,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span> +and a Black Gown came from the Mission +to help, and he took me and Antisarlook, +my brother, to the school. The rest came here, +where we live very well because there are in the +summer, people who buy what we make in the +winter."</p> + +<p>"How do you get your skins so soft?" asked +Ted, feeling the exquisite texture of a bag she +had just finished. It was a beautiful bit of +work, a tobacco-pouch or "Tee-rum-i-ute," +made of reindeer skin, decorated with beads and +the soft creamy fur of the ermine in its summer +hue.</p> + +<p>"We scrape it a very long time and pull and +rub," she said. "Plenty of time for patience +in winter."</p> + +<p>"Your hands are too small and slim. I +shouldn't think you could do much with those +stiff skins," said Teddy.</p> + +<p>Alalik smiled at the compliment, and a little +flush crept into the clear olive of her skin. She<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span> +was clean and neat, and the <i>eglu</i>, though close +from being shut up, was neater than most of the +Esquimo houses. The bowl filled with seal oil, +which served as fire and light, was unlighted, +and Alalik's father motioned to her and said +something in Innuit, to which she smilingly +replied:</p> + +<p>"My father wishes you to eat with us," she +said, and produced her flint bag. In this were +some wads of fibrous material used for wicks. +Rolling a piece of this in wood ashes, she held +it between her thumb and a flint, struck her +steel against the stone, and sparks flew out +which lighted the fibre so that it burst into +flame. This was thrown into the bowl of oil, +and she deftly began preparing tea. She served +it in cups of grass, and Ted thought he had +never tasted anything nicer than the cup of +afternoon tea served in an <i>eglu</i>.</p> + +<p>"Alalik, what were you singing as we came +in?" asked Ted.</p><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span></p> + +<p>"A song my mother always sang to us," she +replied. "It is called 'Ahmi,' and is an Esquimo +slumber song."</p> + +<p>"Will you sing it now?" asked Mr. Strong, +and she smiled in assent and sang the quaint, +crooning lullaby of her Esquimo mother—</p> + +<div class='poem2'> +"The wind blows over the Yukon.<br /> +My husband hunts the deer on the Koyukun Mountains,<br /> +Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not.<br /> +Long since my husband departed. Why does he wait in the mountains?<br /> +Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, softly.<br /> +Where is my own?<br /> +Does he lie starving on the hillside? Why does he linger?<br /> +Comes he not soon, I will seek him among the mountains.<br /> +Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, sleep.<br /> +The crow has come laughing.<br /> +His beak is red, his eyes glisten, the false one.<br /> +'Thanks for a good meal to Kuskokala the Shaman.<br /> +On the sharp mountain quietly lies your husband.'<br /> +Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not.<br /> +'Twenty deers' tongues tied to the pack on his shoulders;<br /> +Not a tongue in his mouth to call to his wife with,<br /> +Wolves, foxes, and ravens are fighting for morsels.<br /> +<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span>Tough and hard are the sinews, not so the child in your bosom.'<br /> +Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not.<br /> +Over the mountains slowly staggers the hunter.<br /> +Two bucks' thighs on his shoulders with bladders of fat between them.<br /> +Twenty deers' tongues in his belt. Go, gather wood, old woman!<br /> +Off flew the crow, liar, cheat, and deceiver!<br /> +Wake, little sleeper, and call to your father.<br /> +He brings you back fat, marrow and venison fresh from the mountain.<br /> +Tired and worn, he has carved a toy of the deer's horn,<br /> +While he was sitting and waiting long for the deer on the hillside.<br /> +Wake, and see the crow hiding himself from the arrow,<br /> +Wake, little one, wake, for here is your father."<br /> +</div> + +<p>Thanking Alalik for the quaint song, sung +in a sweet, touching voice, they all took their +departure, laden with purchases and delighted +with their visit.</p> + +<p>"But you must not think this is a fair sample +of Esquimo hut or Esquimo life," said Mr. +Strong to the boys. "These are near enough +civilized to show the best side of their race, but +theirs must be a terrible existence who are inland<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span> +or on islands where no one ever comes, +and whose only idea of life is a constant struggle +for food."</p> + +<p>"I think I would rather be an American," +remarked Ted, while Kalitan said, briefly:</p> + +<p>"I like Thlinkit."</p> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTE:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_15_15" id="Footnote_15_15"></a><a href="#FNanchor_15_15"><span class="label">[15]</span></a> The <i>eglu</i> is the Esquimo house. Often they occupy +tents during the summer, but return to the huts the first +cool nights.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XII</h2> + +<div class='chaptertitle'>THE SPLENDOUR OF SAGHALIE TYEE</div> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> <i>tundra</i> was greenish-brown in colour, +and looked like a great meadow stretching from +the beach, like a new moon, gently upward to +the cones of volcanic mountains far away.</p> + +<p>The ground, frozen solid all the year, thaws +out for a foot or two on the surface during the +warm months, and here and there were scattered +wild flowers; spring beauties, purple primroses, +yellow anemone, and saxifrages bloomed in +beauty, and wild honey-bees, gay bumblebees, +and fat mosquitoes buzzed and hummed everywhere.</p> + +<p>Ted and Kalitan were going to see the reindeer +farm at Port Clarence, and, as this was +to be their last jaunt in Alaska, they were determined<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span> +to make the best of it. Next day they +were to take ship from Cape Prince of Wales +and go straight to Sitka. Here Ted was to +start for home, and Mr. Strong was to leave +Kalitan at the Mission School for a year's +schooling, which, to Kalitan's great delight, was +to be a present to him from his American +friends.</p> + +<p>"Tell us about the reindeer farms, daddy. +Have they always been here?" demanded Ted, +as they tramped over the <i>tundra</i>, covered with +moss, grass, and flowers.</p> + +<p>"No," said his father. "They are quite +recent arrivals in Alaska. The Esquimos used +to live entirely upon the game they killed before +the whites came. There were many walruses, +which they used for many things; whales, too, +they could easily capture before the whalers +drove them north, and then they hunted the +wild reindeer, until now there are scarcely any +left. There was little left for them to eat but<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span> +small fish, for you see the whites had taken away +or destroyed their food supplies.</p> + +<p>"One day, in 1891, an American vessel discovered +an entire village of Esquimos starving, +being reduced to eating their dogs, and it was +thought quite time that the government did +something for these people whose land they had +bought. Finding that people of the same race +in Siberia were prosperous and healthy, they +sent to investigate conditions, and found that +the Siberian Esquimos lived entirely by means +of the reindeer. The government decided to +start a reindeer farm and see if it would not +benefit the natives."</p> + +<p>"How does it work?" asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"Very well, indeed," said his father. "At +first about two hundred animals were brought +over, and they increased about fifty per cent. +the first year. Everywhere in the arctic region +the <i>tundra</i> gives the reindeer the moss he lives +on. It is never dry in summer because the frost<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span> +prevents any underground drainage, and even +in winter the animals feed upon it and thrive. +There are, it is said, hundreds of thousands of +square miles of reindeer moss in Alaska, and +reindeer stations have been established in many +places, and, as the natives are the only ones +allowed to raise them, it seems as if this might +be the way found to help the industrious Esquimos +to help themselves."</p> + +<p>"But if it all belongs to the government, +how can it help the natives?" asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"Of course they have to be taught the business," +said Mr. Strong. "The government +brought over some Lapps and Finlanders to +care for the deer at first, and these took young +Esquimos to train. Each one serves five years +as herder, having a certain number of deer set +apart for him each year, and at the end of his +service goes into business for himself."</p> + +<p>"Why, I think that's fine," cried Ted. "Oh, +Daddy, what is that? It looks like a queer,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span> +tangled up forest, all bare branches in the summer."</p> + +<p>"That's a reindeer herd lying down for their +noonday rest. What you see are their antlers. +How would you like to be in the midst of that +forest of branches?" asked Mr. Strong.</p> + +<p>"No, thank you," said Teddy, but Kalitan +said:</p> + +<p>"Reindeer very gentle; they will not hurt +unless very much frightened."</p> + +<p>"What queer-looking animals they are," said +Ted, as they approached nearer. "A sort of a +cross between a deer and a cow."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps they are more useful than handsome, +but I think there is something picturesque +about them, especially when hitched to sleds +and skimming over the frozen ground."</p> + +<p>The farm at Teller was certainly an interesting +spot. Teddy saw the deer fed and milked, +the Lapland women being experts in that line, +and found the herders, in their quaint <i>parkas</i><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span> +tied around the waist, and conical caps, scarcely +less interesting than the deer. Two funny little +Lapp babies he took to ride on a large reindeer, +which proceeding did not frighten the babies +half so much as did the white boy who put them +on the deer. A reindeer was to them an every-day +occurrence, but a Boston boy was quite another +matter.</p> + +<div class="figleft" style="width: 359px;"> +<img src="images/i163.jpg" width="359" height="500" alt="two children on reindeer, another in front" /> +<span class="caption">"TWO FUNNY LITTLE LAPP BABIES HE TOOK TO RIDE ON A +LARGE REINDEER."</span> +</div> + +<p>Better than the reindeer, however, Teddy +and Kalitan liked the draught dogs who hauled +the water at the station. A great cask on +wheels was pulled by five magnificent dogs, +beautiful fellows with bright alert faces.</p> + +<p>"They are the most faithful creatures in +the world," said Mr. Strong, "devoted to their +masters, even though the masters are cruel to +them. Reindeer can work all day without a +mouthful to eat, living on one meal at night of +seven pounds of corn-meal mush, with a pound +or so of dried fish cooked into it. On long journeys +they can live on dried fish and snow, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span> +five dogs will haul four hundred pounds thirty-five +miles a day. They carry the United States +mails all over Alaska."</p> + +<p>"I should think the dog would be worth +more than the reindeer," said Ted.</p> + +<p>"Many Alaskan travellers say he is by far +the best for travelling, but he cannot feed himself +on the <i>tundra</i>, nor can he be eaten himself +if necessary. The Jarvis expedition proved +the value of the reindeer," said Mr. Strong.</p> + +<p>"What was that?" asked Ted.</p> + +<p>"Some years ago a whale fleet was caught +in the ice near Point Barrow, and in danger +of starving to death, and word of this was sent +to the government. The President ordered the +revenue cutter <i>Bear</i> to go as far north as possible +and send a relief party over the ice by sledge +with provisions.</p> + +<p>"When the <i>Bear</i> could go no farther, her +commander landed Lieutenant Jarvis, who was +familiar with the region, and a relief party.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span> +They were to seek the nearest reindeer station +and drive a reindeer herd to the relief of the +starving people. The party reached Cape +Nome and secured some deer, and the rescue +was made, but under such difficulties that it is +one of the most heroic stories of the age. +These men drove four hundred reindeer over +two thousand miles north of the Arctic Circle, +over frozen seas and snow-covered mountains, +and found the starving sailors, who ate the +fresh reindeer meat, which lasted until the ice +melted in the spring and set them free."</p> + +<p>"I think that was fine," said Ted. "But it +seems a little hard on the reindeer, doesn't it, +to tramp all that distance just to be eaten?"</p> + +<p>"Animals made for man," said Kalitan, +briefly.</p> + +<hr class="tb" /> + +<p>A golden glory filled the sky, running upwards +toward the zenith, spreading there in +varying colours from palest yellow to orange<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span> +and deepest, richest red. Glowing streams of +light streamed heavenward like feathery wings, +as Ted and Kalitan sailed southward, and Ted +exclaimed in wonder: "What is it?"</p> + +<p>"The splendour of <i>Saghalie Tyee</i>,"<a name="FNanchor_16_16" id="FNanchor_16_16"></a><a href="#Footnote_16_16" class="fnanchor">[16]</a> said +Kalitan, solemnly.</p> + +<p>"The Aurora Borealis," said Mr. Strong, +"and very fortunate you are to see it. Indeed, +Teddy, you seem to have brought good luck, +for everything has gone well this trip. Our +faces are turned homeward now, but we will +have to come again next summer and bring +mother and Judith."</p> + +<p>"I'll be glad to get home to mother again," +said Ted, then noting Kalitan's wistful face, +"We'll find you at Sitka and go home with you +to the island," and he put his arm affectionately +over the Indian boy's shoulder. Kalitan pointed +to the sky, whence the splendour was fading, +and a flock of birds was skimming southwards.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span></p> + +<p>"From the sky fades the splendour of <i>Saghalie +Tyee</i>," he said. "The summer is gone, +the birds fly southward. The light goes from +me when my White Brother goes with the birds. +Unless he return with them, all is dark for +Kalitan!"</p> + + +<div class='center'><br />THE END.<br /><br /></div> + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTE:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_16_16" id="Footnote_16_16"></a><a href="#FNanchor_16_16"><span class="label">[16]</span></a> Way-up High Chief, i.e., God.</p></div></div> + + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class='adtitle1'>THE LITTLE COUSIN SERIES</div> + + +<p>The most delightful and interesting accounts possible +of child life in other lands, filled with quaint sayings, +doings, and adventures.</p> + +<p>Each one vol., 12mo, decorative cover, cloth, with six or more +full-page illustrations in color.</p> + + +<div class='center'>Price per volume $0.60<br /> + +<br /> + +<i>By MARY HAZELTON WADE</i> (<i>unless otherwise +indicated</i>)<br /><br /></div> + + + +<div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" summary=""> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little African Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Alaskan Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Arabian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Armenian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Brown Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Canadian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Elizabeth R. Macdonald</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Chinese Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Isaac Taylor Headland</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Cuban Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Dutch Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little English Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Eskimo Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little French Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little German Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Hawaiian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Hindu Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Indian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Irish Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Italian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Japanese Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Jewish Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Korean Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By H. Lee M. Pike</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Mexican Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Edward C. Butler</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Norwegian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Panama Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By H. Lee M. Pike</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Philippine Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Porto Rican Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Russian Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Scotch Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Blanche McManus</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Siamese Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Spanish Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Swedish Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="right">By Claire M. Coburn</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Swiss Cousin</b></td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Our Little Turkish Cousin</b></td></tr> +</table></div> + + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class='adtitle1'>THE GOLDENROD LIBRARY</div> + + +<p>The Goldenrod Library contains stories which appeal +alike both to children and to their parents and guardians.</p> + +<p>Each volume is well illustrated from drawings by +competent artists, which, together with their handsomely +decorated uniform binding, showing the goldenrod, +usually considered the emblem of America, is a feature +of their manufacture.</p> + +<div class='center'> +Each one volume, small 12mo, illustrated $0.35<br /> +<br /> + + +<br /><b>LIST OF TITLES</b></div> + + + +<div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="0" cellspacing="0" summary="book list"> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Aunt Nabby's Children.</b> By Frances Hodges White.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Child's Dream of a Star, The.</b> By Charles Dickens.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Flight of Rosy Dawn, The.</b> By Pauline Bradford Mackie.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Findelkind.</b> By Ouida.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Fairy of the Rhone, The.</b> By A. Comyns Carr.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Gatty and I.</b> By Frances E. Crompton.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Helena's Wonderworld.</b> By Frances Hodges White.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Jerry's Reward.</b> By Evelyn Snead Barnett.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>La Belle Nivernaise.</b> By Alphonse Daudet.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Little King Davie.</b> By Nellie Hellis.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Little Peterkin Vandike.</b> By Charles Stuart Pratt.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Little Professor, The.</b> By Ida Horton Cash.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Peggy's Trial.</b> By Mary Knight Potter.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Prince Yellowtop.</b> By Kate Whiting Patch.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Provence Rose, A.</b> By Ouida.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Seventh Daughter, A.</b> By Grace Wickham Curran.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Sleeping Beauty, The.</b> By Martha Baker Dunn.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Small, Small Child, A.</b> By E. Livingston Prescott.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Susanne.</b> By Frances J. Delano.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Water People, The.</b> By Charles Lee Sleight.</td></tr> +<tr><td align="left"><b>Young Archer, The.</b> By Charles E. Brimblecom.</td></tr> +</table></div> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class='adtitle1'>COSY CORNER SERIES</div> + +<div class='hang1'>It is the intention of the publishers that this series shall +contain only the very highest and purest literature,—stories +that shall not only appeal to the children themselves, +but be appreciated by all those who feel with +them in their joys and sorrows.</div> + +<div class='hang1'>The numerous illustrations in each book are by well-known +artists, and each volume has a separate attractive +cover design.</div> + +<div class='center'> +Each 1 vol., 16mo, cloth $0.50<br /> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + + +<div class='adauthor'><i>By ANNIE FELLOWS JOHNSTON</i></div> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Little Colonel. <span class='small'>(Trade Mark)</span></div> + +<p>The scene of this story is laid in Kentucky. Its heroine +is a small girl, who is known as the Little Colonel, +on account of her fancied resemblance to an old-school +Southern gentleman, whose fine estate and old family +are famous in the region.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Giant Scissors.</div> + +<p>This is the story of Joyce and of her adventures +in France. Joyce is a great friend of the Little Colonel, +and in later volumes shares with her the delightful experiences +of the "House Party" and the "Holidays."</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Two Little Knights of Kentucky.</div> +<div class='unindent'><span class="smcap">Who Were the Little Colonel's Neighbors.</span></div> + +<p>In this volume the Little Colonel returns to us like an +old friend, but with added grace and charm. She is +not, however, the central figure of the story, that place +being taken by the "two little knights."</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Mildred's Inheritance.</div> + +<p>A delightful little story of a lonely English girl who +comes to America and is befriended by a sympathetic +American family who are attracted by her beautiful +speaking voice. By means of this one gift she is enabled +to help a school-girl who has temporarily lost the +use of her eyes, and thus finally her life becomes a busy, +happy one.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Cicely and Other Stories for Girls.</div> + +<p>The readers of Mrs. Johnston's charming juveniles +will be glad to learn of the issue of this volume for +young people.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Aunt 'Liza's Hero and Other Stories.</div> + +<p>A collection of six bright little stories, which will +appeal to all boys and most girls.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Big Brother.</div> + +<p>A story of two boys. The devotion and care of +Steven, himself a small boy, for his baby brother, is the +theme of the simple tale.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Ole Mammy's Torment.</div> + +<p>"Ole Mammy's Torment" has been fitly called "a +classic of Southern life." It relates the haps and mishaps +of a small negro lad, and tells how he was led by +love and kindness to a knowledge of the right.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Story of Dago.</div> + +<p>In this story Mrs. Johnston relates the story of Dago, +a pet monkey, owned jointly by two brothers. Dago +tells his own story, and the account of his haps and mishaps +is both interesting and amusing.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Quilt That Jack Built.</div> + +<p>A pleasant little story of a boy's labor of love, and +how it changed the course of his life many years after +it was accomplished.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Flip's Islands of Providence.</div> + +<p>A story of a boy's life battle, his early defeat, and his +final triumph, well worth the reading.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + + +<div class='adauthor'><i>By EDITH ROBINSON</i></div> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>A Little Puritan's First Christmas.</div> + +<p>A Story of Colonial times in Boston, telling how +Christmas was invented by Betty Sewall, a typical child +of the Puritans, aided by her brother Sam.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>A Little Daughter of Liberty.</div> + +<p>The author introduces this story as follows:</p> + +<p>"One ride is memorable in the early history of the +American Revolution, the well-known ride of Paul +Revere. Equally deserving of commendation is another +ride,—the ride of Anthony Severn,—which was no less +historic in its action or memorable in its consequences."</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>A Loyal Little Maid.</div> + +<p>A delightful and interesting story of Revolutionary +days, in which the child heroine, Betsey Schuyler, +renders important services to George Washington.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>A Little Puritan Rebel.</div> + +<p>This is an historical tale of a real girl, during the +time when the gallant Sir Harry Vane was governor of +Massachusetts.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>A Little Puritan Pioneer.</div> + +<p>The scene of this story is laid in the Puritan settlement +at Charlestown.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>A Little Puritan Bound Girl.</div> + +<p>A story of Boston in Puritan days, which is of great +interest to youthful readers.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>A Little Puritan Cavalier.</div> + +<p>The story of a "Little Puritan Cavalier" who tried +with all his boyish enthusiasm to emulate the spirit and +ideals of the dead Crusaders.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>A Puritan Knight Errant.</div> + +<p>The story tells of a young lad in Colonial times who +endeavored to carry out the high ideals of the knights +of olden days.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + + +<div class='adauthor'><i>By OUIDA</i> (<i>Louise de la Ramée</i>)</div> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>A Dog of Flanders: <span class="smcap">A Christmas Story</span>.</div> + +<p>Too well and favorably known to require description.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Nurnberg Stove.</div> + +<p>This beautiful story has never before been published +at a popular price.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<div class='adauthor'><i>By FRANCES MARGARET FOX</i></div> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Little Giant's Neighbours.</div> + +<p>A charming nature story of a "little giant" whose +neighbours were the creatures of the field and garden.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Farmer Brown and the Birds.</div> + +<p>A little story which teaches children that the birds +are man's best friends.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Betty of Old Mackinaw.</div> + +<p>A charming story of child-life, appealing especially to +the little readers who like stories of "real people."</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Brother Billy.</div> + +<p>The story of Betty's brother, and some further adventures +of Betty herself.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Mother Nature's Little Ones.</div> + +<p>Curious little sketches describing the early lifetime, +or "childhood," of the little creatures out-of-doors.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>How Christmas Came to the Mulvaneys.</div> + +<p>A bright, lifelike little story of a family of poor children, +with an unlimited capacity for fun and mischief. +The wonderful never-to-be forgotten Christmas that +came to them is the climax of a series of exciting incidents.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + + +<div class='adauthor'><i>By MISS MULOCK</i></div> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Little Lame Prince.</div> + +<p>A delightful story of a little boy who has many adventures +by means of the magic gifts of his fairy godmother.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Adventures of a Brownie.</div> + +<p>The story of a household elf who torments the cook +and gardener, but is a constant joy and delight to the +children who love and trust him.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>His Little Mother.</div> + +<p>Miss Mulock's short stories for children are a constant +source of delight to them, and "His Little Mother," in +this new and attractive dress, will be welcomed by hosts +of youthful readers.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Little Sunshine's Holiday.</div> + +<p>An attractive story of a summer outing. "Little Sunshine" +is another of those beautiful child-characters for +which Miss Mulock is so justly famous.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<div class='adtitle2'><i>By MARSHALL SAUNDERS</i></div> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>For His Country.</div> + +<p>A sweet and graceful story of a little boy who loved +his country; written with that charm which has endeared +Miss Saunders to hosts of readers.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Nita, the Story of an Irish Setter.</div> + +<p>In this touching little book, Miss Saunders shows how +dear to her heart are all of God's dumb creatures.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Alpatok, the Story of an Eskimo +Dog.</div> + +<p>Alpatok, an Eskimo dog from the far north, was stolen +from his master and left to starve in a strange city, but +was befriended and cared for, until he was able to return +to his owner.</p> +<hr class="chap" /> + + + +<div class='adauthor'>By WILL ALLEN DROMGOOLE</div> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Farrier's Dog and His Fellow.</div> + +<p>This story, written by the gifted young Southern +woman, will appeal to all that is best in the natures of +the many admirers of her graceful and piquant style.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Fortunes of the Fellow.</div> + +<p>Those who read and enjoyed the pathos and charm +of "The Farrier's Dog and His Fellow" will welcome +the further account of the adventures of Baydaw and +the Fellow at the home of the kindly smith.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Best of Friends.</div> + +<p>This continues the experiences of the Farrier's dog and +his Fellow, written in Miss Dromgoole's well-known +charming style.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Down in Dixie.</div> + +<p>A fascinating story for boys and girls, of a family of +Alabama children who move to Florida and grow up in +the South.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<div class='adauthor'>By MARIAN W. WILDMAN</div> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Loyalty Island.</div> + +<p>An account of the adventures of four children and +their pet dog on an island, and how they cleared their +brother from the suspicion of dishonesty.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Theodore and Theodora.</div> + +<p>This is a story of the exploits and mishaps of two mischievous +twins, and continues the adventures of the +interesting group of children in "Loyalty Island."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + + +<div class='adauthor'>By CHARLES G. D. ROBERTS</div> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Cruise of the Yacht Dido.</div> + +<p>The story of two boys who turned their yacht into a +fishing boat to earn money to pay for a college course, +and of their adventures while exploring in search of +hidden treasure.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Young Acadian.</div> + +<p>The story of a young lad of Acadia who rescued a +little English girl from the hands of savages.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Lord of the Air.</div> +<div><span style="margin-left: 2em;"><span class="smcap">The Story of the Eagle</span></span></div> + +<div class='adtitle2'>The King of the Mamozekel.</div> +<div><span style="margin-left: 2em;"><span class="smcap">The Story of the Moose</span></span></div> + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Watchers of the Camp-fire.</div> +<div><span style="margin-left: 2em;"><span class="smcap">The Story of the Panther</span></span></div> + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Haunter of the Pine Gloom.</div> +<div><span style="margin-left: 2em;"><span class="smcap">The Story of the Lynx</span></span></div> + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Return to the Trails.</div> +<div><span style="margin-left: 2em;"><span class="smcap">The Story of the Bear</span></span></div> + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Little People of the Sycamore.</div> +<div><span style="margin-left: 2em;"><span class="smcap">The Story of the Raccoon</span></span></div> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class='center'><i><span class='big'>By OTHER AUTHORS</span></i></div> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Great Scoop.</div> + +<div><i>By MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL</i></div> + +<p>A capital tale of newspaper life in a big city, and +of a bright, enterprising, likable youngster employed +thereon.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>John Whopper.</div> + +<p>The late Bishop Clark's popular story of the boy who +fell through the earth and came out in China, with a +new introduction by Bishop Potter.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Dole Twins.</div> + +<div><i>By KATE UPSON CLARK</i></div> + +<p>The adventures of two little people who tried to earn +money to buy crutches for a lame aunt. An excellent +description of child-life about 1812, which will greatly +interest and amuse the children of to-day, whose life is +widely different.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Larry Hudson's Ambition.</div> + +<div><i>By JAMES OTIS</i>, author of "Toby Tyler," etc.</div> + +<p>Larry Hudson is a typical American boy, whose hard +work and enterprise gain him his ambition,—an education +and a start in the world.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The Little Christmas Shoe.</div> + +<div><i>By JANE P. SCOTT WOODRUFF</i></div> + +<p>A touching story of Yule-tide.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>Wee Dorothy.</div> + +<div><i>By LAURA UPDEGRAFF</i></div> + +<p>A story of two orphan children, the tender devotion +of the eldest, a boy, for his sister being its theme and +setting. With a bit of sadness at the beginning, the +story is otherwise bright and sunny, and altogether +wholesome in every way.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>The King of the Golden River:</div> +<div><span class="smcap">A Legend of Stiria</span>. <i>By JOHN RUSKIN</i></div> + +<p>Written fifty years or more ago, and not originally +intended for publication, this little fairy-tale soon became +known and made a place for itself.</p> + + +<div class='adtitle2'>A Child's Garden of Verses.</div> + +<div><i>By R. L. STEVENSON</i></div> + +<p>Mr. Stevenson's little volume is too well known to +need description.</p> + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 258px;"> +<img src="images/i182-back.jpg" width="258" height="252" alt="back trademark emblem" /> +</div> +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class='tnote'><div class='center'><b>Transcriber's Notes:</b></div> + +<p>Obvious punctuation errors repaired. Text uses both kyak and kiak for our +more modern kayak. This was retained.</p> + +<p>Page 5, "alway" changed to "always" (always dear to a boy)</p> + +<p>Page 82, "Tahgeah" changed to "Tah-ge-ah" (Tah-ge-ah would take them)</p> + +<p>Page 83, "Kalakash" changed to "Kala-kash" (Kala-kash had not asked)</p> + +<p>Final page of book ads, "L. R." changed to "R. L." (By R. L. Stevenson)</p> +</div> + + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Our Little Alaskan Cousin, by Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OUR LITTLE ALASKAN COUSIN *** + +***** This file should be named 10224-h.htm or 10224-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/2/10224/ + +Produced by Emmy, Beth Baran, Juliet Sutherland, Mary +Meehan, and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images +generously made available by The Internet Archive) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/10224-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..871481a --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/emblem.png b/old/10224-h/images/emblem.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5109474 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/emblem.png diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/i008.jpg b/old/10224-h/images/i008.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..61ca632 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/i008.jpg diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/i077.jpg b/old/10224-h/images/i077.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b83b852 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/i077.jpg diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/i087.jpg b/old/10224-h/images/i087.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..265f883 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/i087.jpg diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/i123.jpg b/old/10224-h/images/i123.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..a754032 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/i123.jpg diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/i139.jpg b/old/10224-h/images/i139.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8824afe --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/i139.jpg diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/i163.jpg b/old/10224-h/images/i163.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b1de63d --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/i163.jpg diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/i182-back.jpg b/old/10224-h/images/i182-back.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dbed1de --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/i182-back.jpg diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/title_bottom.png b/old/10224-h/images/title_bottom.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9bd6e27 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/title_bottom.png diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/title_left.png b/old/10224-h/images/title_left.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1fb99c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/title_left.png diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/title_right.png b/old/10224-h/images/title_right.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..256b26c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/title_right.png diff --git a/old/10224-h/images/title_top.png b/old/10224-h/images/title_top.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cabc62b --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224-h/images/title_top.png diff --git a/old/10224.txt b/old/10224.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1a19865 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3508 @@ +Project Gutenberg's Our Little Alaskan Cousin, by Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Our Little Alaskan Cousin + +Author: Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +Release Date: August 1, 2013 [EBook #10224] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OUR LITTLE ALASKAN COUSIN *** + + + + +Produced by Emmy, Beth Baran, Juliet Sutherland, Mary +Meehan, and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images +generously made available by The Internet Archive) + + + + + + + +[Transcriber's Note: Bold text is surrounded by =equal signs= and italic +text is surrounded by _underscores_.] + + + +Our Little Alaskan Cousin + + + + +THE + +Little Cousin Series + +(TRADE MARK) + + Each volume illustrated with six or more full-page plates in + tint. Cloth, 12mo, with decorative cover, + per volume, 60 cents + + +LIST OF TITLES + +BY MARY HAZELTON WADE + +(unless otherwise indicated) + + + =Our Little African Cousin= + =Our Little Alaskan Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Arabian Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Armenian Cousin= + =Our Little Australian Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Brazilian Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Brown Cousin= + =Our Little Canadian Cousin= + By Elizabeth R. MacDonald + =Our Little Chinese Cousin= + By Isaac Taylor Headland + =Our Little Cuban Cousin= + =Our Little Dutch Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Egyptian Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little English Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Eskimo Cousin= + =Our Little French Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little German Cousin= + =Our Little Greek Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Hawaiian Cousin= + =Our Little Hindu Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Indian Cousin= + =Our Little Irish Cousin= + =Our Little Italian Cousin= + =Our Little Japanese Cousin= + =Our Little Jewish Cousin= + =Our Little Korean Cousin= + By H. Lee M. Pike + =Our Little Mexican Cousin= + By Edward C. Butler + =Our Little Norwegian Cousin= + =Our Little Panama Cousin= + By H. Lee M. Pike + =Our Little Philippine Cousin= + =Our Little Porto Rican Cousin= + =Our Little Russian Cousin= + =Our Little Scotch Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Siamese Cousin= + =Our Little Spanish Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Swedish Cousin= + By Claire M. Coburn + =Our Little Swiss Cousin= + =Our Little Turkish Cousin= + + L. C. PAGE & COMPANY + New England Building, Boston, Mass. + +[Illustration: "KALITAN FISHED DILIGENTLY BUT CAUGHT LITTLE." + +(_See page 3_)] + + + + + Our Little Alaskan + Cousin + + By + Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + + _Author of "Our Little Spanish Cousin," "With + a Pessimist in Spain," "God, the + King, My Brother," etc._ + + _Illustrated_ + + + [Illustration] + + Boston + L. C. Page & Company + _PUBLISHERS_ + + + + + _Copyright, 1907_ + BY L. C. PAGE & COMPANY + (INCORPORATED) + + _All rights reserved_ + + Third Impression, May, 1909 + + + + TO MY LITTLE SON + John Nixon de Roulet + + + + +Preface + + +AWAY up toward the frozen north lies the great peninsula, which the +United States bought from the Russians, and thus became responsible for +the native peoples from whom the Russians had taken the land. + +There are many kinds of people there, from Indians to Esquimos, and they +are under the American Government, yet they have no votes and are not +called American citizens. + +It is about this country and its people that this little story is +written, and in the hope of interesting American girls and boys in these +very strange people, their Little Alaskan Cousins. + + + + +Contents + + + CHAPTER PAGE + I. KALITAN TENAS 1 + II. AROUND THE CAMP-FIRE 12 + III. TO THE GLACIER 26 + IV. TED MEETS MR. BRUIN 38 + V. A MONSTER OF THE DEEP 48 + VI. THE ISLAND HOME OF KALITAN 60 + VII. TWILIGHT TALES AND TOTEMS 71 + VIII. THE BERRY DANCE 82 + IX. ON THE WAY TO NOME 93 + X. IN THE GOLD COUNTRY 108 + XI. AFTERNOON TEA IN AN EGLU 119 + XII. THE SPLENDOUR OF SAGHALIE TYEE 129 + + + + + +List of Illustrations + + + PAGE + "KALITAN FISHED DILIGENTLY BUT CAUGHT + LITTLE" (_See page 3_) _Frontispiece_ + "AWAY WENT ANOTHER STINGING LANCE" 57 + "A GROUP OF PEOPLE AWAITING THE CANOES" 64 + MOUNT SHISHALDIN 99 + "'LET'S WATCH THOSE TWO MEN. THEY HAVE + EVIDENTLY STAKED A CLAIM TOGETHER'" 113 + "TWO FUNNY LITTLE LAPP BABIES HE TOOK + TO RIDE ON A LARGE REINDEER" 134 + + + + +Our Little Alaskan Cousin + + + + +CHAPTER I + +KALITAN TENAS + + +IT was bitterly cold. Kalitan Tenas felt it more than he had in the long +winter, for then it was still and calm as night, and now the wind was +blowing straight in from the sea, and the river was frozen tight. + +A month before, the ice had begun to break and he had thought the cold +was over, and that the all too short Alaskan summer was at hand. Now it +was the first of May, and just as he had begun to think of summer +pleasures, lo! a storm had come which seemed to freeze the very marrow +of his bones. However, our little Alaskan cousin was used to cold and +trained to it, and would not dream of fussing over a little snow-storm. + +Kalitan started out to fish for his dinner, and though the snow came +down heavily and he had to break through the ice to make a fishing-hole, +and soon the ice was a wind-swept plain where even his own tracks were +covered with a white pall, he fished steadily on. He never dreamed of +stopping until he had fish enough for dinner, for, like most of his +tribe, he was persevering and industrious. + +Kalitan was a Thlinkit, though, if you asked him, he would say he was +"Klinkit." This is a tribe which has puzzled wise people for a long +time, for the Thlinkits are not Esquimos, not Indians, not coloured +people, nor whites. They are the tribes living in Southeastern Alaska +and along the coast. Many think that a long, long time ago, they came +from Japan or some far Eastern country, for they look something like +the Japanese, and their language has many words similar to Japanese in +it. + +Perhaps, long years ago, some shipwrecked Japanese were cast upon the +coast of Alaska, and, finding their boats destroyed and the land good to +live in, settled there, and thus began the Thlinkit tribes. + +The Chilcats, Haidahs, and Tsimsheans are all Thlinkits, and are by far +the best of the brown people of the Northland. They are honest, simple, +and kind, and more intelligent than the Indians living farther north, in +the colder regions. The Thlinkit coast is washed by the warm current +from the Japan Sea, and it is not much colder than Chicago or Boston, +though the winter is a little longer. + +Kalitan fished diligently but caught little. He was warmly clad in +sealskin; around his neck was a white bearskin ruff, as warm as toast, +and very pretty, too, as soft and fluffy as a lady's boa. On his feet +were moccasins of walrus hide. He had been perhaps an hour watching the +hole in the ice, and knelt there so still that he looked almost as +though he were frozen. Indeed, that was what those thought who saw him +there, for suddenly a dog-sledge came round the corner of the hill and a +loud halloo greeted his ears. + +"Boston men," he said to himself as he watched them, "lost the trail." + +They had indeed lost the trail, and Ted Strong had begun to think they +would never find it again. + +Chetwoof, their Indian guide, had not talked very much about it, but +lapsed into his favourite "No understan'," a remark he always made when +he did not want to answer what was said to him. + +Ted and his father were on their way from Sitka to the Copper River. Mr. +Strong was on the United States Geological Survey, which Ted knew meant +that he had to go all around the country and poke about all day among +rocks and mountains and glaciers. He had come with his father to this +far Alaskan clime in the happiest expectation of adventures with bears +and Indians, always dear to the heart of a boy. + +He was pretty tired of the sledge, having been in it since early +morning, and he was cold and hungry besides; so he was delighted when +the dogs stopped and his father said: + +"Hop out, son, and stretch your legs. We'll try to find out where we are +before we go any farther." + +Chetwoof meanwhile was interviewing the boy, who came quickly toward +them. + +"Who are you?" demanded Chetwoof. + +"Kalitan Tenas," was the brief reply. + +"Where are we?" was the next question. + +"Near to Pilchickamin River." + +"Where is a camp?" + +"There," said the boy, pointing toward a clump of pine-trees. "Ours." + +Ted by this time was tired of his own unwonted silence, and he came up +to Kalitan, holding out his hand. + +"My name is Ted Strong," he said, genially, grinning cheerfully at the +young Alaskan. "I say this is a jolly place. I wish you would teach me +to fish in a snow-hole. It must be great fun. I like you; let's be +friends!" Kalitan took the boy's hand in his own rough one. + +"Mahsie" (thank you), he said, a sudden quick smile sweeping his dark +face like a fleeting sunbeam, but disappearing as quickly, leaving it +grave again. "Olo?" (hungry). + +"Yes," said Mr. Strong, "hungry and cold." + +"Camp," said Kalitan, preparing to lead the way, with the hospitality of +his tribe, for the Thlinkits are always ready to share food and fire +with any stranger. The two boys strode off together, and Mr. Strong +could scarcely help smiling at the contrast between them. + +Ted was the taller, but slim even in the furs which almost smothered +him, leaving only his bright face exposed to the wind and weather. His +hair was a tangle of yellow curls which no parting could ever affect, +for it stood straight up from his forehead like a golden fleece; his +mother called it his aureole. His skin was fair as a girl's, and his +eyes as big and blue as a young Viking's; but the Indian boy's locks +were black as ink, his skin was swarthy, his eyes small and dark, and +his features that strange mixture of the Indian, the Esquimo, and the +Japanese which we often see in the best of our Alaskan cousins. + +Boys, however, are boys all the world over, and friendly animals, and +Ted was soon chattering away to his newly found friend as if he had +known him all his life. + +"What's your name?" he asked. + +"Kalitan," was the answer. "They call me Kalitan Tenas;[1] my father was +Tyee." + +"Where is he?" asked Ted. He wanted to see an Indian chief. + +"Dead," said Kalitan, briefly. + +"I'm sorry," said Ted. He adored his own father, and felt it was hard on +a boy not to have one. + +"He was killed," said Kalitan, "but we had blood-money from them," he +added, sternly. + +"What's that?" asked Ted, curiously. + +"Long time ago, when one man kill another, his clan must pay +with a life. One must be found from his tribe to cry, +'O-o-o-o-o-a-ha-a-ich-klu-kuk-ich-klu-kuk'" (ready to die, ready to +die). His voice wailed out the mournful chant, which was weird and +solemn and almost made Ted shiver. "But now," the boy went on, "Boston +men" (Americans) "do not like the blood-tax, so the murderer pays money +instead. We got many blankets and baskets and moneys for Kalitan Tyee. +He great chief." + +"Do you live here?" asked Ted. + +"No, live on island out there." Kalitan waved his hand seaward. "Come to +fish with my uncle, Klake Tyee. This good fishing-ground." + +"It's a pretty fine country," said Ted, glancing at the scene, which +bore charm to other than boyish eyes. To the east were the mountains +sheltering a valley through which the frozen river wound like a silver +ribbon, widening toward the sea. A cold green glacier filled the valley +between two mountains with its peaks of beauty. Toward the shore, which +swept in toward the river's mouth in a sheltered cove, were clumps of +trees, giant fir, aspen, and hemlock, green and beautiful, while seaward +swept the waves in white-capped loveliness. + +Kalitan ushered them to the camp with great politeness and considerable +pride. + +"You've a good place to camp," said Mr. Strong, "and we will gladly +share your fire until we are warm enough to go on." + +Ted's face fell. "Must we go right away?" he asked. "This is such a +jolly place." + +"No go to-day," said Kalitan, briefly, to Chetwoof. "_Colesnass._"[2] + +"Huh!" said Chetwoof. "Think some." + +"Here comes my uncle," said Kalitan, and he ran eagerly to meet an old +Indian who came toward the camp from the shore. He eagerly explained the +situation to the Tyee, who welcomed the strangers with grave politeness. +He was an old man, with a seamed, scarred face, but kindly eyes. Chief +of the Thlinkits, his tribe was scattered, his children dead, and +Kalitan about all left to him of interest in life. + +"There will be more snow," he said to Mr. Strong. "You are welcome. Stay +and share our fire and food." + +"Do let us stay, father," cried Ted, and his father smiled indulgently, +but Kalitan looked at him in astonishment. Alaskan boys are taught to +hold their tongues and let their elders decide matters, and Kalitan +would never have dreamed of teasing for anything. + +But Mr. Strong did not wish to face another snow-storm in the sledge, +and knew he could work but little till the storm was passed; so he +readily consented to stay a few days and let Ted see some real Alaskan +hunting and fishing. + +Both boys were delighted, and soon had the camp rearranged to +accommodate the strangers. The fire was built up, Ted and Kalitan +gathering cones and fir branches, which made a fragrant blaze, while +Chetwoof cared for the dogs, and the old chief helped Mr. Strong pitch +his tent in the lee of some fragrant firs. Soon all was prepared and +supper cooking over the coals,--a supper of fresh fish and seal fat, +which Alaskans consider a great delicacy, and to which Mr. Strong added +coffee and crackers from his stores,--and Indians and whites ate +together in friendliness and amity. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[1] Little Arrow. + +[2] Snow. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +AROUND THE CAMP-FIRE + + +"HOW does it happen that you speak English, Kalitan?" asked Mr. Strong +as they sat around the camp-fire that evening. The snow had continued +during the afternoon, and the boys had had an exciting time coasting and +snow-balling and enjoying themselves generally. + +"I went for a few months to the Mission School at Wrangel," said +Kalitan. "I learned much there. They teach the boys to read and write +and do sums and to work the ground besides. They learn much more than +the girls." + +"Huh!" said the old chief, grimly. "Girls learn too much. They no good +for Indian wives, and white men not marry them. Best for girls to stay +at home at the will of their fathers until they get husbands." + +"So you've been in Wrangel," said Ted to Kalitan. "We went there, too. +It's a dandy place. Do you remember the fringe of white mountains back +of the harbour? The people said the woods were full of game, but we +didn't have time to go hunting. There are a few shops there, but it +seemed to me a very small place to have been built since 1834. In the +States whole towns grow up in two or three weeks." + +"Huh!" said Kalitan, with a quick shrug of his shoulders, "quick grow, +sun fade and wind blow down." + +"I don't think the sun could ever fade in Wrangel," laughed Ted. "They +told me there it hadn't shone but fifteen days in three months. It +rained all the time." + +"Rain is nothing," said Kalitan. "It is when the Ice Spirit speaks in +the North Wind's roar and in the crackling of the floes that we +tremble. The glaciers are the children of the Mountain Spirit whom our +fathers worshipped. He is angry, and lo! he hurls down icebergs in his +wrath, he tosses them about, upon the streams he tosses the _kyaks_ like +feathers and washes the land with the waves of Sitth. When our people +are buried in the ground instead of being burnt with the fire, they must +go for ever to the place of Sitth, of everlasting cold, where never sun +abides, nor rain, nor warmth." + +Ted had listened spellbound to this poetic speech and gazed at Kalitan +in open-mouthed amazement. A boy who could talk like that was a new and +delightful playmate, and he said: + +"Tell me more about things, Kalitan," but the Indian was silent, ashamed +of having spoken. + +"What do you do all day when you are at home?" persisted the American. + +"In winter there is nothing to do but to hunt and fish," said Kalitan. +"Sometimes we do not find much game, then we think of how, when a +Thlinkit dies, he has plenty. If he has lived as a good tribesman, his +kyak glides smoothly over the silver waters into the sunset, until, o'er +gently flowing currents, it reaches the place of the mighty forest. A +bad warrior's canoe passes dark whirlpools and terrible rapids until he +reaches the place we speak not of, where reigns Sitth. + +"In the summer-time we still hunt and fish. Many have learned to till +the ground, and we gather berries and wood for the winter. The other +side of the inlet, the tree-trunks drift from the Yukon and are stranded +on the islands, so there is plenty for firewood. But upon our island the +women gather a vine and dry it. They collect seaweed for food in the +early spring, and dry it and press it into square cakes, which make good +food after they have hung long in the sun. They make baskets and sell +them to the white people. Often my uncle and I take them to Valdez, and +once we brought back fifty dollars for those my mother made. There is +always much to do." + +"Don't you get terribly cold hunting in the winter?" asked Ted. + +"Thlinkit boy not a baby," said Kalitan, a trifle scornfully. "We begin +to be hardened when we are babies. When I was five years old, I left my +father and went to my uncle to be taught. Every morning I bathed in the +ocean, even if I had to break ice to find water, and then I rolled in +the snow. After that my uncle brushed me with a switch bundle, and not +lightly, for his arm is strong. I must not cry out, no matter if he +hurt, for a chief's son must never show pain nor fear. That would give +his people shame." + +"Don't you get sick?" asked Ted, who felt cold all over at the idea of +being treated in such a heroic manner. + +"The _Kooshta_[3] comes sometimes," said Kalitan. "The Shaman[4] used to +cast him out, but now the white doctor can do it, unless the _kooshta_ +is too strong." + +Ted was puzzled as to Kalitan's exact meaning, but did not like to ask +too many questions for fear of being impolite, so he only said: + +"Being sick is not very nice, anyhow." + +"To be bewitched is the most terrible," said Kalitan, gravely. + +"How does that happen?" asked Ted, eagerly, but Kalitan shook his head. + +"It is not good to hear," he said. "The medicine-man must come with his +drum and rattle, and he is very terrible. If the white men will not +allow any more the punishing of the witches, they should send more of +the white medicine-men, if we are not to have any more of our own." + +"Boys should not talk about big things," said the old chief suddenly. He +had been sitting quietly over the fire, and spoke so suddenly that +Kalitan collapsed into silence. Ted, too, quieted down at the old +chief's stern voice and manner, and both boys sat and listened to the +men talking, while the snow still swirled about them. + +Tyee Klake told Mr. Strong many interesting things about the coast +country, and gave him valuable information as to the route he should +pursue in his search for interesting things in the mountains. + +"It will be two weeks before the snow will break so you can travel in +comfort," he said. "Camp with us. We remain here one week, then we go to +the island. We can take you there, you will see many things, and your +boy will hunt with Kalitan." + +"Where is your island?" asked Mr. Strong. + +Ted said nothing, but his eyes were fixed eagerly upon his father. It +was easy to see that he wished to accept the invitation. + +"Out there." Tyee Klake pointed toward where the white coast-line seemed +to fade into silvery blue. + +"There are many islands; on some lives no one, but we have a village. +Soon it will be nearly deserted, for many of our people rove during the +summer, and wander from one camping-ground to another, seeking the best +game or fish. But Kalitan's people remain always on the island. Him I +take with me to hunt the whale and seal, to gather the berries, and to +trap the little animals who bear fur. We find even seal upon our shores, +though fewer since your people have come among us." + +"Which were the best, Russians or Americans?" asked Mr. Strong, curious +to see what the old Indian would say, but the Tyee was not to be caught +napping. + +"Men all alike," he said. "Thlinkit, Russian, American, some good, some +bad. Russians used Indians more, gave them hunting and fishing, and only +took part of the skins. Americans like to hunt and fish all themselves +and leave nothing for the Indians. Russians teach _quass_, Americans +teach whiskey. Before white men came, Indians were healthy. They ate +fish, game, berries; now they must have other foods, and they are not +good for Indians here,"--he touched his stomach. "Indian used to dress +in skins and furs, now he must copy white man and shiver with cold. He +soon has the coughing sickness and then he goes into the unknown. + +"But the government of the Americans is best because it tries to do some +things for the Indian. It teaches our boys useful things in the +schools, and, if some of its people are bad, some Indians are bad, too. +Men all alike," he repeated with the calm stoicism of his race. + +"The government is far away," said Mr. Strong, "and should not be blamed +for the doings of all its servants. I should like to see this island +home of yours, and think we must accept your invitation; shall we, Ted?" +he smiled at the boy. + +"Yes, indeed; thank you, sir," said Ted, and he and Kalitan grinned at +each other happily. + +"We shall stay in camp until the blue jay comes," said the old chief, +smiling, "and then seek the village of my people." + +"What does the blue jay mean?" asked Ted, timidly, for he was very much +in awe of this grave old man. + +Kalitan said something in Thlinkit to his uncle, and the old chief, +looking kindly at the boy, replied with a nod: + +"I will tell you the story of the blue jay," he said. + +"My story is of the far, far north. Beside a salmon stream there dwelt +people rich in slaves. These caught and dried the salmon for the winter, +and nothing is better to eat than dried salmon dipped in seal oil. All +the fish were caught and stored away, when lo! the whiteness fell from +heaven and the snows were upon them. It was the time of snow and they +should not have complained, but the chief was evil and he cursed the +whiteness. No one should dare to speak evil of the Snow Spirit, which +comes from the Unknown! Deeper and deeper grew the snow. It flew like +feathers about the _eglu_,[5] and the slaves had many troubles in +putting in limbs for the fire. Then the snow came in flakes so large +they seemed like the wings of birds, and the house was covered, and they +could no longer keep their _kyaks_ on top of the snow. All were shut +tight in the house, and their fire and food ran low. They knew not how +many days they were shut in, for there was no way to tell the day from +night, only they knew they were sore hungry and that the Snow Spirit was +angry and terrible in his anger. + +"But each one spoke not; he only chose a place where he should lie down +and die when he could bear no more. + +"Only the chief spoke, and he once. 'Snow Spirit,' he said aloud, 'I +alone am evil. These are not so. Slay me and spare!' But the Snow Spirit +answered not, only the wind screamed around the _eglu_, and his screams +were terrible and sad. Then hope left the heart of the chief and he +prepared to die with all his people and all his slaves. + +"But on the day when their last bit of food was gone, lo! something +pecked at the top of the smoke-hole, and it sang 'Nuck-tee,' and it was +a blue jay. The chief heard and saw and wondered, and, looking 'neath +the smoke-hole, he saw a scarlet something upon the floor. Picking it +up, he found it was a bunch of Indian tomato berries, red and ripe, and +quickly hope sprang in his breast. + +"'Somewhere is summer,' he cried. 'Let us up and away.' + +"Then the slaves hastened to dig out the canoe, and they drew it with +mighty labour, for they were weak from fasting, over the snows to the +shore, and there they launched it without sail or paddle, with all the +people rejoicing. And after a time the wind carried them to a beach +where all was summer. Birds sang, flowers bloomed, and berries gleamed +scarlet in the sun, and there were salmon jumping in the blue water. +They ate and were satisfied, for it was summer on the earth and summer +in their hearts. + +"That is how the Thlinkits came to our island, and so we say when the +snow breaks, that now comes the blue jay." + +"Thank you for telling us such a dandy story," cried Ted, who had not +lost a word of this quaint tale, told so graphically over the camp-fire +of the old chief Klake. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[3] Kooshta, a spirit in animal's form which inhabits the body of sick +persons and must be cast out, according to Thlinkit belief. + +[4] Shaman, native medicine-man. + +[5] Hut. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +TO THE GLACIER + + +TED slept soundly all night, wrapped in the bearskins from the sledge, +in the little tent he shared with his father. When the morning broke, he +sprang to his feet and hurried out of doors, hopeful for the day's +pleasures. The snow had stopped, but the ground was covered with a thick +white pall, and the mountains were turned to rose colour in the morning +sun, which was rising in a blaze of glory. + +"Good morning, Kalitan," shouted Ted to his Indian friend, whom he spied +heaping wood upon the camp-fire. "Isn't it dandy? What can we do +to-day?" + +"Have breakfast," said Kalitan, briefly. "Then do what Tyee says." + +"Well, I hope he'll say something exciting," said Ted. + +"Think good day to hunt," said Kalitan, as he prepared things for the +morning meal. + +"Where did you get the fish?" asked Ted. + +"Broke ice-hole and fished when I got up," said the Thlinkit. + +"You don't mean you have been fishing already," exclaimed the lazy Ted, +and Kalitan smiled as he said: + +"White people like fish. Tyee said: 'Catch fish for Boston men's +breakfast,' and I go." + +"Do you always mind him like that?" asked Ted. He generally obeyed his +father, but there were times when he wasn't anxious to and argued a +little about it. Kalitan looked at him in astonishment. + +"He chief!" he said, simply. + +"What will we do with the camp if we all go hunting?" asked Ted. + +"Nothing," said Kalitan. + +"Leave Chetwoof to watch, I suppose," continued Ted. + +"Watch? Why?" asked Kalitan. + +"Why, everything; some one will steal our things," said Ted. + +"Thlinkits not steal," said Kalitan, with dignity. "Maybe white man come +along and steal from his brothers; Indians not. If we go away to long +hunt, we _cache_ blankets and no one would touch." + +"What do you mean by _cache_?" asked Ted. + +"We build a mound hut near the house, and put there the blankets and +stores. Sometime they stay there for years, but no one would take from a +_cache_. If one has plenty of wood by the seashore or in the forest, he +may cord it and go his way and no one will touch it. A deer hangs on a +tree where dogs may not reach it, but no stray hunter would slice even a +piece. We are not thieves." + +"It is a pity you could not send missionaries to the States, you +Thlinkits, my boy," said Mr. Strong, who had come up in time to hear +Kalitan's words. "I'm afraid white people are less honest." + +"Teddy, do you know we are to have some hunting to-day, and that you'll +get your first experience with a glacier." + +"Hurrah," shouted Ted, dancing up and down in excitement. + +"Tyee Klake says we can hunt toward the base of the glacier, and I shall +try to go a little ways upon it and see how the land lies, or, rather, +the ice. It is getting warmer, and, if it continues a few days, the snow +will melt enough to let us go over to that island you are so anxious to +see." + +Ted's eyes shone, and the amount of breakfast he put away quite prepared +him for his day's work, which, pleasant though it might be, certainly +was hard work. The chief said they must seek the glacier first before +the sun got hot, for it was blinding on the snow. So they set out soon +after breakfast, leaving Chetwoof in charge of the camp, and with orders +to catch enough fish for dinner. + +"We'll be ready to eat them, heads and tails," said Ted, and his father +added, laughingly: + +"'Bible, bones, and hymn-book, too.'" + +"What does that mean?" asked Ted, as Kalitan looked up inquiringly. + +"Once a writer named Macaulay said he could make a rhyme for any word in +the English language, and a man replied, 'You can't rhyme Timbuctoo.' +But he answered without a pause: + + "If I were a Cassowary + On the plains of Timbuctoo, + I'd eat up a missionary, + Bible, bones, and hymn-book, too." + +Ted laughed, but Kalitan said, grimly: + +"Not good to eat Boston missionary, he all skin and bone!" + +"Where did they get the name Alaska?" asked Ted, as they tramped over +the snow toward the glacier. + +"Al-ay-ck-sa--great country," said Kalitan. + +"It certainly is," said Ted. "It's fine! I never saw anything like this +at home," pointing as he spoke to the scene in front of him. + +A group of evergreen trees, firs and the Alaska spruce, so useful for +fires and torches, fringed the edge of the ice-field, green and verdant +in contrast to the gleaming snows of the mountain, which rose in a +gentle slope at first, then precipitously, in a dazzling and enchanting +combination of colour. It was as if some marble palace of old rose +before them against the heavens, for the ice was cut and serrated into +spires and gables, turrets and towers, all seeming to be ornamented with +fretwork where the sun's rays struck the peaks and turned them into +silver and gold. Lower down the ice looked like animals, so twisted was +it into fantastic shapes; fierce sea monsters with yawning mouths +seeming ready to devour; bears and wolves, whales, gigantic elephants, +and snowy tigers, tropic beasts looking strangely out of place in this +arctic clime. + +Deep crevices cut the ice-fields, and in their green-blue depths lurked +death, for the least misstep would dash the traveller into an abyss +which had no bottom. Beyond the glacier itself, the snow-capped +mountains rose grand and serene, their glittering peaks clear against +the blue sky, which hue the glacier reflected and played with in a +thousand glinting shades, from purpling amethyst to lapis lazuli and +turquoise. + +As they gazed spellbound, a strange thing occurred, a thing of such +wonder and beauty that Ted could but grasp his father's arm in silence. + +Suddenly the peaks seemed to melt away, the white ice-pinnacles became +real turrets, houses and cathedrals appeared, and before them arose a +wonderful city of white marble, dream-like and shadowy, but beautiful as +Aladdin's palace in the "Arabian Nights." At last Ted could keep silent +no longer. + +"What is it?" he cried, and the old chief answered, gravely: + +"The City of the Dead," but his father said: + +"A mirage, my boy. They are often seen in these regions, but you are +fortunate in seeing one of the finest I have ever witnessed." + +"What is a mirage?" demanded Ted. + +"An optical delusion," said his father, "and one I am sure I couldn't +explain so that you would understand it. The queer thing about a mirage +is that you usually see the very thing most unlikely to be found in that +particular locality. In the Sahara, men see flowers and trees and +fountains, and here on this glacier we see a splendid city." + +"It certainly is queer. What makes glaciers, daddy?" Ted was even more +interested than usual in his father's talk because of Kalitan, whose +dark eyes never left Mr. Strong's face, and who seemed to drink in every +word of information as eagerly as a thirsty bird drinks water. + +"The dictionaries tell you that glaciers are fields of ice, or snow and +ice, formed in the regions of perpetual snow, and moving slowly down the +mountain slopes or valleys. Many people say the glaciers are the fathers +of the icebergs which float at sea, and that these are broken off the +glacial stream, but others deny this. When the glacial ice and snow +reaches a point where the air is so warm that the ice melts as fast as +it is pushed down from above, the glacier ends and a river begins. These +are the finest glaciers in the world, except, perhaps, those of the +Himalayas. + +"This bids fair to be a wonderfully interesting place for my work, Ted, +and I'm glad you're likely to be satisfied with your new friends, for I +shall have to go to many places and do a lot of things less interesting +than the things Kalitan can show you. + +"See these blocks of fine marble and those superb masses of porphyry and +chalcedony,--but there's something which will interest you more. Take my +gun and see if you can't bring down a bird for supper." + +Wild ducks were flying low across the edge of the glacier and quite near +to the boys, and Ted grasped his father's gun in wild excitement. He was +never allowed to touch a gun at home. Dearly as he loved his mother, it +had always seemed very strange to him that she should show such poor +taste about firearms, and refuse to let him have any; and now that he +had a gun really in his hands, he could hardly hold it, he was so +excited. Of course it was not the first time, for his father had allowed +him to practise shooting at a mark ever since they had reached Alaska, +but this was the first time he had tried to shoot a living target. He +selected his duck, aimed quickly, and fired. Bang! Off went the gun, +and, wonder of wonders! two ducks fell instead of one. + +"Well done, Ted, that duck was twins," cried his father, laughing, +almost as excited as the boy himself, and they ran to pick up the birds. +Kalitan smiled, too, and quietly picked up one, saying: + +"This one Kalitan's," showing, as he spoke, his arrow through the bird's +side, for he had discharged an arrow as Ted fired his gun. + +"Too bad, Ted. I thought you were a mighty hunter, a Nimrod who killed +two birds with one stone," said Mr. Strong, but Ted laughed and said: + +"So I got the one I shot at, I don't care." + +They had wild duck at supper that night, for Chetwoof plucked the birds +and roasted them on a hot stone over the spruce logs, and Ted, tired and +wet and hungry, thought he had never tasted such a delicious meal in his +life. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +TED MEETS MR. BRUIN + + +IT seemed to Ted as if he had scarcely touched the pillow on the nights +which followed before it was daylight, and he would awake to find the +sun streaming in at his tent flap. He always meant to go fishing with +Kalitan before breakfast, so the moment he woke up he jumped out of bed, +if his pile of fragrant pine boughs covered with skins could be called a +bed, and hurried through his toilet. Quick as he tried to be, however, +he was never ready before Kalitan, for, when Ted appeared, the Indian +boy had always had his roll in the snow and was preparing his lines. + +Kalitan was perfectly fascinated with the American boy. He thought him +the most wonderful specimen of a boy that he had ever seen. He knew so +much that Kalitan did not, and talked so brightly that being with Ted +was to the Indian like having a book without the bother of reading. +There were some things about him that Kalitan could not understand, to +be sure. Ted talked to his father just as if he were another boy. He +even spoke to Tyee Klake on occasions when that august personage had not +only not asked him a question, but was not speaking at all. From the +Thlinkit point of view, this was a most remarkable performance on Ted's +part, but Kalitan thought it must be all right for a "Boston boy," for +even the stern old chief seemed to regard happy-go-lucky Ted with +approval. + +Ted, on the other hand, thought Kalitan the most remarkable boy he had +ever met in all his life. He had not been much with boys. His "Lady +Mother," as he always called the gentle, brown-eyed being who ruled his +father and himself, had not cared to have her little Galahad mingle +with the rougher city boys who thronged the streets, and had kept him +with herself a great deal. Ted had loved books, and he and his little +sister Judith had lived in a pleasant atmosphere of refinement, playing +happily together until the boy had grown almost to dread anything common +or low. His mother knew he had moral courage, and would face any issue +pluckily, but his father feared he would grow up a milksop, and thought +he needed hardening. + +Mrs. Strong objected to the hardening process if it consisted in turning +her boy loose to learn the ways of the city streets, but had consented +to his going with his father, urged thereto by fears for his health, +which was not of the best, and the knowledge that he had reached the +"bear and Indian" age, and it was certainly a good thing for him to have +his experiences first-hand. + +To Ted the whole thing was perfectly delightful. When he lay down at +night, he would often like to see "Mother and Ju," but he was generally +so tired that he was asleep before he had time to think enough to be +really homesick. During the day there was too much doing to have any +thinking time, and, since he had met this boy friend, he thought of +little else but him and what they were to do next. The Tyee had assured +Mr. Strong that it was perfectly safe for the boys to go about together. + +"Kalitan knows all the trails," he said. "He take care of white brother. +Anything come, call Chetwoof." + +As Mr. Strong was very anxious to penetrate the glacier under Klake's +guidance, and wanted Ted to enjoy himself to the full, he left the boys +to themselves, the only stipulation being that they should not go on the +water without Chetwoof. + +There seemed to be always something new to do. As the days grew warmer, +the ice broke in the river, and the boys tramped all over the country. +Ted learned to use the bow and arrow, and brought down many a bird for +supper, and proud he was when he served up for his father a wild duck, +shot, plucked, and cooked all by himself. + +They fished in the stream by day and set lines by night. They trapped +rabbits and hares in the woods, and one day even got a silver fox, a +skin greatly prized by the fur traders on account of its rarity. Kalitan +insisted that Ted should have it, though he could have gotten forty +dollars for it from a white trader, and Ted was rejoiced at the idea of +taking it home to make a set of furs for Judith. + +One day Ted had a strange experience, and not a very pleasant one, which +might have been very serious had it not been for Kalitan. He had noticed +a queer-looking plant on the river-bank the day before, and had stopped +to pick it up, when he received such a sudden and unexpected pricking +as to cause him to jump back and shout for Kalitan. His hand felt as if +it had been pierced by a thousand needles, and he flew to a snow-bank to +rub it with snow. + +"I must have gotten hold of some kind of a cactus," he said to Kalitan, +who only replied: + +"Huh! picked hedgehog," as he pointed to where Ted's cactus was ambling +indignantly away with every quill rattling and set straight out in anger +at having his morning nap disturbed. Kalitan wrapped Ted's hand in soft +mud, which took the pain out, but he couldn't use it much for the next +few days, and did not feel eager to hunt when his father and the Tyee +started out in the morning. Kalitan remained with him, although his eyes +looked wistful, for he had heard the chief talk about bear tracks having +been seen the day before. Bears were quite a rarity, but sometimes an +old cinnamon or even a big black bruin would venture down in search of +fresh fish, which he would catch cleverly with his great paws. + +Kalitan and Ted fished awhile, and then Ted wandered away a little, +wondering what lay around a point of rock which he had never yet +explored. Something lay there which he had by no means expected to see, +and he scarcely knew what to make of it. On the river-bank, close to the +edge of the stream, was a black figure, an Indian fishing, as he +supposed, and he paused to watch. The fisherman was covered with fur +from head to foot, and, as Ted watched him, he seemed to have no line or +rod. Going nearer, the boy grew even more puzzled, and, though the man's +back was toward him, he could easily see that there was something +unusual about the figure. Just as he was within hailing distance and +about to shout, the figure made a quick dive toward the water and sprang +back again with a fish between his paws, and Ted saw that it was a huge +bear. He gave a sharp cry and then stood stock-still. The creature +looked around and stood gnawing his fish and staring at Ted as stupidly +as the boy stared at him. Then Ted heard a halloo behind him and +Kalitan's voice: + +"Run for Chetwoof, quick!" + +Ted obeyed as the animal started to move off. He ran toward the camp, +hearing the report of Kalitan's gun as he ran. Chetwoof, hearing the +noise, hurried out, and it was but a few moments before he was at +Kalitan's side. To Ted it seemed like a day before he could get back and +see what was happening, but he arrived on the scene in time to see +Chetwoof despatch the animal. + +"Hurrah!" cried Ted. "You've killed a bear," but Chetwoof only grunted +crossly. + +"Very bad luck!" he said, and Kalitan explained: + +"Indians don't like to kill bears or ravens. Spirits in them, maybe +ancestors." + +Ted looked at him in great astonishment, but Kalitan explained: + +"Once, long ago, a Thlinkit girl laughed at a bear track in the snow and +said: 'Ugly animal must have made that track!' But a bear heard and was +angry. He seized the maiden and bore her to his den, and turned her into +a bear, and she dwelt with him, until one day her brother killed the +bear and she was freed. And from that day Thlinkits speak respectfully +of bears, and do not try to kill them, for they know not whether it is a +bear or a friend who hides within the shaggy skin." + +The Tyee and Mr. Strong were greatly surprised when they came home to +see the huge carcass of Mr. Bruin, and they listened to the account of +Kalitan's bravery. The old chief said little, but he looked approvingly +at Kalitan, and said "Hyas kloshe" (very good), which unwonted praise +made the boy's face glow with pleasure. They had a great discussion as +to whom the bear really belonged. Ted had found him, Kalitan had shot +him first, and Chetwoof had killed him, so they decided to go shares. +Ted wanted the skin to take home, and thought it would make a splendid +rug for his mother's library, so his father paid Kalitan and Chetwoof +what each would have received as their share had the skin been sold to a +trader, and they all had bear meat for supper. Ted thought it finer than +any beefsteak he had ever eaten, and over it Kalitan smacked his lips +audibly. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +A MONSTER OF THE DEEP + + +THE big bear occupied considerable attention for several days. He had to +be carefully skinned and part of the meat dried for future use. Alaskans +never use salt for preserving meat. Indeed they seem to dislike salt +very much. It had taken Ted some time to learn to eat all his meat and +fish quite fresh, without a taste of salt, but he had grown to like it. +There is something in the sun and wind of Alaska which cures meat +perfectly, and the bear's meat was strung on sticks and dried in the sun +so that they might enjoy it for a long time. + +It seemed as if the adventure with Bruin was enough to last the boys for +several days, for Ted's hand still pained him from the porcupine's +quills, and he felt tired and lazy. He lay by the camp-fire one +afternoon listening to Kalitan's tales of his island home, when his +father came in from a long tramp, and, looking at him a little +anxiously, asked: + +"What's the matter, son?" + +"Nothing, I'm only tired," said Ted, but Kalitan said: + +"Porcupine quills poison hand. Well in a few days." + +"So your live cactus is getting in his work, is he? I'm glad it wasn't +the bear you mistook for an Alaskan posy and tried to pick. I'm tired +myself," and Mr. Strong threw himself down to rest. + +"Daddy, how did we come to have Alaska, anyway?" + +"Well, that's a long story," said his father, "but an interesting one." + +"Do tell us about it," urged Ted. "I know we bought it, but what did we +pay the Indians for it? I shouldn't have thought they'd have sold such a +fine country." + +Kalitan looked up quickly, and there was a sudden gleam in his dark eyes +that Ted had never seen before. + +"Thlinkits never sell," he said. "Russians steal." + +Mr. Strong put his hand kindly on the boy's head. + +"You're right, Kalitan," he said. "The Russians never conquered the +Thlinkits, the bravest tribe in all Alaska. + +"You see, Teddy, it was this way. A great many years ago, about 1740, a +Danish sailor named Bering, who was in the service of the Russians, +sailed across the ocean and discovered the strait named for him, and a +number of islands. Some of these were not inhabited, others had Indians +or Esquimos on them, but, after the manner of the early discoverers, +Bering took possession of them all in the name of the Emperor of +Russia. It doesn't seem right as we look at things now, but in those +days 'might made right,' and it was just the same way the English did +when they came to America. + +"The Russians settled here, finding the fishing and furs fine things for +trade, and driving the Indians, who would not yield to them, farther and +farther inland. In 1790 the Czar made Alexander Baranoff manager of the +trading company. Baranoff established trading-posts in various places, +and settled at Sitka, where you can see the ruins of the splendid castle +he built. The Russians also sent missionaries to convert the Indians to +the Greek Church, which is the church of Russia. The Indians, however, +never learned to care for the Russians, and often were cruelly treated +by them. The Russians, however, tried to do something for their +education, and established several schools. One as early as 1775, on +Kadiak Island, had thirty pupils, who studied arithmetic, reading, +navigation, and four of the mechanical trades, and this is a better +record than the American purchasers can show, I am sorry to say. + +"One of the recent travellers[6] in Alaska says that he met in the +country 'American citizens who never in their lives heard a prayer for +the President of the United States, nor of the Fourth of July, nor the +name of the capital of the nation, but who have been taught to pray for +the Emperor of Russia, to celebrate his birthday, and to commemorate the +victories of ancient Greece.' In March, 1867, the Russians sold Alaska +to the United States for $7,200,000 in gold. It was bought for a song +almost, when we consider the immense amount of money made for the +government by the seal fisheries, the cod and salmon industries, and +the opening of the gold fields. The resources of the country are not +half-known, and the government is beginning to see this. That is one of +the reasons they have sent me here, with the other men, to find out what +the earth holds for those who do not know how to look for its treasures. +Gold is not the best thing the earth produces. There is land in Alaska +little known full of coal and other useful minerals. Other land is +covered with magnificent timber which could be shipped to all parts of +the world. There are pasture-lands where stock will fatten like pigs +without any other feeding; there are fertile soils which will raise +almost any crops, and there are intelligent Indians who can be taught to +work and be useful members of society. I do not mean dragged off to the +United States to learn things they could never use in their home lives, +but who should be educated here to make the best of their talents in +their home surroundings. + +"That is one crying shame to our government, that they have neglected +the Alaskan citizens. Forty years have been wasted, but we are beginning +to wake up now, and twenty years more will see the Indians of Kalitan's +generation industrious men and women, not only clever hunters and +fishermen, but lumbermen, coopers, furniture makers, farmers, miners, +and stock-raisers." + +At this moment their quiet conversation was interrupted by a wild shout +from the shore, and, springing to their feet, they saw Chetwoof +gesticulating wildly and shouting to the Tyee, who had been mending his +canoe by the river-bank. Kalitan dropped everything and ran without a +word, scudding like the arrow from which he took his name. Before Ted +could follow or ask what was the matter, from the ocean a huge body rose +ten feet out of the water, spouting jets of spray twenty feet into the +air, the sun striking his sides and turning them to glistening silver. +Then it fell back, the waters churning into frothy foam for a mile +around. + +"It's a whale, Ted, sure as you live. Luck certainly is coming your +way," said his father; but, at the word "whale," Ted had started after +Kalitan, losing no time in getting to the scene of action as fast as +possible. + +"Watch the Tyee!" called Kalitan over his shoulder, as both boys ran +down to the water's edge. + +The old chief was launching his _kiak_ into the seething waters, and to +Ted it seemed incredible that he meant to go in that frail bark in +pursuit of the mighty monster. The old man's face, however, was as calm +as though starting on a pleasure-trip in peaceful waters, and Ted +watched in breathless admiration to see what would happen next. + +Klake paddled swiftly out to sea, drawing as near as he dared to where +the huge monster splashed idly up and down like a great puppy at play. +He stopped the _kiak_ and watched; then poised his spear and threw it, +and so swift and graceful was his gesture that Ted exclaimed in +amazement. + +"Tyee Klake best harpoon-thrower of all the Thlinkits," said Kalitan, +proudly. "Watch!" + +Ted needed no such instructions. His keen eyes passed from fish to man +and back again, and no movement of the Tyee escaped him. + +The instant the harpoon was thrown, the Tyee paddled furiously away, for +when a harpoon strikes a whale, he is likely to lash violently with his +tail, and may destroy his enemy, and this is a moment of terrible danger +to the harpooner. But the whale was too much astonished to fight, and, +with a terrific splash, he dived deep, deep into the water, to get rid +of that stinging thing in his side, in the cold green waters below. + +[Illustration: "AWAY WENT ANOTHER STINGING LANCE."] + +The Tyee waited, his grim face tense and earnest. It might have been +fifteen minutes, for whales often stay under water for twenty minutes +before coming to the surface to breathe, but to Kalitan and Ted it +seemed an hour. + +Then the spray dashed high into the air again, and the instant the huge +body appeared, Klake drew near, and away went another stinging lance +again, swift and, oh! so sure of aim. This time the whale struck out +wildly, and Kalitan held his breath, while Ted gasped at the Tyee's +danger, for his _kiak_ rocked like a shell and then was quite hidden +from their sight by the spray which was dashed heavenward like clouds of +white smoke. + +Once more the creature dived, and this time he stayed down only a few +minutes, and, when he came up, blood spouted into the air and dyed the +sea crimson, and Kalitan exclaimed: + +"Pierced his lungs! Now he must die." + +There was one more bright, glancing weapon flying through the air, and +Ted noticed attached to it by a thong a curious-looking bulb, and asked +Kalitan: + +"What is on that lance?" + +"Sealskin buoy," said Kalitan. "We make the bag and blow it up, tie it +to the harpoon, and when the lance sticks into the whale, the buoy makes +it very hard for him to dive. After awhile he dies and drifts ashore." + +The waters about the whale were growing red, and the carcass seemed +drifting out to sea, and at last the Tyee seemed satisfied. He sent a +last look toward the huge body, then turned his _kiak_ toward the +watchers on the banks. + +"If it only comes to shore," said Kalitan. + +"What will you do with it?" asked Ted. + +"Oh, there are lots of things we can do with a whale," said Kalitan. +"The blubber is the best thing to eat in all the world. Then we use the +oil in a bowl with a bit of pith in it to light our huts. The bones are +all useful in building our houses. Whales were once bears, but they +played too much on the shore and ran away to sea, so they wore off all +their fur on the rocks, and had their feet nibbled off by the fishes." + +"Well, this one didn't have his tail nibbled off at any rate," laughed +Ted. "I saw it flap at the Tyee, and thought that was the last of him, +sure." + +"Tyee much big chief," said Kalitan, and just then the old man's _kiak_ +drew near them, and he stepped ashore as calmly as though he had not +just been through so exciting a scene with a mighty monster of the +deep. + +FOOTNOTE: + +[6] Dr. Sheldon Jackson, General Agent of Education in the Territory. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE ISLAND HOME OF KALITAN + + +SWIFT and even were the strokes of the paddles as the canoes sped over +the water toward Kalitan's island home. Ted was so excited that he could +hardly sit still, and Tyee Klake gave him a warning glance and a +muttered "Kooletchika."[7] + +The day before a big canoe had come to the camp, the paddlers bearing +messages for the Tyee, and he had had a long conversation with Mr. +Strong. The result was astonishing to Teddy, for his father told him +that he was to go for a month to the island with Kalitan. This delighted +him greatly, but he was a little frightened when he found that his +father was to stay behind. + +"It's just this way, son," Mr. Strong explained to him. "I'm here in +government employ, taking government pay to do government work. I must +do it and do it well in the shortest time possible. You will have a far +better time on the island with Kalitan than you could possibly have +loafing around the camp here. You couldn't go to many places where I am +going, and, if my mind is easy about you, I can take Chetwoof and do my +work in half the time. I'll come to the island in three or four weeks, +and we'll take a week's vacation together, and then we'll hit the trail +for the gold-fields. Are you satisfied with this arrangement?" + +"Yes, sir." Ted's tone was dubious, but his face soon cleared up. "A +month won't be very long, father." + +"No, I'll wager you'll be sorry to leave when I come for you. Try and +not make any trouble. Of course Indian ways are not ours, but you'll get +used to it all and enjoy it. It's a chance most boys would be crazy +over, and you'll have tales to tell when you get home to make your +playmates envy you. I'm glad I have a son I can trust to keep straight +when he is out of my sight," and he laid his hand affectionately on the +boy's shoulder. Ted looked his father squarely in the eye, but gave only +a little nod in answer, then he laughed his clear, ringing laugh. + +"Wouldn't mother have spasms!" he exclaimed. Mr. Strong laughed too, but +said: + +"You'll be just as well off tumbling around with Kalitan as falling off +a glacier or two, as you would be certain to do if you were with me." + +Teddy felt a little blue when he said good-bye to his father, but +Kalitan quickly dispelled his gloom by a great piece of news. + +"Great time on island," he said, as the canoe glided toward the dim +outline of land to which Ted's thoughts had so often turned. "Tyee's +whale came ashore. We go to see him cut up." + +"Hurrah!" cried Ted, delighted. "To think I shall see all that! What +else will we do, Kalitan?" + +"Hunt, fish, hear old Kala-kash stories. See berry dance if you stay +long enough, perhaps a potlatch; do many things," said the Indian. + +One of the Indian paddlers said something to Kalitan, and he laughed a +little, and Ted asked, curiously: "What did he say?" + +"Said Kalitan Tenas learned to talk as much as a Boston boy," said +Kalitan, laughing heartily, and Ted laughed, too. + +The canoes were nearing the shore of a wooded island, and Ted saw a +fringe of trees and some native houses clustered picturesquely against +them at the crest of a small hill which sloped down to the water's +edge, where stood a group of people awaiting the canoes. + +[Illustration: "A GROUP OF PEOPLE AWAITING THE CANOES."] + +"My home," said Kalitan, pointing to the largest house, "my people." +There was a great deal of pride in his tone and look, and he received a +warm welcome as the canoes touched land and their occupants sprang on +shore. The boys crowded around the young Indian and chattered and +gesticulated toward Ted, while a bright-looking little Malamute sprang +upon Kalitan and nearly knocked him down, covering his face with eager +puppy kisses. + +The girls were less boisterous, and regarded Teddy with shy curiosity. +Some of them were quite pretty, and the babies were as cunning as the +puppies. They barked every time the dogs did, in a funny, hoarse little +way, and, indeed, Alaskan babies learn to bark long before they learn to +talk. + +The Tyee's wife received Teddy kindly, and he soon found himself +quite at home among these hospitable people, who seemed always friendly +and natural. Nearly all spoke some English, and he rapidly added to his +store of Chinook, so that he had no trouble in making himself understood +or in understanding. Of course he missed his father, but he had little +time to be lonely. Life in the village was anything but uneventful. + +At first there was the whale to be attended to, and all the village +turned out for that. The huge creature had drifted ashore on the farther +side of the island, and Ted was much interested in seeing him gradually +disposed of. Great masses of blubber were stripped from the sides to be +used later both for food and fuel, the whalebone was carefully secured +to be sold to the traders, and it seemed to Ted that there was not one +thing in that vast carcass for which the Indians did not have some use. + +Ted soon tired of watching the many things done with the whale, but +there was plenty to do and see in the village. + +The village houses were all alike. There was one large room in which the +people cooked, ate, and slept. The girls had blankets strung across one +corner, behind which were their beds. Teddy was given one also for his +corner of the great room in the Tyee's house. + +He learned to eat the food and to like it very much. There was dried +fish, herons' eggs, berries, or those put up in seal oil, which is +obtained by frying the fat out of the blubber of the seal. The Alaskans +use this oil in nearly all their cooking, and are very fond of it. Ted +ate also dried seaweed, chopped and boiled in seal oil, which tasted +very much like boiled and salted leather, but he liked it very well. +Indeed he grew so strong and well, out-of-doors all day in the clear air +and bright sunshine of the Alaskan June, that he could eat anything and +tramp all day without being too tired to sleep like a top all night, +and wake ready for a new day with a zest he never felt at home. + +Fresh fish were plentiful. The boys caught salmon, smelts, and +whitefish, and many were dried for the coming winter, while clams, +gum-boots, sea-cucumbers, and devil-fish, found on the rocks of the +shore, were every-day diet. + +Kalitan's sister and Ted became great friends. She was older than +Kalitan, and, though only fifteen, was soon to be married to Tah-ge-ah, +a fine young Indian who was ready to pay high for her, which was not +strange, for she was both pretty and sweet. + +"At the next full moon," said Kalitan, "there will be a potlatch, and +Tanana will be sold to Tah-ge-ah. He says he will give four hundred +blankets for her, and my uncle is well pleased. Many only pay ten +blankets for a wife, but of course we would not sell my sister for that. +She is of high caste, chief's daughter, niece, and sister," the boy +spoke proudly, and Ted answered: + +"She's so pretty, too. She's not like the Indian girls I saw at Wrangel +and Juneau. Why, there the women sat around as dirty as dogs on the +sidewalk, and didn't seem to care how they looked. They had baskets to +sell, and were too lazy to care whether any one bought them or not. They +weren't a bit like Tanana. She's as pretty as a Japanese." + +Kalitan smiled, well pleased, and Ted added, "I guess the Thlinkits must +be the best Indians in Alaska." + +Kalitan laughed outright at this. + +"Thlinkits pretty good," he said. "Tanana good girl. She learned much +good at the mission school, marry Tah-ge-ah, and make people better. She +can weave blankets, make fine baskets, and keep house like a white +girl." + +"She's all right," said Ted. "But, Kalitan, what is a potlatch?" + +"Potlatch is a good-will feast," said his friend. "Very fine thing, but +white men do not like. Say Indian feasts are all bad. Why is it bad when +an Indian gives away all his goods for others? That is what a great +potlatch is. When white men give us whiskey and it is drunk too much, +then it is very bad. But Tyee will not have that for Tanana's feast. We +will drink only quass,[8] as my people made it before they learned evil +drinks and fire-water, which make them crazy." + +"I guess Tyee Klake was right when he said all men were alike," said +Ted, sagely. "It seems to me that there are good and bad ones in all +countries. It's a pity you have had such bad white ones here in Alaska, +but I guess you have had good ones, too." + +"Plenty good, plenty bad, Thlinkit men and Boston men," said Kalitan, +"all same." + +FOOTNOTES: + +[7] "Dangerous channel." + +[8] Quass is a native drink, harmless and acid, made with rye and water +fermented. The bad Indians mix it with sugar, flour, dried apples, and +hops, and make a terribly intoxicating drink. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +TWILIGHT TALES AND TOTEMS + + +"ONCE a small girl child went by night to bring water. In the skies +above she saw the Moon shining brightly, pale and placid, and she put +forth her tongue at it, which was an evil thing, for the Moon is old, +and a Thlinkit child should show respect for age. So the Moon would not +endure so rude a thing from a girl child, and it came down from the sky +and took her thither. She cried out in fear and caught at the long grass +to keep herself from going up, but the Moon was strong and took her with +her water-bucket and her bunch of grass, and she never came back. Her +mother wept for her, but her father said: 'Cease. We have other girl +children; she is now wedded to the Moon; to him we need not give a +potlatch.' + +"You may see her still, if you will look at the Moon, there, grass in +one hand, bucket in the other, and when the new Moon tips to one side +and the water spills from the clouds and it is the months of rain, it is +the bad Moon maiden tipping over her water-bucket upon the earth. No +Thlinkit child would dare ever to put her tongue forth at the Moon, for +fear of a like fate to that of Squi-ance, the Moon maiden." + +Tanana's voice was soft and low, and she looked very pretty as she sat +in the moonlight at the door of the hut and told Kalitan and Ted quaint +old stories. Ted was delighted with her tales, and begged for another +and yet another, and Tanana told the quaint story of Kagamil. + +"A mighty _toyon_[9] dwelt on the island of Kagamil. By name he was +Kat-haya-koochat, and he was of great strength and much to be feared. He +had long had a death feud with people of the next totem, but the bold +warrior Yakaga, chieftain of the tribe, married the toyon's daughter, +and there was no more feud. Zampa was the son of Kat-haya-koochat, and +his pride. He built for this son a fine _bidarka_,[10] and the boy +launched it on the sea. His father watched him sail and called him to +return, lest evil befall. But Zampa heard not his father's voice and +pursued diving birds,[11] and, lo! he was far from land and the dark +fell. He sailed to the nearest shore and beheld the village of Yakaga, +where the people of his sister's husband made him welcome, though Yakaga +was not within his hut. There was feasting and merry-making, and, +according to their custom, he, the stranger, was given a chieftain's +daughter to wife, and her name was Kitt-a-youx; and Zampa loved her and +she him, and he returned not home. But Kitt-a-youx's father liked him +not, and treated him with rudeness because of the old enmity with his +Tyee father, so Zampa said to Kitt-a-youx: 'Let us go hence. We cannot +be happy here. Let us go from your father, who is unfriendly to me, and +seek the _barrabora_ of my father, the mighty chief, that happiness may +come upon us,' and Kitt-a-youx said: 'What my lord says is well.' + +"Then Zampa placed her in his canoe, and alone beneath the stars they +sailed and it was well, and Zampa's arm was strong at his paddle. But, +lo! they heard another paddle, and one came after them, and soon arrows +flew about them, arrows swift and cruel, and one struck his paddle from +his hand and his canoe was overturned. The pursuer came and placed +Kitt-a-youx in his canoe, seeking, too, for Zampa, but, alas! Zampa was +drowned. And when his pursuer dragged his body to the surface, he gave +a mighty cry, for, lo! it was his brother-in-law whom he had pursued, +for he was Yakaga. Then fearing the terrible rage of Zampa's father, he +dared not return with the body, so he left it with the overturned canoe +in the kelp and weeds. Kitt-a-youx he bore with him to his own island. +There she was sad as the sea-gull's scream, for the lord she loved was +dead. And her father gave her to another _toyon_, who was cruel to her, +and her life was as a slave's, and she loathed her life until Zampa's +child was born to her, and for it she lived. Alas, it was a girl child +and her husband hated it, and Kitt-a-youx saw nothing for it but to be +sold as a slave as was she herself. And she looked by day and by night +at the sea, and its cold, cold waves seemed warmer to her than the arms +of men. 'With my girl child I shall go hence,' she whispered to herself, +'and the Great Unknown Spirit will be kind.' + +"So by night she stole away in a canoe and steered to sea, ere she knew +where she was, reaching the seaweeds where she had journeyed with her +young husband. The morning broke, and she saw the weeds and the kelp +where her lover had gone from her sight, and, with a glad sigh, she +clasped Zampa's child to her breast and sank down among the weeds where +he had died. So her tired spirit was at rest, for a woman is happier who +dies with him she loves. + +"Now Zampa's father had found his boy's body and mourned over it, and +buried it in a mighty cave, the which he had once made for his furs and +stores. With it he placed bows and arrows and many valuables in respect +for the dead. And Zampa's sister, going to his funeral feast, fell upon +a stone with her child, so that both were killed. Then broke the old +chief's heart. Beside her brother he laid her in the cave, and gave +orders that he himself should be placed there as well, when grief +should have made way with him. Then he died of sorrow for his children, +and his people interred him in his burial cave, and with him they put +much wealth and blankets and weapons. + +"When, therefore, the people of his tribe found the bodies of +Kitt-a-youx and her child among the kelp, having heard of her love for +Zampa, they bore them to the same cave, and, wrapping them in furs, they +placed Kitt-a-youx beside her beloved husband, and in her burial she +found her home and felt the kindness of the Great Spirit. This, then, is +the story of the burial cave of Kagamil, and since that day no man dwelt +upon the island, and it is known as the 'island of the dead.'" + +"I'd like to see it, I can tell you," said Ted. "Are there any burial +caves around here?" + +"The Thlinkits do not bury in caves," said Tanana. "We used to burn our +dead, but often we place them in totem-poles." + +"I thought those great poles by your doors were totems," said Ted, +puzzled. + +"Yes," said the girl. "They are caste totems, and all who are of any +rank have them. As we belong to the Raven, or Bear, or Eagle clan, we +have the carved poles to show our rank, but the totem of the dead is +quite different. It does not stand beside the door, but far away. It is +alone, as the soul of the dead in whose honour it is made. It is but +little carved. A square hole is cut at the back of the pole, and the +body of the dead, wrapped in a matting of cedar bark, is placed within, +a board being nailed so that the body will not fall to the ground. A +potlatch is given, and food from the feast is put in the fire for the +dead person." + +"It seems queer to put weapons and blankets and things to eat on +people's graves," said Ted. "Why do they do it?" + +"Of the dead we know nothing," said Tanana. "Perhaps the warrior spirit +wishes his arrows in the Land of the Great Unknown." + +"Yes, but he can't come back for them," persisted Ted. + +"At Wrangel, Boston man put flowers on his girl's grave," said Kalitan, +drily. "She come back and smell posy?" + +Having no answer ready, Ted changed the subject and asked: + +"Why do you have the raven at the top of your totem pole?" + +"Indian cannot marry same totem," said Kalitan. "My father was eagle +totem, my mother was raven totem. He carve her totem at the top of the +pole, then his totem and those of the family are carved below. The +greater the family the taller the totem." + +"How do you get these totems?" demanded Ted. + +"Clan totems we take from our parents, but a man may choose his own +totem. Before he becomes a man he must go alone into the forest to +fast, and there he chooses his totem, and he is brother to that animal +all his life, and may not kill it. When he comes forth, he may take part +in all the ceremonies of his tribe." + +"Why, it is something like knighthood and the vigil at arms and +escutcheons, and all those Round-Table things," exclaimed Ted, in +delight, for he dearly loved the stirring tales of King Arthur and his +knights and the doughty deeds of Camelot. + +"Tell us about that," said Kalitan, so Ted told them many tales in the +moonlight, as they sat beneath the shadows of the quaint and curious +totem-poles of Kalitan's tribe. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[9] Chieftain. + +[10] Canoe. + +[11] Ducks. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +THE BERRY DANCE + + +TEDDY'S month upon the island stretched out into two. His father came +and went, finding the boy so happy and well that he left him with an +easy mind. Ted's fair skin was tanned to a warm brown, and, clad in +Indian clothes, save for his aureole of copper-coloured hair, so strong +a contrast to the straight black locks of his Indian brothers, he could +hardly be told from one of the island lads who roamed all day by wood +and shore. They called him "Yakso pil chicamin,"[12] and all the village +liked him. + +Tanana's marriage-feast was held, and she and Tah-ge-ah went to +housekeeping in a little hut, where the one room was as clean and neat +as could be, and not a bit like the dirty rooms of some of the natives. +Tanana spent all her spare time weaving beautiful baskets, for her slim +fingers were very skilful. Some of the baskets which she made out of the +inner bark of the willow-tree were woven so closely that they would hold +water, and Teddy never tired of watching her weave the gay colours in +and out, nor of seeing the wonderful patterns grow. Tah-ge-ah would take +them to the mainland when she had enough made, and sell them to the +travellers from the States. Meantime Tah-ge-ah himself was very, very +busy carving the totem-pole for his new home, for Tanana was a +chieftain's daughter, and he, too, was of high caste, and their totem +must be carved and stand one hundred feet high beside their door, lest +they be reproached. + +Ted also enjoyed seeing old Kala-kash carve, for he was the finest +carver among the Indians, and it was wonderful to see him cut strange +figures out of bone, wood, horn, fish-bones, and anything his gnarled +old fingers could get hold of, and he would carve grasshoppers, bears, +minnows, whales, sea-gulls, babies, or idols. He made, too, a canoe for +Ted, a real Alaskan dugout, shaping the shell from a log and making it +soft by steam, filling the hole with water and throwing in red-hot +stones. The wood was then left to season, and Ted could hardly wait +patiently until sun and wind and rain had made his precious craft +seaworthy. Then it was painted with paint made by rubbing a certain rock +over the surface of a coarse stone and the powder mixed with oil or +water. + +At last it was done, a shapely thing, more beautiful in Ted's eyes than +any launch or yacht he had ever seen at home. His canoe had a carved +stern and a sharp prow which came out of the water, and which had carved +upon it a fine eagle. Kala-kash had not asked Ted what his totem was, +but supposing that the American eagle on the buttons of the boy's coat +was his emblem, had carved the rampant bird upon the canoe as the boy's +totem. Ted learned to paddle and to fish, never so well as Kalitan, of +course, for he was born to it, but still he did very well, and enjoyed +it hugely. + +Happily waned the summer days, and then came the time of the berry +dance, which Kalitan had spoken of so often that Ted was very anxious to +see it. + +The salmon-berry was fully ripe, a large and luscious berry, found in +two colours, yellow and dark red. Besides these there were other small +berries, maruskins, like the New England dewberries, huckleberries, and +whortleberries. + +"We have five kinds of berries on our island," said Kalitan. "All good. +The birds, flying from the mainland, first brought the seeds, and our +berries grow larger than almost any place in Alaska." + +"They're certainly good," said Ted, his mouth full as he spoke. "These +salmon-berries are a kind of a half-way between our blackberries and +strawberries. I never saw anything prettier than the way the red and +yellow berries grow so thick on the same bush--" + +"There come the canoes!" interrupted Kalitan, and the two boys ran down +to the water's edge, eager to be the first to greet the visitors. Tyee +Klake was giving a feast to the people of the neighbouring islands, and +a dozen canoes glided over the water from different directions. The +canoes were all gaily decorated, and they came swiftly onward to the +weird chant of the paddlers, which the breeze wafted to the listeners' +ears in a monotonous melody. + +Every one in the village had been astir since daybreak, preparing for +the great event. Parallel lines had been strung from the chief's house +to the shore, and from these were hung gay blankets, pieces of bright +calico, and festoons of leaves and flowers. As the canoes landed their +occupants, the dancers thronged to welcome their guests. The great drum +sounded its loud note, and the dancers, arrayed in wonderful blankets +woven in all manner of fanciful designs and trimmed with long woollen +fringes, swayed back and forth, up and down, to and fro, in a very +graceful manner, keeping time to the music. + +In the centre of the largest canoe stood the Tyee of a neighbouring +island, a tall Indian, dressed in a superb blanket with fringe a foot +long, fringed leggins and moccasins of walrus hide, and the chief's hat +to show his rank. It was a peculiar head-dress half a foot high, trimmed +in down and feathers. + +The Tyee, in perfect time to the music, swayed back and forth, never +ceasing for a moment, shaking his head so that the down was wafted in a +snowy cloud all over him. + +As the canoes reached the shallows, the shore Indians dashed into the +water to draw them up to land, and the company was joyously received. +Teddy was delighted, for in one of the canoes was his father, whom he +had not seen for several weeks. After the greetings were over, the +dancers arranged themselves in opposite lines, men on one side, women on +the other, and swayed their bodies while the drum kept up its unceasing +tum-tum-tum. + +"It's a little bit like square dances at home," said Ted. "It's ever so +pretty, isn't it? First they sway to the right, then to the left, over +and over and over; then they bend their bodies forward and backward +without bending their knees, then sway again, and bend to one side and +then the other, singing all the time. Isn't it odd, father?" + +"It certainly is, but it's very graceful," said Mr. Strong. "Some of the +girls are quite pretty, gentle-looking creatures, but the older women +are ugly." + +"The very old women look like the mummies in the museum at home," said +Ted. "There's one old woman, over a hundred years old, whose skin is +like a piece of parchment, and she wears the hideous lip-button which +most of the Thlinkits have stopped using. Kalitan says all the women +used to wear them. The girls used to make a cut in their chins between +the lip and the chin, and put in a piece of wood, changing it every few +days for a piece a little larger until the opening was stretched like a +second mouth. When they grew up, a wooden button like the bowl of a +spoon was set in the hole and constantly enlarged. The largest I have +seen was three inches long. Isn't it a curious idea, father?" + +"It certainly is, but there is no telling what women will admire. A +Chinese lady binds her feet, and an American her waist; a Maori woman +slits her nose, and an English belle pierces her ears. It's on the same +principle that your Thlinkit friends slit their chins for the +lip-button." + +"I'm mighty glad they don't do it now, for Tanana's as pretty as a pink, +and it would be a shame to spoil her face that way," said Ted. "The +dancing has stopped, father; let's see what they'll do next. There comes +Kalitan." + +A feast of berries was to follow the dance, and Kalitan led Mr. Strong +and Ted to the chief's house, which was gaily decorated with blankets +and bits of bright cloth. A table covered with a cloth was laid around +three sides of the room, and on this was spread hardtack and huge bowls +of berries of different colours. These were beaten up with sugar into a +foamy mixture, pink, purple, and yellow, according to the colour of the +berries, which tasted good and looked pretty. + +Ted and Kalitan had helped gather the berries, and their appetites were +quite of the best. Mr. Strong smiled to see how the once fussy little +gentleman helped himself with a right good-will to the Indian dainties +of his friends. + +Many pieces of goods had been provided for the potlatch, and these were +given away, given and received with dignified politeness. There was +laughing and merriment with the feast, and when it was all over, the +canoes floated away as they had come, into the sunset, which gilded all +the sea to rosy, golden beauty. + +Ted's share of the potlatch was a beautiful blanket of Tanana's weaving, +and he was delighted beyond measure. + +"You're a lucky boy, Ted," said his father. "People pay as high as +sixty-five dollars for an Alaskan blanket, and not always a perfect one +at that. Many of the Indians are using dyed yarns to weave them, but +yours is the genuine article, made from white goat's wool, long and +soft, and dyed only in the native reds and blacks. We shall have to do +something nice for Tanana when you leave." + +"I'd like to give her something, and Kalitan, too." Ted's face looked +very grave. "When do I have to go, father?" + +"Right away, I'm afraid," was the reply. "I've let you stay as long as +possible, and now we must start for our northern trip, if you are to see +anything at all of mines and Esquimos before we start home. The +mail-steamer passes Nuchek day after to-morrow, and we must go over +there in time to take it." + +"Yes, sir," said Ted, forlornly. He wanted to see the mines and all the +wonderful things of the far north, but he hated to leave his Indian +friends. + +"What's the trouble, Ted?" His father laid his hand on his shoulder, +disliking to see the bright face so clouded. + +"I was only thinking of Kalitan," said Ted. + +"Suppose we take Kalitan with us," said Mr. Strong. + +"Oh, daddy, could we really?" Ted jumped in excitement. + +"I'll ask the Tyee if he will lend him to us for a month," said Mr. +Strong, and in a few minutes it was decided, and Ted, with one great +bear's hug to thank his father, rushed off to find his friend and tell +him the glorious news. + +FOOTNOTE: + +[12] Copper hair. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +ON THE WAY TO NOME + + +"WELL, boys, we're off for a long sail, and I'm afraid you will be +rather tired with the steamer before you are done with her," said Mr. +Strong. They had boarded the mail-steamer late the night before, and, +going right to bed, had wakened early next day and rushed on deck to +find the August sun shining in brilliant beauty, the islands quite out +of sight, and nought but sea and sky around and above them. + +"Oh, I don't know; we'll find something to do," said Teddy. "You'll have +to tell us lots about the places we pass, and, if there aren't any other +boys on board, Kalitan and I will be together. What's the first place we +stop?" + +"We passed the Kenai Peninsula in the night. I wish you could have +caught a glimpse of some of the waterfalls, volcanoes, and glaciers. +They are as fine as any in Alaska," said Mr. Strong. "Our next stop will +be Kadiak Island." + +"Kadiak Island was once near the mainland," said Kalitan. "There was +only the narrowest passage of water, but a great Kenai otter tried to +swim the pass, and was caught fast. He struggled so that he made it +wider and wider, and at last pushed Kadiak way out to sea." + +"He must have been a whopper," said Ted, "to push it so far away. Is +that the island?" + +"Yes," said his father. "There are no splendid forests on the island as +there are on the mainland, but the grasses are superb, for the fog and +rain here keeps them green as emerald." + +"What a queer canoe that Indian has!" exclaimed Ted. "It isn't a bit +like yours, Kalitan." + +"It is _bidarka_," said Kalitan. "Kadiak people make canoe out of walrus +hide. They stretch it over frames of driftwood. It holds two people. +They sit in small hatch with apron all around their bodies, and the +_bidarka_ goes over the roughest sea and floats like a bladder. Big +_bidarka_ called an _oomiak_, and holds whole family." + +"Some one has called the _bidarkas_ the 'Cossacks of the sea,'" said Mr. +Strong. "They skim along like swallows, and are as perfectly built as +any vessel I ever saw." + +"What are those huge buildings on the small island?" asked Ted, as the +steamer wound through the shallows. + +"Ice-houses," said his father. "Before people learned to manufacture +ice, immense cargoes were shipped from here to as far south as San +Francisco." + +"It was fun to see them go fishing for ice from the steamer when we came +up to Skaguay," said Ted. "The sailors went out in a boat, slipped a +net around a block of ice and towed it to the side of the ship, then it +was hitched to a derrick and swung on deck." + +"Huh!" said Kalitan. "What people want ice for stored up? Think they'd +store sunshine!" + +"If you could invent a way to do that, you could make a fortune, my +boy," said Mr. Strong, laughing. "The next place of any interest is +Karluk. It's around on the other side of the island in Shelikoff Strait, +and is famous for its salmon canneries. Nearly half of the entire salmon +pack of Alaska comes from Kadiak Island, most of the fish coming from +the Karluk River." + +"Very bad for Indians," said Kalitan. "Used to have plenty fish. Tyee +Klake said salmon used to come up this river in shoal sixteen miles +long, and now Boston men take them all." + +"It does seem a pity that the Indians don't even have a chance to earn +their living in the canneries," said Mr. Strong. "The largest cannery in +the world is at Karluk. There are thousands of men employed, and in one +year over three million salmon were packed, yet with all this work for +busy hands to do, the canneries employ Chinese, Greek, Portuguese, and +American workmen in preference to the Indians, bringing them by the +shipload from San Francisco." + +"What other places do we pass?" asked Ted. + +"A lot of very interesting ones, and I wish we could coast along, +stopping wherever we felt like it," said Mr. Strong. "The Shumagin +Islands are where Bering, the great discoverer and explorer, landed in +1741 to bury one of his crew. Codfish were found there, and Captain +Cook, in his 'Voyages and Discoveries,' speaks of the same fish. There +is a famous fishery there now called the Davidson Banks, and the +codfishing fleet has its headquarters on Popoff Island. Millions of +codfish are caught here every year. These islands are also a favourite +haunt of the sea otter. Belofsky, at the foot of Mt. Pavloff, is the +centre of the trade." + +[Illustration: MOUNT SHISHALDIN.] + +"What kind of fur is otter?" asked Ted, whose mind was so inquiring that +his father often called him the "living catechism." + +"It is the court fur of China and Russia, and at one time the common +people were forbidden by law to wear it," said Mr. Strong. "It is a +rich, purplish brown sprinkled with silver-tipped hairs, and the skins +are very costly." + +"At one time any one could have otter," said Kalitan. "We hunted them +with spears and bows and arrows. Now they are very few, and we find them +only in dangerous spots, hiding on rocks or floating kelp. Sometimes the +hunters have to lie in hiding for days watching them. Only Indians can +kill the otter. Boston men can if they marry Indian women. That makes +them Indian." + +"Rather puts otter at a discount and women at a premium," laughed Mr. +Strong. "Now we pass along near the Alaska peninsula, past countless +isles and islets, through the Fox Islands to Unalaska, and then into the +Bering Sea. One of the most interesting things in this region is called +the 'Pacific Ring of Fire,' a chain of volcanoes which stretches along +the coast. Often the passengers can see from the ships at night a +strange red glow over the sky, and know that the fire mountains are +burning. The most beautiful of these volcanoes is Mt. Shishaldin, nearly +nine thousand feet high, and almost as perfect a cone in shape as Fuji +Yama, which the Japanese love so much and call 'the Honourable +Mountain.' At Unalaska or Ilinlink, the 'curving beach,' we stop. If we +could stay over for awhile, there are a great many interesting things we +could see; an old Greek church and the government school are in the +town, and Bogoslov's volcano and the sea-lion rookeries are on the +island of St. John, which rose right up out of the sea in 1796 after a +day's roaring and rumbling and thundering. In 1815 there was a similar +performance, and from time to time the island has grown larger ever +since. One fine day in 1883 there was a great shower of ashes, and, when +the clouds had rolled away, two peaks were seen where only one had been, +separated by a sandy isthmus. This last was reduced to a fine thread by +the earthquake of 1891, and I don't know what new freaks it may have +developed by now. I know some friends of mine landed there not long ago +and cooked eggs over the jets of steam which gush out of the +mountainside. Did you ever hear of using a volcano for a cook-stove?" + +"Well, I should say not," said Ted, amused. "These Alaskan volcanoes are +great things." + +"The one called Makushin has a crater filled with snow in a part of +which there is always a cloud of sulphurous smoke. That's making +extremes meet, isn't it?" + +"Yehl[13] made many strange things," said Kalitan, who had been taking +in all this information even more eagerly than Teddy. "He first dwelt on +Nass River, and turned two blades of grass into the first man and woman. +Then the Thlinkits grew and prospered, till darkness fell upon the +earth. A Thlinkit stole the sun and hid it in a box, but Yehl found it +and set it so high in the heavens that none could touch it. Then the +Thlinkits grew and spread abroad. But a great flood came, and all were +swept away save two, who tossed long upon the flood on a raft of logs +until Yehl pitied, and carried them to Mt. Edgecomb, where they dwelt +until the waters fell." + +"Old Kala-kash tells this story, and he says that one of these people, +when very old, went down through the crater of the mountain, and, given +long life by Yehl, stays there always to hold up the earth out of the +water. But the other lives in the crater as the Thunder Bird, Hahtla, +whose wing-flap is the thunder and whose glance is the lightning. The +osprey is his totem, and his face glares in our blankets and totems." + +"I've wondered what that fierce bird was," said Teddy, who was always +quite carried away with Kalitan's strange legends. + +"Well, what else do we see on the way to Nome, father?" + +"The most remarkable thing happening in the Bering Sea is the seal +industry, but I do not think we pass near enough to the islands to see +any of that. You'd better run about and see the ship now," and the boys +needed no second permission. + +It was not many days before they knew everybody on board, from captain +to deck hands, and were prime favourites with them all. Ted and Kalitan +enjoyed every moment. There was always something new to see or hear, and +ere they reached their journey's end, they had heard all about seals and +sealing, although the famous Pribylov Islands were too far to the west +of the vessel's route for them to see them. They sighted the United +States revenue cutter which plies about the seal islands to keep off +poachers, for no one is allowed to kill seals or to land on this +government reservation except from government vessels. The scent of the +rookeries, where millions of seals have been killed in the last hundred +years, is noticed far out at sea, and often the barking of the animals +can be heard by passing vessels. + +"Why is sealskin so valuable, father?" asked Ted. + +"It has always been admired because it is so warm and soft," replied Mr. +Strong. "All the ladies fancy it, and it never seems to go out of +fashion. There was a time, when the Pribylov Islands were first +discovered, that sealskins were so plentiful that they sold in Alaska +for a dollar apiece. Hunters killed so many, killing old and young, that +soon there were scarcely any left, so a law was passed by the Russian +government forbidding any killing for five years. Since the Americans +have owned Alaska they have protected the seals, allowing them to be +killed only at certain times, and only male seals from two to four years +old are killed. The Indians are always the killers, and are wonderfully +swift and clever, never missing a blow and always killing instantly, so +that there is almost no suffering." + +"How do they know where to find the seals?" asked Ted. + +"For half the year the seals swim about the sea, but in May they return +to their favourite haunts. In these rookeries families of them herd on +the rocks, the male staying at home with his funny little black +puppies, while the mother swims about seeking food. The seals are very +timid, and will rush into the water at the least strange noise. A story +is told that the barking of a little pet dog belonging to a Russian at +one of the rookeries lost him a hundred thousand dollars, for the seals +took fright and scurried away before any one could say 'Jack Robinson!'" + +"Rather an expensive pup!" commented Ted. "But what about the seals, +daddy?" + +"You seem to think I am an encyclopaedia on the seal question," said his +father. "There is not much else to tell you." + +"How can they manage always to kill the right ones?" demanded Ted. + +"The gay bachelor seals herd together away from the rest and sleep at +night on the rocks. Early in the morning the Aleuts slip in between them +and the herd and drive them slowly to the killing-ground, where they are +quickly killed and skinned and the skins taken to the salting-house. +The Indians use the flesh and blubber, and the climate is such that +before another year the hollow bones are lost in the grass and earth." + +"What becomes of the skins after they are salted?" + +"They are usually sent to London, where they are prepared for market. +The work is all done by hand, which is one reason that they are so +expensive. They are first worked in sawdust, cleaned, scraped, washed, +shaved, plucked, dyed with a hand-brush from eight to twelve times, +washed again and freed from the least speck of grease by a last bath in +hot sawdust or sand." + +"I don't wonder a sealskin coat costs so much," said Ted, "if they have +got to go through all that performance. I wish we could have seen the +islands, but I'd hate to see the seals killed. It doesn't seem like +hunting just to knock them on the head. It's too much like the +stock-yards at home." + +"Yes, but it's a satisfaction to know that it's done in the easiest +possible way for the animals. + +"What a lot you are learning way up here in Alaska, aren't you, son? +To-morrow we'll be at Nome, and then your head will be so stuffed with +mines and mining that you will forget all about everything else." + +"I don't want to forget any of it," said Ted. "It's all bully." + +FOOTNOTE: + +[13] Yehl, embodied in the raven, is the Thlinkit Great Spirit. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +IN THE GOLD COUNTRY + + +A LOW, sandy beach, without a tree to break its level, rows of plain +frame-houses, some tents and wooden shanties scattered about, the surf +breaking over the shore in splendid foam,--this was Teddy's first +impression of Nome. They had sailed over from St. Michael's to see the +great gold-fields, and both the boys were full of eagerness to be on +land. It seemed, however, as if their desires were not to be realized, +for landing at Nome is a difficult matter. + +Nome is on the south shore of that part of Alaska known as Seward +Peninsula, and it has no harbour. It is on the open seacoast and catches +all the fierce storms that sweep northward over Bering Sea. Generally +seacoast towns are built in certain spots because there is a harbour, +but Nome was not really built, it "jes' growed," for, when gold was +found there, the miners sat down to gather the harvest, caring nothing +about a harbour. + +Ships cannot go within a mile of land, and passengers have to go ashore +in small lighters. Sometimes when they arrive, they cannot go ashore at +all, but have to wait several days, taking refuge behind a small island +ten miles away, lest they drag their anchors and be dashed to pieces on +the shore. + +There had been a tremendous storm at Nome the day before Ted arrived, +and landing was more difficult than usual, but, impatient as the boys +were, at last it seemed safe to venture, and the party left the steamer +to be put on a rough barge, flat-bottomed and stout, which was hauled by +cable to shore until it grounded on the sands. They were then put in a +sort of wooden cage, let down by chains from a huge wooden beam, and +swung round in the air like the unloading cranes of a great city, over +the surf to a high platform on the land. + +"Well, this is a new way to land," cried Ted, who had been rather quiet +during the performance, and his father thought a trifle frightened. +"It's a sort of a balloon ascension, isn't it?" + +"It must be rather hard for the miners, who have been waiting weeks for +their mail, when the boat can't land her bags at all," said Mr. Strong. +"That sometimes happens. From November to May, Nome is cut off from the +world by snow and ice. The only news they receive is by the monthly mail +when it comes. + +"Over at Kronstadt the Russians have ice-breaking boats which keep the +Baltic clear enough of ice for navigation, and plow their way through +ice fourteen feet thick for two hundred miles. The Nome miners are very +anxious for the government to try this ice-boat service at Nome." + +"Why did people settle here in such a forlorn place?" asked Ted, as they +made their way to the town, which they found anything but civilized. "I +like the Indian houses on the island better than this." + +"Your island is more picturesque," said Mr. Strong, "but people came +here for what they could get. + +"In 1898 gold was discovered on Anvil Creek, which runs into Snake +River, and this turned people's eyes in the direction of Nome. Miners +rushed here and set to work in the gulches inland, but it was not till +the summer of 1899 that gold was found on the beach. A soldier from the +barracks--you know this is part of a United States Military +Reservation--found gold while digging a well near the beach, and an old +miner took out $1,200 worth in twenty days. Then a perfect frenzy seized +the people. They flocked to Nome from far and near; they camped on the +beach in hundreds and staked their claims. Between one and two thousand +men were at work on the beach at one time, yet so good-natured were they +that no quarrels seem to have occurred. Doctors, lawyers, barkeepers, +and all dropped their business and went to rocking, as they call +beach-mining." + +[Illustration: "'LET'S WATCH THOSE TWO MEN. THEY HAVE EVIDENTLY STAKED A +CLAIM TOGETHER.'"] + +"Oh, dad, let's hurry and go and see it," cried Ted, as they hurried +through their dinner at the hotel. "I thought gold came out of deep +mines like copper, and had to be melted out or something, but this seems +to be different. Do they just walk along the beach and pick it up? I +wish I could." + +"Well, it's not quite so simple as that," said Mr. Strong, laughing. +"We'll go and see, and then you'll understand," and they went down the +crooked streets to the sandy beach. + +Men were standing about talking and laughing, others working hard. All +manner of men were there scattered over the _tundra_,[14] and Ted +became interested in two who were working together in silence. + +"What are they doing?" he asked his father. "I can't see how they expect +to get anything worth having out of this mess." + +"Beach-mining is quite different from any other," said his father. +"Let's watch those two men. They have evidently staked a claim together, +which means that nobody but these two can work on the ground they have +staked out, and that they must share all the gold they find. They came +here to prospect, and evidently found a block of ground which suited +them. They then dug a prospect hole down two to five feet until they +struck 'bedrock,' which happens to be clay around here. They passed +through several layers of sand and gravel before reaching this, and +these were carefully examined to see how much gold they contained. Upon +reaching a layer which seemed to be a good one, the gravel on top was +stripped off and thrown aside and the 'pay streak' worked with the +rocker." + +"What is that?" asked Ted, who was all ears, while Kalitan was taking in +everything with his sharp black eyes. + +"That arrangement that looks like a square pan on a saw-buck is the +rocker. The rockers usually have copper bottoms, and there is a great +demand for sheet copper at Nome, but often there is not enough of it, +and the miners have been known to cover them with silver coins. That man +you are watching has silver dollars in his, about fifty, I should say. +It seems extravagant, doesn't it, but he'll take out many times that +amount if he has good luck." + +The man, who had glanced up at them, smiled at that and said: + +"And, if I don't have luck, I'm broke, anyhow, so fifty or sixty plunks +won't make much difference. You going to be a miner, youngster?" + +"Not this trip," said Ted, with a smile. "Say, I'd like to know how you +get the gold out with that." + +"At first we used to put a blanket in the rocker, and wash the pay dirt +on that. Our prospect hole has water in it, and we can use it over and +over. Some of the holes are dry, and there the men have to pack their +pay dirt down to the shore and use surf water for washing. Most of our +gold is so fine that the blanket didn't stop it, so now we use 'quick.' +I reckon you'd call it mercury, but we call it quick. You see, it saves +time, and work-time up here is so short, on account of winter setting in +so early, that we have to save up our spare minutes and not waste 'em on +long words." + +Ted grinned cheerfully and asked: "What do you do with the quick?" + +"We paint it over the bottom of the rocker, and it acts like a charm +and catches every speck of gold that comes its way as the dirt is washed +over it. The quick and the gold make a sort of amalgam." + +"But how do you get at the gold after it amalgams, or whatever you call +it?" asked Ted. + +"Sure we fry it in the frying-pan, and it's elegant pancakes it makes," +said the man. "See here," and he pulled from his pocket several flat +masses that looked like pieces of yellow sponge. "This is pure gold. All +the quick has gone off, and this is the real stuff, just as good as +money. An ounce will buy sixteen dollars' worth of anything in Nome." + +"It looks mighty pretty," said Ted. "Seems to me it's redder than any +gold I ever saw." + +"It is," said his father. "Nome beach gold is redder and brighter than +any other Alaskan gold. I guess I'll have to get you each a piece for a +souvenir," and both boys were made happy by the present of a quaintly +shaped nugget, bought by Mr. Strong from the very miner who had mined +it, which of course added to its value. + +"You're gathering quite a lot of souvenirs, Ted," said his father. "It's +a great relief that you have not asked me for anything alive yet. I have +been expecting a modest request for a Malamute or a Husky pup, or +perhaps a pet reindeer to take home, but so far you have been quite +moderate in your demands." + +"Kalitan never asks for anything," said Ted. "I asked him once why it +was, and he said Indian boys never got what they asked for; that +sometimes they had things given to them that they hadn't asked for, but, +if he asked the Tyee for anything, all he got was 'Good Indian get +things for himself,' and he had to go to work to get the thing he +wanted. I guess it's a pretty good plan, too, for I notice that I get +just as much as I did when I used to tease you for things," Teddy added, +sagely. + +"Wise boy," said his father. "You're certainly more agreeable to live +with. The next thing you are to have is a visit to an Esquimo village, +and, if I can find some of the Esquimo carvings, you shall have +something to take home to mother. Kalitan, what would you like to +remember the Esquimos by?" + +Kalitan smiled and replied, simply, "_Mukluks_." + +"What are _mukluks_?" demanded Ted. + +"Esquimo moccasins," said Mr. Strong. "Well, you shall both have a pair, +and they are rather pretty things, too, as the Esquimos make them." + +FOOTNOTE: + +[14] The name given to the boggy soil of the beach. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +AFTERNOON TEA IN AN EGLU + + +THE Esquimo village was reached across the _tundra_, and Teddy and +Kalitan were much interested in the queer houses. Built for the long +winter of six or eight months, when it is impossible to do anything +out-of-doors, the _eglu_[15] seems quite comfortable from the Esquimo +point of view, but very strange to their American cousins. + +"I thought the Esquimos lived in snow houses," said Ted, as they looked +at the queer little huts, and Kalitan exclaimed: + +"Huh! Innuit queer Indian!" + +"No," said Mr. Strong; "his hut is built by digging a hole about six +feet deep and standing logs up side by side around the hole. On the top +of these are placed logs which rest even with the ground. Stringers are +put across these, and other logs and moss and mud roofed over it, +leaving an opening in the middle about two feet square. This is covered +with a piece of walrus entrail so thin and transparent that light easily +passes through it, and it serves as a window, the only one they have. A +smoke-hole is cut through the roof, but there is no door, for the hut is +entered through another room built in the same way, fifteen or twenty +feet distant, and connected by an underground passage about two feet +square with the main room. The entrance-room is entered through a hole +in the roof, from which a ladder reaches the bottom of the passage." + +"Can we go into a hut?" asked Ted. + +"I'll ask that woman cooking over there," said Mr. Strong, as they went +up to a woman who was cooking over a peat fire, holding over the coals +an old battered skillet in which she was frying fish. She nodded and +smiled at the boys, and, as Esquimos are always friendly and hospitable +souls, told them to go right into her _eglu_, which was close by. + +They climbed down the ladder, crawled along the narrow passage to where +a skin hung before an opening, and, pushing it aside, entered the +living-room. Here they found an old man busily engaged in carving a +walrus tooth, another sewing _mukluks_, while a girl was singing a +quaint lullaby to a child of two in the corner. + +The young girl rose, and, putting the baby down on a pile of skins, +spoke to them in good English, saying quietly: + +"You are welcome. I am Alalik." + +"May we see your wares? We wish to buy," said Mr. Strong, courteously. + +"You may see, whether you buy or not," she said, with a smile, which +showed a mouth full of even white teeth, and she spread out before them +a collection of Esquimo goods. There were all kinds of carvings from +walrus tusks, grass baskets, moccasins of walrus hide, stone bowls and +cups, _parkas_ made of reindeer skin, and one superb one of bird +feathers, _ramleikas_, and all manner of carved trinkets, the most +charming of which, to Ted's eyes, being a tiny _oomiak_ with an Esquimo +in it, made to be used as a breast-pin. This he bought for his mother, +and a carving of a baby for Judith; while his father made him and +Kalitan happy with presents. + +"Where did you learn such English?" asked Mr. Strong of Alalik, +wondering, too, where she learned her pretty, modest ways, for Esquimo +women are commonly free and easy. + +"I was for two years at the Mission at Holy Cross," she said. "There I +learned much that was good. Then my mother died, and I came home." + +She spoke simply, and Mr. Strong wondered what would be the fate of this +sweet-faced girl. + +"Did you learn to sew from the sisters?" asked Ted, who had been looking +at the garments she had made, in which the stitches, though made in +skins and sewn with deer sinew, were as even as though done with a +machine. + +"Oh, no," she said. "We learn that at home. When I was no larger than +Zaksriner there, my mother taught me to braid thread from deer and whale +sinew, and we must sew very much in winter if we have anything to sell +when summer comes. It is very hard to get enough to live. Since the +Boston men come, our people waste the summer in idleness, so we have +nothing stored for the winter's food. Hundreds die and many sicknesses +come upon us. In the village where my people lived, in each house lay +the dead of what the Boston men called measles, and there were not left +enough living to bury the dead. Only we escaped, and a Black Gown came +from the Mission to help, and he took me and Antisarlook, my brother, to +the school. The rest came here, where we live very well because there +are in the summer, people who buy what we make in the winter." + +"How do you get your skins so soft?" asked Ted, feeling the exquisite +texture of a bag she had just finished. It was a beautiful bit of work, +a tobacco-pouch or "Tee-rum-i-ute," made of reindeer skin, decorated +with beads and the soft creamy fur of the ermine in its summer hue. + +"We scrape it a very long time and pull and rub," she said. "Plenty of +time for patience in winter." + +"Your hands are too small and slim. I shouldn't think you could do much +with those stiff skins," said Teddy. + +Alalik smiled at the compliment, and a little flush crept into the clear +olive of her skin. She was clean and neat, and the _eglu_, though close +from being shut up, was neater than most of the Esquimo houses. The bowl +filled with seal oil, which served as fire and light, was unlighted, and +Alalik's father motioned to her and said something in Innuit, to which +she smilingly replied: + +"My father wishes you to eat with us," she said, and produced her flint +bag. In this were some wads of fibrous material used for wicks. Rolling +a piece of this in wood ashes, she held it between her thumb and a +flint, struck her steel against the stone, and sparks flew out which +lighted the fibre so that it burst into flame. This was thrown into the +bowl of oil, and she deftly began preparing tea. She served it in cups +of grass, and Ted thought he had never tasted anything nicer than the +cup of afternoon tea served in an _eglu_. + +"Alalik, what were you singing as we came in?" asked Ted. + +"A song my mother always sang to us," she replied. "It is called 'Ahmi,' +and is an Esquimo slumber song." + +"Will you sing it now?" asked Mr. Strong, and she smiled in assent and +sang the quaint, crooning lullaby of her Esquimo mother-- + + "The wind blows over the Yukon. + My husband hunts the deer on the Koyukun Mountains, + Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not. + Long since my husband departed. Why does he wait in the mountains? + Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, softly. + Where is my own? + Does he lie starving on the hillside? Why does he linger? + Comes he not soon, I will seek him among the mountains. + Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, sleep. + The crow has come laughing. + His beak is red, his eyes glisten, the false one. + 'Thanks for a good meal to Kuskokala the Shaman. + On the sharp mountain quietly lies your husband.' + Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not. + 'Twenty deers' tongues tied to the pack on his shoulders; + Not a tongue in his mouth to call to his wife with, + Wolves, foxes, and ravens are fighting for morsels. + Tough and hard are the sinews, not so the child in your bosom.' + Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not. + Over the mountains slowly staggers the hunter. + Two bucks' thighs on his shoulders with bladders of fat between them. + Twenty deers' tongues in his belt. Go, gather wood, old woman! + Off flew the crow, liar, cheat, and deceiver! + Wake, little sleeper, and call to your father. + He brings you back fat, marrow and venison fresh from the mountain. + Tired and worn, he has carved a toy of the deer's horn, + While he was sitting and waiting long for the deer on the hillside. + Wake, and see the crow hiding himself from the arrow, + Wake, little one, wake, for here is your father." + +Thanking Alalik for the quaint song, sung in a sweet, touching voice, +they all took their departure, laden with purchases and delighted with +their visit. + +"But you must not think this is a fair sample of Esquimo hut or Esquimo +life," said Mr. Strong to the boys. "These are near enough civilized to +show the best side of their race, but theirs must be a terrible +existence who are inland or on islands where no one ever comes, and +whose only idea of life is a constant struggle for food." + +"I think I would rather be an American," remarked Ted, while Kalitan +said, briefly: + +"I like Thlinkit." + +FOOTNOTES: + +[15] The _eglu_ is the Esquimo house. Often they occupy tents during the +summer, but return to the huts the first cool nights. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE SPLENDOUR OF SAGHALIE TYEE + + +THE _tundra_ was greenish-brown in colour, and looked like a great +meadow stretching from the beach, like a new moon, gently upward to the +cones of volcanic mountains far away. + +The ground, frozen solid all the year, thaws out for a foot or two on +the surface during the warm months, and here and there were scattered +wild flowers; spring beauties, purple primroses, yellow anemone, and +saxifrages bloomed in beauty, and wild honey-bees, gay bumblebees, and +fat mosquitoes buzzed and hummed everywhere. + +Ted and Kalitan were going to see the reindeer farm at Port Clarence, +and, as this was to be their last jaunt in Alaska, they were determined +to make the best of it. Next day they were to take ship from Cape Prince +of Wales and go straight to Sitka. Here Ted was to start for home, and +Mr. Strong was to leave Kalitan at the Mission School for a year's +schooling, which, to Kalitan's great delight, was to be a present to him +from his American friends. + +"Tell us about the reindeer farms, daddy. Have they always been here?" +demanded Ted, as they tramped over the _tundra_, covered with moss, +grass, and flowers. + +"No," said his father. "They are quite recent arrivals in Alaska. The +Esquimos used to live entirely upon the game they killed before the +whites came. There were many walruses, which they used for many things; +whales, too, they could easily capture before the whalers drove them +north, and then they hunted the wild reindeer, until now there are +scarcely any left. There was little left for them to eat but small +fish, for you see the whites had taken away or destroyed their food +supplies. + +"One day, in 1891, an American vessel discovered an entire village of +Esquimos starving, being reduced to eating their dogs, and it was +thought quite time that the government did something for these people +whose land they had bought. Finding that people of the same race in +Siberia were prosperous and healthy, they sent to investigate +conditions, and found that the Siberian Esquimos lived entirely by means +of the reindeer. The government decided to start a reindeer farm and see +if it would not benefit the natives." + +"How does it work?" asked Ted. + +"Very well, indeed," said his father. "At first about two hundred +animals were brought over, and they increased about fifty per cent. the +first year. Everywhere in the arctic region the _tundra_ gives the +reindeer the moss he lives on. It is never dry in summer because the +frost prevents any underground drainage, and even in winter the animals +feed upon it and thrive. There are, it is said, hundreds of thousands of +square miles of reindeer moss in Alaska, and reindeer stations have been +established in many places, and, as the natives are the only ones +allowed to raise them, it seems as if this might be the way found to +help the industrious Esquimos to help themselves." + +"But if it all belongs to the government, how can it help the natives?" +asked Ted. + +"Of course they have to be taught the business," said Mr. Strong. "The +government brought over some Lapps and Finlanders to care for the deer +at first, and these took young Esquimos to train. Each one serves five +years as herder, having a certain number of deer set apart for him each +year, and at the end of his service goes into business for himself." + +"Why, I think that's fine," cried Ted. "Oh, Daddy, what is that? It +looks like a queer, tangled up forest, all bare branches in the +summer." + +"That's a reindeer herd lying down for their noonday rest. What you see +are their antlers. How would you like to be in the midst of that forest +of branches?" asked Mr. Strong. + +"No, thank you," said Teddy, but Kalitan said: + +"Reindeer very gentle; they will not hurt unless very much frightened." + +"What queer-looking animals they are," said Ted, as they approached +nearer. "A sort of a cross between a deer and a cow." + +"Perhaps they are more useful than handsome, but I think there is +something picturesque about them, especially when hitched to sleds and +skimming over the frozen ground." + +The farm at Teller was certainly an interesting spot. Teddy saw the deer +fed and milked, the Lapland women being experts in that line, and found +the herders, in their quaint _parkas_ tied around the waist, and +conical caps, scarcely less interesting than the deer. Two funny little +Lapp babies he took to ride on a large reindeer, which proceeding did +not frighten the babies half so much as did the white boy who put them +on the deer. A reindeer was to them an every-day occurrence, but a +Boston boy was quite another matter. + +[Illustration: "TWO FUNNY LITTLE LAPP BABIES HE TOOK TO RIDE ON A LARGE +REINDEER."] + +Better than the reindeer, however, Teddy and Kalitan liked the draught +dogs who hauled the water at the station. A great cask on wheels was +pulled by five magnificent dogs, beautiful fellows with bright alert +faces. + +"They are the most faithful creatures in the world," said Mr. Strong, +"devoted to their masters, even though the masters are cruel to them. +Reindeer can work all day without a mouthful to eat, living on one meal +at night of seven pounds of corn-meal mush, with a pound or so of dried +fish cooked into it. On long journeys they can live on dried fish and +snow, and five dogs will haul four hundred pounds thirty-five miles a +day. They carry the United States mails all over Alaska." + +"I should think the dog would be worth more than the reindeer," said +Ted. + +"Many Alaskan travellers say he is by far the best for travelling, but +he cannot feed himself on the _tundra_, nor can he be eaten himself if +necessary. The Jarvis expedition proved the value of the reindeer," said +Mr. Strong. + +"What was that?" asked Ted. + +"Some years ago a whale fleet was caught in the ice near Point Barrow, +and in danger of starving to death, and word of this was sent to the +government. The President ordered the revenue cutter _Bear_ to go as far +north as possible and send a relief party over the ice by sledge with +provisions. + +"When the _Bear_ could go no farther, her commander landed Lieutenant +Jarvis, who was familiar with the region, and a relief party. They were +to seek the nearest reindeer station and drive a reindeer herd to the +relief of the starving people. The party reached Cape Nome and secured +some deer, and the rescue was made, but under such difficulties that it +is one of the most heroic stories of the age. These men drove four +hundred reindeer over two thousand miles north of the Arctic Circle, +over frozen seas and snow-covered mountains, and found the starving +sailors, who ate the fresh reindeer meat, which lasted until the ice +melted in the spring and set them free." + +"I think that was fine," said Ted. "But it seems a little hard on the +reindeer, doesn't it, to tramp all that distance just to be eaten?" + +"Animals made for man," said Kalitan, briefly. + + * * * * * + +A golden glory filled the sky, running upwards toward the zenith, +spreading there in varying colours from palest yellow to orange and +deepest, richest red. Glowing streams of light streamed heavenward like +feathery wings, as Ted and Kalitan sailed southward, and Ted exclaimed +in wonder: "What is it?" + +"The splendour of _Saghalie Tyee_,"[16] said Kalitan, solemnly. + +"The Aurora Borealis," said Mr. Strong, "and very fortunate you are to +see it. Indeed, Teddy, you seem to have brought good luck, for +everything has gone well this trip. Our faces are turned homeward now, +but we will have to come again next summer and bring mother and Judith." + +"I'll be glad to get home to mother again," said Ted, then noting +Kalitan's wistful face, "We'll find you at Sitka and go home with you to +the island," and he put his arm affectionately over the Indian boy's +shoulder. Kalitan pointed to the sky, whence the splendour was fading, +and a flock of birds was skimming southwards. + +"From the sky fades the splendour of _Saghalie Tyee_," he said. "The +summer is gone, the birds fly southward. The light goes from me when my +White Brother goes with the birds. Unless he return with them, all is +dark for Kalitan!" + + +THE END. + +FOOTNOTE: + +[16] Way-up High Chief, i.e., God. + + + + +THE LITTLE COUSIN SERIES + + +The most delightful and interesting accounts possible of child life in +other lands, filled with quaint sayings, doings, and adventures. + +Each one vol., 12mo, decorative cover, cloth, with six or more full-page +illustrations in color. + + Price per volume $0.60 + + +_By MARY HAZELTON WADE_ (_unless otherwise indicated_) + + =Our Little African Cousin= + =Our Little Alaskan Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Arabian Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Armenian Cousin= + =Our Little Brown Cousin= + =Our Little Canadian Cousin= + By Elizabeth R. Macdonald + =Our Little Chinese Cousin= + By Isaac Taylor Headland + =Our Little Cuban Cousin= + =Our Little Dutch Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little English Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Eskimo Cousin= + =Our Little French Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little German Cousin= + =Our Little Hawaiian Cousin= + =Our Little Hindu Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Indian Cousin= + =Our Little Irish Cousin= + =Our Little Italian Cousin= + =Our Little Japanese Cousin= + =Our Little Jewish Cousin= + =Our Little Korean Cousin= + By H. Lee M. Pike + =Our Little Mexican Cousin= + By Edward C. Butler + =Our Little Norwegian Cousin= + =Our Little Panama Cousin= + By H. Lee M. Pike + =Our Little Philippine Cousin= + =Our Little Porto Rican Cousin= + =Our Little Russian Cousin= + =Our Little Scotch Cousin= + By Blanche McManus + =Our Little Siamese Cousin= + =Our Little Spanish Cousin= + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + =Our Little Swedish Cousin= + By Claire M. Coburn + =Our Little Swiss Cousin= + =Our Little Turkish Cousin= + + + + +THE GOLDENROD LIBRARY + + +The Goldenrod Library contains stories which appeal alike both to +children and to their parents and guardians. + +Each volume is well illustrated from drawings by competent artists, +which, together with their handsomely decorated uniform binding, showing +the goldenrod, usually considered the emblem of America, is a feature of +their manufacture. + + Each one volume, small 12mo, illustrated $0.35 + + +LIST OF TITLES + + =Aunt Nabby's Children.= By Frances Hodges White. + =Child's Dream of a Star, The.= By Charles Dickens. + =Flight of Rosy Dawn, The.= By Pauline Bradford Mackie. + =Findelkind.= By Ouida. + =Fairy of the Rhone, The.= By A. Comyns Carr. + =Gatty and I.= By Frances E. Crompton. + =Helena's Wonderworld.= By Frances Hodges White. + =Jerry's Reward.= By Evelyn Snead Barnett. + =La Belle Nivernaise.= By Alphonse Daudet. + =Little King Davie.= By Nellie Hellis. + =Little Peterkin Vandike.= By Charles Stuart Pratt. + =Little Professor, The.= By Ida Horton Cash. + =Peggy's Trial.= By Mary Knight Potter. + =Prince Yellowtop.= By Kate Whiting Patch. + =Provence Rose, A.= By Ouida. + =Seventh Daughter, A.= By Grace Wickham Curran. + =Sleeping Beauty, The.= By Martha Baker Dunn. + =Small, Small Child, A.= By E. Livingston Prescott. + =Susanne.= By Frances J. Delano. + =Water People, The.= By Charles Lee Sleight. + =Young Archer, The.= By Charles E. Brimblecom. + + + + +COSY CORNER SERIES + + It is the intention of the publishers that this series + shall contain only the very highest and purest + literature,--stories that shall not only appeal to the + children themselves, but be appreciated by all those + who feel with them in their joys and sorrows. + + The numerous illustrations in each book are by + well-known artists, and each volume has a separate + attractive cover design. + + Each 1 vol., 16mo, cloth $0.50 + + +_By ANNIE FELLOWS JOHNSTON_ + + +=The Little Colonel.= (Trade Mark.) + +The scene of this story is laid in Kentucky. Its heroine is a small +girl, who is known as the Little Colonel, on account of her fancied +resemblance to an old-school Southern gentleman, whose fine estate and +old family are famous in the region. + + +=The Giant Scissors.= + +This is the story of Joyce and of her adventures in France. Joyce is a +great friend of the Little Colonel, and in later volumes shares with her +the delightful experiences of the "House Party" and the "Holidays." + + +=Two Little Knights of Kentucky.= + +WHO WERE THE LITTLE COLONEL'S NEIGHBORS. + +In this volume the Little Colonel returns to us like an old friend, but +with added grace and charm. She is not, however, the central figure of +the story, that place being taken by the "two little knights." + + +=Mildred's Inheritance.= + +A delightful little story of a lonely English girl who comes to America +and is befriended by a sympathetic American family who are attracted by +her beautiful speaking voice. By means of this one gift she is enabled +to help a school-girl who has temporarily lost the use of her eyes, and +thus finally her life becomes a busy, happy one. + + +=Cicely and Other Stories for Girls.= + +The readers of Mrs. Johnston's charming juveniles will be glad to learn +of the issue of this volume for young people. + + +=Aunt 'Liza's Hero and Other Stories.= + +A collection of six bright little stories, which will appeal to all boys +and most girls. + +=Big Brother.= + +A story of two boys. The devotion and care of Steven, himself a small +boy, for his baby brother, is the theme of the simple tale. + + +=Ole Mammy's Torment.= + +"Ole Mammy's Torment" has been fitly called "a classic of Southern +life." It relates the haps and mishaps of a small negro lad, and tells +how he was led by love and kindness to a knowledge of the right. + + +=The Story of Dago.= + +In this story Mrs. Johnston relates the story of Dago, a pet monkey, +owned jointly by two brothers. Dago tells his own story, and the account +of his haps and mishaps is both interesting and amusing. + + +=The Quilt That Jack Built.= + +A pleasant little story of a boy's labor of love, and how it changed the +course of his life many years after it was accomplished. + + +=Flip's Islands of Providence.= + +A story of a boy's life battle, his early defeat, and his final triumph, +well worth the reading. + + +_By EDITH ROBINSON_ + + +=A Little Puritan's First Christmas.= + +A Story of Colonial times in Boston, telling how Christmas was invented +by Betty Sewall, a typical child of the Puritans, aided by her brother +Sam. + + +=A Little Daughter of Liberty.= + +The author introduces this story as follows: + +"One ride is memorable in the early history of the American Revolution, +the well-known ride of Paul Revere. Equally deserving of commendation is +another ride,--the ride of Anthony Severn,--which was no less historic +in its action or memorable in its consequences." + + +=A Loyal Little Maid.= + +A delightful and interesting story of Revolutionary days, in which the +child heroine, Betsey Schuyler, renders important services to George +Washington. + + +=A Little Puritan Rebel.= + +This is an historical tale of a real girl, during the time when the +gallant Sir Harry Vane was governor of Massachusetts. + + +=A Little Puritan Pioneer.= + +The scene of this story is laid in the Puritan settlement at +Charlestown. + + +=A Little Puritan Bound Girl.= + +A story of Boston in Puritan days, which is of great interest to +youthful readers. + + +=A Little Puritan Cavalier.= + +The story of a "Little Puritan Cavalier" who tried with all his boyish +enthusiasm to emulate the spirit and ideals of the dead Crusaders. + + +=A Puritan Knight Errant.= + +The story tells of a young lad in Colonial times who endeavored to carry +out the high ideals of the knights of olden days. + + +_By OUIDA_ (_Louise de la Ramee_) + + +=A Dog of Flanders=: A CHRISTMAS STORY. + +Too well and favorably known to require description. + + +=The Nurnberg Stove.= + +This beautiful story has never before been published at a popular price. + + +_By FRANCES MARGARET FOX_ + + +=The Little Giant's Neighbours.= + +A charming nature story of a "little giant" whose neighbours were the +creatures of the field and garden. + + +=Farmer Brown and the Birds.= + +A little story which teaches children that the birds are man's best +friends. + + +=Betty of Old Mackinaw.= + +A charming story of child-life, appealing especially to the little +readers who like stories of "real people." + + +=Brother Billy.= + +The story of Betty's brother, and some further adventures of Betty +herself. + + +=Mother Nature's Little Ones.= + +Curious little sketches describing the early lifetime, or "childhood," +of the little creatures out-of-doors. + + +=How Christmas Came to the Mulvaneys.= + +A bright, lifelike little story of a family of poor children, with an +unlimited capacity for fun and mischief. The wonderful never-to-be +forgotten Christmas that came to them is the climax of a series of +exciting incidents. + + +_By MISS MULOCK_ + + +=The Little Lame Prince.= + +A delightful story of a little boy who has many adventures by means of +the magic gifts of his fairy god-mother. + + +=Adventures of a Brownie.= + +The story of a household elf who torments the cook and gardener, but is +a constant joy and delight to the children who love and trust him. + + +=His Little Mother.= + +Miss Mulock's short stories for children are a constant source of +delight to them, and "His Little Mother," in this new and attractive +dress, will be welcomed by hosts of youthful readers. + + +=Little Sunshine's Holiday.= + +An attractive story of a summer outing. "Little Sunshine" is another of +those beautiful child-characters for which Miss Mulock is so justly +famous. + + +_By MARSHALL SAUNDERS_ + + +=For His Country.= + +A sweet and graceful story of a little boy who loved his country; +written with that charm which has endeared Miss Saunders to hosts of +readers. + + +=Nita, the Story of an Irish Setter.= + +In this touching little book, Miss Saunders shows how dear to her heart +are all of God's dumb creatures. + + +=Alpatok, the Story of an Eskimo Dog.= + +Alpatok, an Eskimo dog from the far north, was stolen from his master +and left to starve in a strange city, but was befriended and cared for, +until he was able to return to his owner. + + +_By WILL ALLEN DROMGOOLE_ + + +=The Farrier's Dog and His Fellow.= + +This story, written by the gifted young Southern woman, will appeal to +all that is best in the natures of the many admirers of her graceful and +piquant style. + + +=The Fortunes of the Fellow.= + +Those who read and enjoyed the pathos and charm of "The Farrier's Dog +and His Fellow" will welcome the further account of the adventures of +Baydaw and the Fellow at the home of the kindly smith. + + +=The Best of Friends.= + +This continues the experiences of the Farrier's dog and his Fellow, +written in Miss Dromgoole's well-known charming style. + + +=Down in Dixie.= + +A fascinating story for boys and girls, of a family of Alabama children +who move to Florida and grow up in the South. + + +_By MARIAN W. WILDMAN_ + + +=Loyalty Island.= + +An account of the adventures of four children and their pet dog on an +island, and how they cleared their brother from the suspicion of +dishonesty. + + +=Theodore and Theodora.= + +This is a story of the exploits and mishaps of two mischievous twins, +and continues the adventures of the interesting group of children in +"Loyalty Island." + + +_By CHARLES G. D. ROBERTS_ + + +=The Cruise of the Yacht Dido.= + +The story of two boys who turned their yacht into a fishing boat to earn +money to pay for a college course, and of their adventures while +exploring in search of hidden treasure. + + +=The Young Acadian.= + +The story of a young lad of Acadia who rescued a little English girl +from the hands of savages. + + +=The Lord of the Air.= + +THE STORY OF THE EAGLE + +=The King of the Mamozekel.= + +THE STORY OF THE MOOSE + +=The Watchers of the Camp-fire.= + +THE STORY OF THE PANTHER + +=The Haunter of the Pine Gloom.= + +THE STORY OF THE LYNX + +=The Return to the Trails.= + +THE STORY OF THE BEAR + +=The Little People of the Sycamore.= + +THE STORY OF THE RACCOON + + +_By OTHER AUTHORS_ + + +=The Great Scoop.= + +_By MOLLY ELLIOT SEAWELL_ + +A capital tale of newspaper life in a big city, and of a bright, +enterprising, likable youngster employed thereon. + + +=John Whopper.= + +The late Bishop Clark's popular story of the boy who fell through the +earth and came out in China, with a new introduction by Bishop Potter. + + +=The Dole Twins.= + +_By KATE UPSON CLARK_ + +The adventures of two little people who tried to earn money to buy +crutches for a lame aunt. An excellent description of child-life about +1812, which will greatly interest and amuse the children of to-day, +whose life is widely different. + + +=Larry Hudson's Ambition.= + +_By JAMES OTIS_, author of "Toby Tyler," etc. + +Larry Hudson is a typical American boy, whose hard work and enterprise +gain him his ambition,--an education and a start in the world. + + +=The Little Christmas Shoe.= + +_By JANE P. SCOTT WOODRUFF_ + +A touching story of Yule-tide. + + +=Wee Dorothy.= + +_By LAURA UPDEGRAFF_ + +A story of two orphan children, the tender devotion of the eldest, a +boy, for his sister being its theme and setting. With a bit of sadness +at the beginning, the story is otherwise bright and sunny, and +altogether wholesome in every way. + + +=The King of the Golden River=: A LEGEND OF STIRIA. _By JOHN RUSKIN_ + +Written fifty years or more ago, and not originally intended for +publication, this little fairy-tale soon became known and made a place +for itself. + + +=A Child's Garden of Verses.= + +_By R. L. STEVENSON_ + +Mr. Stevenson's little volume is too well known to need description. + + * * * * * + +Transcriber's Notes: + +Obvious punctuation errors repaired. Text uses both kyak and kiak for +our more modern kayak. This was retained. + +Final page of book ads, "L. R." changed to "R. L." (By R. L. Stevenson) + +Page 5, "alway" changed to "always" (always dear to a boy) + +Page 82, "Tahgeah" changed to "Tah-ge-ah" (Tah-ge-ah would take them) + +Page 83, "Kalakash" changed to "Kala-kash" (Kala-kash had not asked) + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Our Little Alaskan Cousin, by Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OUR LITTLE ALASKAN COUSIN *** + +***** This file should be named 10224.txt or 10224.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/1/0/2/2/10224/ + +Produced by Emmy, Beth Baran, Juliet Sutherland, Mary +Meehan, and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images +generously made available by The Internet Archive) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/10224.zip b/old/10224.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c35ea1 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/10224.zip diff --git a/old/old/20031124-10224.txt b/old/old/20031124-10224.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c5c263c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/20031124-10224.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2838 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Kalitan, Our Little Alaskan Cousin +by Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.net + + +Title: Kalitan, Our Little Alaskan Cousin + +Author: Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +Release Date: November 24, 2003 [EBook #10224] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK KALITAN, OUR LITTLE ALASKAN COUSIN *** + + + + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Mary Meehan, and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team. + + + + + + KALITAN + + Our Little Alaskan Cousin + + By Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +_Author of "Our Little Spanish Cousin", "With a pessimist in Spain," +"God, the King, My Brother," etc._ + + 1907 + + + + +_Illustrated_ + + +TO MY LITTLE SON John Nixon de Roulet + + + + +Preface + + +Away up toward the frozen north lies the great peninsula, which the +United States bought from the Russians, and thus became responsible for +the native peoples from whom the Russians had taken the land. + +There are many kinds of people there, from Indians to Esquimos, and they +are under the American Government, yet they have no votes and are not +called American citizens. + +It is about this country and its people that this little story is +written, and in the hope of interesting American girls and boys in these +very strange people, their Little Alaskan Cousins. + + + + +Contents + + I. KALITAN TENAS + + II. AROUND THE CAMP-FIRE + + III. TO THE GLACIER + + IV. TED MEETS MR. BRUIN + + V. A MONSTER OF THE DEEP + + VI. THE ISLAND HOME OF KALITAN + + VII. TWILIGHT TALES AND TOTEMS + + VIII. THE BERRY DANCE IX. ON THE WAY TO NOME + + X. IN THE GOLD COUNTRY + + XI. AFTERNOON TEA IN AN EGLU + + XII. THE SPLENDOUR OF SAGHALIE TYEE + + + + +List of Illustrations + +"KALITAN FISHED DILIGENTLY BUT CAUGHT LITTLE" + +"AWAY WENT ANOTHER STINGING LANCE" + +"A GROUP OF PEOPLE AWAITING THE CANOES" + +"MOUNT SHISHALDIN" + +"'LET'S WATCH THOSE TWO MEN. THEY HAVE EVIDENTLY STAKED A CLAIM +TOGETHER'" + +"TWO FUNNY LITTLE LAPP BABIES HE TOOK TO RIDE ON A LARGE REINDEER" + + + + +KALITAN + +Our Little Alaskan Cousin + + + + +CHAPTER I + +KALITAN TENAS + + +It was bitterly cold. Kalitan Tenas felt it more than he had in the long +winter, for then it was still and calm as night, and now the wind was +blowing straight in from the sea, and the river was frozen tight. A +month before, the ice had begun to break and he had thought the cold was +over, and that the all too short Alaskan summer was at hand. Now it was +the first of May, and just as he had begun to think of summer pleasures, +lo! a storm had come which seemed to freeze the very marrow of his bones. +However, our little Alaskan cousin was used to cold and trained to it, +and would not dream of fussing over a little snow-storm. + +Kalitan started out to fish for his dinner, and though the snow came down +heavily and he had to break through the ice to make a fishing-hole, and +soon the ice was a wind-swept plain where even his own tracks were +covered with a white pall, he fished steadily on. He never dreamed of +stopping until he had fish enough for dinner, for, like most of his +tribe, he was persevering and industrious. + +Kalitan was a Thlinkit, though, if you asked him, he would say he was +"Klinkit." This is a tribe which has puzzled wise people for a long +time, for the Thlinkits are not Esquimos, not Indians, not coloured +people, nor whites. They are the tribes living in Southeastern Alaska and +along the coast. Many think that a long, long time ago, they came from +Japan or some far Eastern country, for they look something like the +Japanese, and their language has many words similar to Japanese in it. + +Perhaps, long years ago, some shipwrecked Japanese were cast upon the +coast of Alaska, and, finding their boats destroyed and the land good to +live in, settled there, and thus began the Thlinkit tribes. + +The Chilcats, Haidahs, and Tsimsheans are all Thlinkits, and are by far +the best of the brown people of the Northland. They are honest, simple, +and kind, and more intelligent than the Indians living farther north, in +the colder regions. The Thlinkit coast is washed by the warm current from +the Japan Sea, and it is not much colder than Chicago or Boston, though +the winter is a little longer. + +Kalitan fished diligently but caught little. He was warmly clad in +sealskin; around his neck was a white bearskin ruff, as warm as toast, +and very pretty, too, as soft and fluffy as a lady's boa. On his feet +were moccasins of walrus hide. He had been perhaps an hour watching the +hole in the ice, and knelt there so still that he looked almost as though +he were frozen. Indeed, that was what those thought who saw him there, +for suddenly a dog-sledge came round the corner of the hill and a loud +halloo greeted his ears. + +"Boston men," he said to himself as he watched them, "lost the trail." + +They had indeed lost the trail, and Ted Strong had begun to think they +would never find it again. + +Chetwoof, their Indian guide, had not talked very much about it, but +lapsed into his favourite "No understan'," a remark he always made when +he did not want to answer what was said to him. + +Ted and his father were on their way from Sitka to the Copper River. Mr. +Strong was on the United States Geological Survey, which Ted knew meant +that he had to go all around the country and poke about all day among +rocks and mountains and glaciers. He had come with his father to this far +Alaskan clime in the happiest expectation of adventures with bears and +Indians, always dear to the heart of a boy. + +He was pretty tired of the sledge, having been in it since early morning, +and he was cold and hungry besides; so he was delighted when the dogs +stopped and his father said: + +"Hop out, son, and stretch your legs. We'll try to find out where we are +before we go any farther." + +Chetwoof meanwhile was interviewing the boy, who came quickly toward +them, "Who are you?" demanded Chetwoof. + +"Kalitan Tenas," was the brief reply. + +"Where are we?" was the next question. + +"Near to Pilchickamin River." + +"Where is a camp?" + +"There," said the boy, pointing toward a clump of pine-trees. "Ours." + +Ted by this time was tired of his own unwonted silence, and he came up to +Kalitan, holding out his hand. + +"My name is Ted Strong," he said, genially, grinning cheerfully at the +young Alaskan, "I say this is a jolly place. I wish you would teach me to +fish in a snow-hole. It must be great fun. I like you; let's be friends!" +Kalitan took the boy's hand in his own rough one. + +"Mahsie" (thank you), he said, a sudden quick smile sweeping his dark +face like a fleeting sunbeam, but disappearing as quickly, leaving it +grave again. "Olo?" (hungry). + +"Yes," said Mr. Strong, "hungry and cold." + +"Camp," said Kalitan, preparing to lead the way, with the hospitality of +his tribe, for the Thlinkits are always ready to share food and fire with +any stranger. The two boys strode off together, and Mr. Strong could +scarcely help smiling at the contrast between them. + +Ted was the taller, but slim even in the furs which almost smothered him, +leaving only his bright face exposed to the wind and weather. His hair +was a tangle of yellow curls which no parting could ever affect, for it +stood straight up from his forehead like a golden fleece; his mother +called it his aureole. His skin was fair as a girl's, and his eyes as big +and blue as a young Viking's; but the Indian boy's locks were black as +ink, his skin was swarthy, his eyes small and dark, and his features that +strange mixture of the Indian, the Esquimo, and the Japanese which we +often see in the best of our Alaskan cousins. + +Boys, however, are boys all the world over, and friendly animals, and Ted +was soon chattering away to his newly found friend as if he had known +him all his life. + +"What's your name?" he asked. + +"Kalitan," was the answer. "They call me Kalitan Tenas;[1] my father +was Tyee." + +[Footnote 1: Little Arrow.] + +"Where is he?" asked Ted. He wanted to see an Indian chief. + +"Dead," said Kalitan, briefly. + +"I'm sorry," said Ted. He adored his own father, and felt it was hard on +a boy not to have one. + +"He was killed," said Kalitan, "but we had blood-money from them," he +added, sternly. + +"What's that?" asked Ted, curiously. + +"Long time ago, when one man kill another, his clan must +pay with a life. One must be found from his tribe to cry? +'O-o-o-o-o-a-ha-a-ich-klu-kuk-ich-klu-kuk'" (ready to die, ready to +die). His voice wailed out the mournful chant, which was weird and solemn +and almost made Ted shiver. "But now," the boy went on? "Boston men" +(Americans) "do not like the blood-tax, so the murderer pays money +instead. We got many blankets and baskets and moneys for Kalitan Tyee. He +great chief." + +"Do you live here?" asked Ted. + +"No, live on island out there." Kalitan waved his hand seaward. "Come to +fish with my uncle, Klake Tyee. This good fishing-ground." + +"It's a pretty fine country," said Ted, glancing at the scene, which bore +charm to other than boyish eyes. To the east were the mountains +sheltering a valley through which the frozen river wound like a silver +ribbon, widening toward the sea. A cold green glacier filled the valley +between two mountains with its peaks of beauty. Toward the shore, which +swept in toward the river's mouth in a sheltered cove, were clumps of +trees, giant fir, aspen, and hemlock, green and beautiful, while seaward +swept the waves in white-capped loveliness. + +Kalitan ushered them to the camp with great politeness and +considerable pride. + +"You've a good place to camp," said Mr. Strong, "and we will gladly share +your fire until we are warm enough to go on." + +Ted's face fell. "Must we go right away?" he asked. "This is such a +jolly place." + +"No go to-day," said Kalitan, briefly, to Chetwoof. "_Colesnass_."[2] + +[Footnote 2: Snow.] + +"Huh!" said Chetwoof. "Think some." + +"Here comes my uncle," said Kalitan, and he ran eagerly to meet an old +Indian who came toward the camp from the shore. He eagerly explained the +situation to the Tyee, who welcomed the strangers with grave politeness. +He was an old-man, with a seamed, scarred faces but kindly eyes. Chief of +the Thlinkits, his tribe was scattered, his children dead, and Kalitan +about all left to him of interest in life. + +"There will be more snow," he said to Mr. Strong. "You are welcome. Stay +and share our fire and food." + +"Do let us stay, father," cried Ted, and his father smiled indulgently, +but Kalitan looked at him in astonishment. Alaskan boys are taught to +hold their tongues and let their elders decide matters, and Kalitan would +never have dreamed of teasing for anything. + +But Mr. Strong did not wish to face another snow-storm in the sledge, and +knew he could work but little till the storm was passed; so he readily +consented to stay a few days and let Ted see some real Alaskan hunting +and fishing. + +Both boys were delighted, and soon had the camp rearranged to +accommodate the strangers. The fire was built up, Ted and Kalitan +gathering cones and fir branches, which made a fragrant blaze, while +Chetwoof cared for the dogs, and the old chief helped Mr. Strong pitch +his tent in the lee of some fragrant firs. Soon all was prepared and +supper cooking over the coals,--a supper of fresh fish and seal fat, +which Alaskans consider a great delicacy, and to which Mr. Strong added +coffee and crackers from his stores,--and Indians and whites ate +together in friendliness and amity. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +AROUND THE CAMP-FIRE + + +"How does if happen that you speak English, Kalitan?" asked Mr. Strong as +they sat around the camp-fire that evening. The snow had continued during +the afternoon, and the boys had had an exciting time coasting and +snow-balling and enjoying themselves generally. + +"I went for a few months to the Mission School at Wrangel," said Kalitan. +"I learned much there. They teach the boys to read and write and do sums +and to work the ground besides. They learn much more than the girls." +"Huh!" said the old chief, grimly. "Girls learn too much. They no good +for Indian wives, and white men not marry them. Best for girls to stay at +home at the will of their fathers until they get husbands." + +"So you've been in Wrangel," said Ted to Kalitan. "We went there, too. +It's a dandy place. Do you remember the fringe of white mountains back of +the harbour? The people said the woods were full of game, but we didn't +have time to go hunting. There are a few shops there, but it seemed to me +a very small place to have been built since 1834. In the States whole +towns grow up in two or three weeks." + +"Huh!" said Kalitan, with a quick shrug of his shoulders, "quick grow, +sun fade and wind blow down." + +"I don't think the sun could ever fade in Wrangel," laughed Ted. "They +told me there it hadn't shone but fifteen days in three months. It rained +all the time." + +"Rain is nothing," said Kalitan. "It is when the Ice Spirit speaks in the +North Wind's roar and in the crackling of the floes that we tremble. The +glaciers are the children of the Mountain Spirit whom our fathers +worshipped. He is angry, and lo! he hurls down icebergs in his wrath, he +tosses them about, upon the streams he tosses the _kyaks_ like feathers +and washes the land with the waves of Sitth. When our people are buried +in the ground instead of being burnt with the fire, they must go for ever +to the place of Sitth, of everlasting cold, where never sun abides, nor +rain, nor warmth." + +Ted had listened spellbound to this poetic speech and gazed at Kalitan in +open-mouthed amazement. A boy who could talk like that was a new and +delightful playmate, and he said: "Tell me more about things, Kalitan," +but the Indian was silent, ashamed of having spoken. + +"What do you do all day when you are at home?" persisted the American. + +"In winter there is nothing to do but to hunt and fish," said Kalitan. +"Sometimes we do not find much game, then we think of how, when a +Thlinkit dies, he has plenty. If he has lived as a good tribesman, his +kyak glides smoothly over the silver waters into the sunset, until, o'er +gently flowing currents, it reaches the place of the mighty forest. A bad +warrior's canoe passes dark whirlpools and terrible rapids until he +reaches the place we speak not of, where reigns Sitth. + +"In the summer-time we still hunt and fish. Many have learned to till +the ground, and we gather berries and wood for the winter. The other +side of the inlet, the tree-trunks drift from the Yukon and are stranded +on the islands, so there is plenty for firewood. But upon our island +the women gather a vine and dry it. They collect seaweed for food in the +early spring, and dry it and press it into square cakes, which make good +food after they have hung long In the sun. They make baskets and sell +them to the white people. Often my uncle and I take them to Valdez, and +once we brought back fifty dollars for those my mother made. There is +always much to do." + +"Don't you get terribly cold hunting in the winter?" asked Ted. + +"Thlinkit boy not a baby," said Kalitan, a trifle scornfully. "We begin +to be hardened when we are babies. When I was five years old, I left my +father and went to my uncle to be taught. Every morning I bathed in the +ocean, even if I had to break ice to find water, and then I rolled in the +snow. After that my uncle brushed me with a switch bundle, and not +lightly, for his arm is strong. I must not cry out, no matter if he hurt, +for a chief's son must never show, pain nor fear. That would give his +people shame." + +"Don't you get sick?" asked Ted? who felt cold all over at the idea of +being treated in such a heroic manner. + +"The _Kooshta_[3] comes sometimes," said Kalitan, "The Shaman[4] used to +cast him out, but now the white doctor can do it, unless the _kooshta_ is +too strong." + +[Footnote 3: Kooshta, a spirit in animal's form which inhabits the body +of sick persons and must be cast out, according to Thlinkit belief.] + +[Footnote 4: Shaman, native medicine-man.] + +Ted was puzzled as to Kalitan's exact meaning, but did not like to ask +too many questions for fear of being impolite, so he only said: "Being +sick is not very nice, anyhow." + +"To be bewitched is the most terrible," said Kalitan, gravely. + +"How does that happen?" asked Ted, eagerly, but Kalitan shook his head. + +"It is not good to hear," he said. "The medicine-man must come with his +drum and rattle, and he is very terrible. If the white men will not allow +any more the punishing of the witches, they should send more of the white +medicine-men, if we are not to have any more of our own." + +"Boys should not talk about big things," said the old chief suddenly. He +had been sitting quietly over the fire, and spoke so suddenly that +Kalitan collapsed into silence. Ted, too, quieted down at the old chiefs +stern voice and manner, and both boys sat and listened to the men +talking, while the snow still swirled about them. + +Tyee Klake told Mr. Strong many interesting things about the coast +country, and gave him valuable information as to the route he should +pursue in his search for interesting things in the mountains. + +"It will be two weeks before the snow will break so you can travel in +comfort," he said. "Camp with us. We remain here one week, then we go to +the island. We can take you there, you will see many things, and your boy +will hunt with Kalitan." + +"Where is your island?" asked Mr. Strong. + +Ted said nothing, but his eyes were fixed eagerly upon his father. It was +easy to see that he wished to accept the invitation. + +"Out there." Tyee Klake pointed toward where the white coast-line seemed +to fade into silvery blue. + +"There are many islands; on some lives no one, but we have a village. +Soon it will be nearly deserted, for many of our people rove during the +summer, and wander from one camping-ground to another, seeking the best +game or fish. But Kalitan's people remain always on the island. Him I +take with me to hunt the whale and seal, to gather the berries, and to +trap the little animals who bear fur. We find even seal upon our shores, +though fewer since your people have come among us." + +"Which were the best, Russians or Americans?" asked Mr. Strong, +curious to see what the old Indian would say, but the Tyee was not to +be caught napping. + +"Men all alike." he said. "Thlinkit, Russian, American, some good, some +bad. Russians used Indians more, gave them hunting and fishing, and only +took part of the skins. Americans like to hunt and fish all themselves +and leave nothing for the Indians. Russians teach _quass_, Americans +teach whiskey. Before white men came, Indians were healthy. They ate +fish, game, berries; now they must have other foods, and they're not good +for Indians here."--he touched his stomach. "Indian used to dress in +skins and furs, now he must copy white man and shiver with cold. He soon +has the coughing sickness and then he goes into the unknown. + +"But the government of the Americans is best because it tries to do some +things for the Indian. It teaches our boys useful things in the schools, +and, if some of its people are bad, some Indians are bad, too. Men all +alike," he repeated with the calm stoicism of his race. + +"The government is far away," said Mr. Strong, "and should not be blamed +for the doings of all its servants. I should like to see this island home +of yours, and think we must accept your invitation; shall we, Ted?" he +smiled at the boy. + +"Yes, indeed; thank you, sir," said Ted, and he and Kalitan grinned at +each other happily. + +"We shall stay in camp until the blue jay comes," said the old chief, +smiling, "and then seek the village of my people." + +"What does the blue jay mean?" asked Ted, timidly, for he was very much +in awe of this grave old man. + +Kalitan said something in Thlinkit to his uncle, and the old chief, +looking kindly at the boy, replied with, a nod: + +"I will tell you the story of the blue jay," he said. + +"My story is of the far, far north. Beside a salmon stream there dwelt +people rich in slaves. These caught and dried the salmon for the winter, +and nothing is better to eat than dried salmon dipped in seal oil. All +the fish were caught and stored away, when lo! the whiteness fell from +heaven and the snows were upon them. It was the time of snow and they +should not have complained, but the chief was evil and he cursed the +whiteness. No one should dare to speak evil of the Snow Spirit, which +comes from the Unknown! Deeper and deeper grew the snow. It flew like +feathers about the _eglu_,[5] and the slaves had many troubles in +putting in limbs for the fire. Then the snow came in flakes so large they +seemed like the wings of birds, and the house was covered, and they could +no longer keep their _kyaks_ on top of the snow. All were shut tight in +the house, and their fire and food ran low. They knew not how many days +they were shut in, for there was no way to tell the day from night, only +they knew they were sore hungry and that the Snow Spirit was angry and +terrible in his anger. + +[Footnote 5: Hut.] + +"But each one spoke not; he only chose a place where he should lie down +and die when he could bear no more. + +"Only the chief spoke, and he once. 'Snow Spirit,' he said aloud, 'I +alone am evil. These are not so. Slay me and spare!' But the Snow Spirit +answered not, only the wind screamed around the _eglu_, and his screams +were terrible and sad. Then hope left the heart of the chief and he +prepared to die with all his people and all his slaves. + +"But on the day when their last bit of food was gone, lo! something +pecked at the top of the smoke-hole, and it sang 'Nuck-tee,' and it was a +blue jay. The chief heard and saw and wondered, and, looking 'neath the +smoke-hole, he saw a scarlet something upon the floor. Picking it up, he +found it was a bunch of Indian tomato berries, red and ripe, and quickly +hope sprang in his breast. + +"'Somewhere is summer,' he cried, 'Let us up and away.' + +"Then the slaves hastened to dig out the canoe, and they drew it with +mighty labour, for they were weak from fasting, over the snows to the +shore, and there they launched it without sail or paddle, with all the +people rejoicing. And after a time the wind carried them to a beach +where all was summer. Birds sang, flowers bloomed, and berries gleamed +scarlet in the sun, and there were salmon jumping in the blue water. +They ate and were satisfied, for it was summer on the earth and summer +in their hearts. + +"That is how the Thlinkits came to our island, and so we say when the +snow breaks, that now comes the blue jays." + +"Thank you for telling us such a dandy story." cried Ted, who had not +lost a word of this quaint tale, told so graphically over the camp-fire +of the old chief Klake. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +TO THE GLACIER + + +Ted slept soundly all night, wrapped in the bearskins from the sledge, +in the little tent he shared with his father. When the morning broke, he +sprang to his feet and hurried out of doors, hopeful for the day's +pleasures. The snow had stopped, but the ground was covered with a thick +white pall, and the mountains were turned to rose colour in the morning +sun, which was rising in a blaze of glory. + +"Good morning, Kalitan," shouted Ted to his Indian friend, whom he +spied heaping wood upon the camp-fire. "Isn't it dandy? What can we +do to-day?" + +"Have breakfast," said Kalitan, briefly. "Then do what Tyee says." + +"Well, I hope he'll say something exciting." said Ted. + +"Think good day to hunt," said Kalitan, as he prepared things for the +morning meal. + +"Where did you get the fish?" asked Ted. + +"Broke ice-hole and fished when I got up," said the Thlinkit. + +"You don't mean you have been fishing already," exclaimed the lazy Ted, +and Kalitan smiled as he said: + +"White people like fish. Tyee said: 'Catch fish for Boston men's +breakfast,' and I go." + +"Do you always mind him like that?" asked Ted. He generally obeyed his +father, but there were times when he wasn't anxious to and argued a +little about it. Kalitan looked at him in astonishment. + +"He chief!" he said, simply. + +"What will we do with the camp if we all go hunting?" asked Ted. + +"Nothing," said Kalitan. + +"Leave Chetwoof to watch, I suppose," I continued Ted. + +"Watch? Why?" asked Kalitan. + +"Why, everything; some one will steal our things," said Ted. + +"Thlinkits not steal," said Kalitan, with dignity. "Maybe white man come +along and steal from his brothers; Indians not. If we go away to long +hunt, we _cache_ blankets and no one would touch." + +"What do you mean by _cache_?" asked Ted. + +"We build a mound hut near the house, and put there the blankets and +stores. Sometime they stay there for years, but no one would take from a +_cache_. If one has plenty of wood by the seashore or in the forest, he +may cord it and go his way and no one will touch it. A deer hangs on a +tree where dogs may not reach it, but no stray hunter would slice even a +piece. We are not thieves." + +"It is a pity you could not send missionaries to the States, you +Thlinkits, my boy," said Mr. Strong, who had come up in time to hear +Kalitan's words, "I'm afraid white people are less honest." + +"Teddy, do you know we are to have some hunting to-day, and that you'll +get your first experience with a glacier." + +"Hurrah," shouted Ted, dancing up and down in excitement. + +"Tyee Klake says we can hunt toward the base of the glacier, and I +shall try to go a little ways upon it and see how the land lies, or, +rather, the ice. It is getting warmer, and, if it continues a few days, +the snow will melt enough to let us go over to that island you are so +anxious to see." + +Ted's eyes shone, and the amount of breakfast he put away quite prepared +him for his day's work, which, pleasant though it might be, certainly was +hard work. The chief said they must seek the glacier first before the sun +got hot, for it was blinding on the snow. So they set out soon after +breakfast, leaving Chetwoof in charge of the camp, and with orders to +catch enough fish for dinner. + +"We'll be ready to eat them, heads and tails," said Ted, and his father +added, laughingly: + +"'Bible, bones, and hymn-book, too.'" + +"What does that mean?" asked Ted, as Kalitan looked up inquiringly. + +"Once a writer named Macaulay said he could make a rhyme for any word in +the English language, and a man replied, 'You can't rhyme Timbuctoo.' But +he answered without a pause: + +"If I were a Cassowary +On the plains of Timbuctoo, +I'd eat up a missionary, +Bible, bones, and hymn-book, too." + +Ted laughed, but Kalitan said, grimly: + +"Not good to eat Boston missionary, he all skin and bone!" + +"Where did they get the name Alaska?" asked Ted, as they tramped over the +snow toward the glacier. + +"Al-ay-ck-sa--great country," said Kalitan. + +"It certainly is," said Ted. "It's fine! I never saw anything like this +at home," pointing as he spoke to the scene in front of him. + +A group of evergreen trees, firs and the Alaska spruce, so useful for +fires and torches, fringed the edge of the ice-field, green and verdant +in contrast to the gleaming snows of the mountain, which rose in a gentle +slope at first, then precipitously, in a dazzling and enchanting +combination of colour. It was as if some marble palace of old rose before +them against the heavens, for the ice was cut and serrated into spires +and gables, turrets and towers, all seeming to be ornamented with +fretwork where the sun's rays struck the peaks and turned them into +silver and gold. Lower down the ice looked like animals, so twisted was +it into fantastic shapes; fierce sea monsters with yawning mouths +seeming ready to devour; bears and wolves, whales, gigantic elephants, +and snowy tigers, tropic beasts looking strangely out of place in this +arctic clime. + +Deep crevices cut the ice-fields, and in their green-blue depths lurked +death, for the least misstep would dash the traveller into an abyss which +had no bottom. Beyond the glacier itself, the snow-capped mountains rose +grand and serene, their glittering peaks clear against the blue sky, +which hue the glacier reflected and played with in a thousand glinting +shades, from purpling amethyst to lapis lazuli and turquoise. + +As they gazed spellbound, a strange thing occurred, a thing of such +wonder and beauty that Ted could but grasp his father's arm in silence. + +Suddenly the peaks seemed to melt away, the white ice-pinnacles became +real turrets, houses and cathedrals appeared, and before them arose a +wonderful city of white marble, dream-like and shadowy, but beautiful as +Aladdin's palace in the "Arabian Nights." At last Ted could keep silent +no longer. + +"What is it?" he cried, and the old chief answered, gravely: + +"The City of the Dead," but his father said: + +"A mirage, my boy. They are often seen in these regions, but you are +fortunate in seeing one of the finest I have ever witnessed." + +"What is a mirage?" demanded Ted. + +"An optical delusion," said his father, "and one I am sure I couldn't +explain so that you would understand it. The queer thing about a mirage +is that you usually see the very thing most unlikely to be found in that +particular locality. In the Sahara, men see flowers and trees and +fountains, and here on this glacier we see a splendid city." + +"It certainly is queer. What makes glaciers, daddy?" Ted was even more +interested than usual in his father's talk because of Kalitan, whose dark +eyes never left Mr. Strong's face, and who seemed to drink in every word +of information as eagerly as a thirsty bird drinks water. + +"The dictionaries tell you that glaciers are fields of ice, or snow and +ice, formed in the regions of perpetual snow, and moving slowly down the +mountain slopes or valleys. Many people say the glaciers are the fathers +of the icebergs which float at sea, and that these are broken off the +glacial stream, but others deny this. When the glacial ice and snow +reaches a point where the air is so warm that the ice melts as fast as it +is pushed down from above, the glacier ends and a river begins. These are +the finest glaciers in the world, except, perhaps, those of the +Himalayas. + +"This bids fair to be a wonderfully interesting place for my work, Ted, +and I'm glad you're likely to be satisfied with your new friends, for I +shall have to go to many places and do a lot of things less interesting +than the things Kalitan can show you. + +"See these blocks of fine marble and those superb masses of porphyry and +chalcedony,--but there's something which will interest you more. Take my +gun and see if you can't bring down a bird for supper." + +Wild ducks were flying low across the edge of the glacier and quite near +to the boys, and Ted grasped his father's gun in wild excitement. He was +never allowed to touch a gun at home. Dearly as he loved his mother, it +had always seemed very strange to him that she should show such poor +taste about firearms, and refuse to let him have any; and now that he had +a gun really in his hands, he could hardly hold it, he was so excited. Of +course it was not the first time, for his father had allowed him to +practise shooting at a mark ever since they had reached Alaska, but this +was the first time he had tried to shoot a living target. He selected +his duck, aimed quickly, and fired. Bang! Off went the gun, and, wonder +of wonders! two ducks fell instead of one. + +"Well done, Ted, that duck was twins," cried his father, laughing, almost +as excited as the boy himself, and they ran to pick up the birds. Kalitan +smiled, too, and quietly picked up one, saying: + +"This one Kalitan's," showing, as he spoke, his arrow through the bird's +side, for he had discharged an arrow as Ted fired his gun. + +"Too bad, Ted. I thought you were a mighty hunter, a Nimrod who killed +two birds with one stone," said Mr. Strong, but Ted laughed and said: + +"So I got the one I shot at, I don't care." They had wild duck at +supper that night, for Chetwoof plucked the birds and roasted them on a +hot stone over the spruce logs, and Ted, tired and wet and hungry, +thought he had never tasted such a delicious meal in his life. + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +TED MEETS MR. BRUIN + + +It seemed to Ted as if he had scarcely touched the pillow on the nights +which followed before it was daylight, and he would awake to find the sun +streaming in at his tent flap. He always meant to go fishing with Kalitan +before breakfast, so the moment he woke up he jumped out of bed, if his +pile of fragrant pine boughs covered with skins could be called a bed, +and hurried through his toilet. Quick as he tried to be, however, he was +never ready before Kalitan, for, when Ted appeared, the Indian boy had +always had his roll in the snow and was preparing his lines. + +Kalitan was perfectly fascinated with the American boy. He thought him +the most wonderful specimen of a boy that he had ever seen. He knew so +much that Kalitan did not, and talked so brightly that being with Ted was +to the Indian like having a book without the bother of reading. There +were some things about him that Kalitan could not understand, to be sure. +Ted talked to his father just as if he were another boy. He even spoke to +Tyee Klake on occasions when that august personage had not only not asked +him a question, but was not speaking at all. From the Thlinkit point of +view, this was a most remarkable performance on Ted's part, but Kalitan +thought it must be all right for a "Boston boy," for even the stern old +chief seemed to regard happy-go-lucky Ted with approval. + +Ted, on the other hand, thought Kalitan the most remarkable boy he had +ever met in all his life. He had not been much with boys. His "Lady +Mother," as he always called the gentle, brown-eyed being who ruled his +father and himself had not cared to have her little Galahad mingle with +the rougher city boys who thronged the streets, and had kept him with +herself a great deal. Ted had loved books, and he and his little sister +Judith had lived in a pleasant atmosphere of refinement, playing happily +together until the boy had grown almost to dread anything common or low. +His mother knew he had moral courage, and would face any issue pluckily, +but his father feared he would grow up a milksop, and thought he needed +hardening. + +Mrs. Strong objected to the hardening process if it consisted in turning +her boy loose to learn the ways of the city streets, but had consented to +his going with his father, urged thereto by fears for his health, which +was not of the best, and the knowledge that he had reached the "bear and +Indian" age, and it was certainly a good thing for him to have his +experiences first-hand. + +To Ted the whole thing was perfectly delightful. When he lay down at +night, he would often like to see "Mother and Ju," but he was generally +so tired that he was asleep before he had time to think enough to be +really homesick. During the day there was too much doing to have any +thinking time, and, since he had met this boy friend, he thought of +little else but him and what they were to do next. The Tyee had assured +Mr. Strong that it was perfectly safe for the boys to go about together. + +"Kalitan knows all the trails," he said. "He take care of white brother. +Anything come, call Chetwoof." + +As Mr. Strong was very anxious to penetrate the glacier under Klake's +guidance, and wanted Ted to enjoy himself to the full, he left the boys +to themselves, the only stipulation being that they should not go on the +water without Chetwoof. + +There seemed to be always something new to do. As the days grew warmer, +the ice broke in the river, and the boys tramped all over the country. +Ted learned to use the bow and arrow, and brought down many a bird for +supper, and proud he was when he served up for his father a wild duck, +shot, plucked, and cooked all by himself. + +They fished in the stream by day and set lines by night. They trapped +rabbits and hares in the woods, and one day even got a silver fox, a skin +greatly prized by the fur traders on account of its rarity. Kalitan +insisted that Ted should have it, though he could have gotten forty +dollars for it from a white trader, and Ted was rejoiced at the idea of +taking it home to make a set of furs for Judith. + +One day Ted had a strange experience, and not a very pleasant one, which +might have been very serious had it not been for Kalitan. He had noticed +a queer-looking plant on the riverbank the day before, and had stopped to +pick it up, when he received such a sudden and unexpected pricking as to +cause him to jump back and shout for Kalitan. His hand felt as if it had +been pierced by a thousand needles, and he flew to a snow-bank to rub it +with snow. + +"I must have gotten hold of some kind of a cactus," he said to Kalitan, +who only replied: + +"Huh! picked hedgehog," as he pointed to where Ted's cactus was ambling +indignantly away with every quill rattling and set straight out in anger +at having his morning nap disturbed. Kalitan wrapped Ted's hand in soft +mud, which took the pain out, but he couldn't use it much for the next +few days, and did not feel eager to hunt when his father and the Tyee +started out in the morning. Kalitan remained with him, although his eyes +looked wistful, for he had heard the chief talk about bear tracks having +been seen the day before. Bears were quite a rarity, but sometimes an old +cinnamon or even a big black bruin would venture down in search of fresh +fish, which he would catch cleverly with his great paws. + +Kalitan and Ted fished awhile, and then Ted wandered away a little, +wondering what lay around a point of rock which he had never yet +explored. Something lay there which he had by no means expected to see, +and he scarcely knew what to make of it. On the river-bank, close to the +edge of the stream, was a black figure, an Indian fishing, as he +supposed, and he paused to watch. The fisherman was covered with fur +from head to foot, and, as Ted watched him, he seemed to have no line or +rod. Going nearer, the boy grew even more puzzled? and, though the man's +back was toward him, he could easily see that there was something +unusual about the figure. Just as he was within hailing distance and +about to shout, the figure made a quick dive toward the water and sprang +back again with a fish between his paws, and Ted saw that it was a huge +bear. He gave a sharp cry and then stood stock-still. The creature +looked around and stood gnawing his fish and staring at Ted as stupidly +as the boy stared at him. Then Ted heard a halloo behind him and +Kalitan's voice: + +"Run for Chetwoof, quick!" + +Ted obeyed as the animal started to move off. He ran toward the camp, +hearing the report of Kalitan's gun as he ran. Chetwoof, hearing the +noise, hurried out, and it was but a few moments before he was at +Kalitan's side. To Ted it seemed like a day before he could get back and +see what was happening, but he arrived on the scene in time to see +Chetwoof despatch the animal. + +"Hurrah!" cried Ted. "You've killed a bear," but Chetwoof only +grunted crossly. + +"Very bad luck!" he said, and Kalitan explained: + +"Indians don't like to kill bears or ravens. Spirits in them, maybe +ancestors." + +Ted looked at him in great astonishment, but Kalitan explained: + +"Once, long ago, a Thlinkit girl laughed at a bear track in the snow and +said: 'Ugly animal must have made that track!' But a bear heard and was +angry. He seized the maiden and bore her to his den, and turned her into +a bear, and she dwelt with him, until one day her brother killed the bear +and she was freed. And from that day Thlinkits speak respectfully of +bears, and do not try to kill them, for they know not whether it is a +bear or a friend who hides within the shaggy skin." + +The Tyee and Mr. Strong were greatly surprised when they came home to +see the huge carcass of Mr. Bruin, and they listened to the account of +Kalitan's bravery. The old chief said little, but he looked approvingly +at Kalitan, and said "Hyas kloshe" (very good), which unwonted praise +made the boy's face glow with pleasure. They had a great discussion as +to whom the bear really belonged. Ted had found him, Kalitan had shot +him first, and Chetwoof had killed him, so they decided to go shares. +Ted wanted the skin to take home, and thought it would make a splendid +rug for his mother's library, so his father paid Kalitan and Chetwoof +what each would have received as their share had the skin been sold to +a trader, and they all had bear meat for supper. Ted thought it finer +than any beefsteak he had ever eaten, and over it Kalitan smacked his +lips audibly. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +A MONSTER OF THE DEEP + + +The big bear occupied considerable attention for several days. He had to +be carefully skinned and part of the meat dried for future use. Alaskans +never use salt for preserving meat. Indeed they seem to dislike salt very +much. It had taken Ted some time to learn to eat all his meat and fish +quite fresh, without a taste of salt, but he had grown to like it. There +is something in the sun and wind of Alaska which cures meat perfectly, +and the bear's meat was strung on sticks and dried in the sun so that +they might enjoy it for a long time. + +It seemed as if the adventure with Bruin was enough to last the boys for +several days, for Ted's hand still pained him from the porcupine's +quills, and he felt tired and lazy. He lay by the camp-fire one afternoon +listening to Kalitan's tales of his island home, when his father came in +from a long tramp, and, looking at him a little anxiously, asked: + +"What's the matter, son?" + +"Nothing, I'm only tired," said Ted, but Kalitan said: + +"Porcupine quills poison hand. Well in a few days." + +"So your live cactus is getting in his work, is he? I'm glad it wasn't +the bear you mistook for an Alaskan posy and tried to pick. I'm tired +myself," and Mr. Strong threw himself down to rest. + +"Daddy, how did we come to have Alaska, anyway?" + +"Well, that's a long story," said his father, "but an interesting one." + +"Do tell us about it," urged Ted. "I know we bought it, but what did we +pay the Indians for it? I shouldn't have thought they'd have sold such a +fine country." + +Kalitan looked up quickly, and there was a sudden gleam in his dark eyes +that Ted had never seen before. + +"Thlinkits never sell," he said. "Russians steal." + +Mr. Strong put his hand kindly on the boy's head. + +"You're right, Kalitan," he said "The Russians never conquered the +Thlinkits, the bravest tribe in all Alaska. + +"You see, Teddy, it was this way. A great many years ago, about 1740, a +Danish sailor named Bering, who was in the service of the Russians, +sailed across the ocean and discovered the strait named for him, and a +number of islands. Some of these were not inhabited; others had Indians +or Esquimos on them, but, after the manner of the early discoverers, +Bering took possession of them all in the name of the Emperor of Russia. +It doesn't seem right as we look at things now, but in those days 'might +made right,' and it was just the same way the English did when they came +to America. + +"The Russians settled here, finding the fishing and furs fine things for +trade, and driving the Indians, who would not yield to them, farther and +farther inland. In 1790 the Czar made Alexander Baranoff manager of the +trading company. Baranoff established trading-posts in various places, +and settled at Sitka, where you can see the ruins of the splendid castle +he built. The Russians also sent missionaries to convert the Indians to +the Greek Church, which is the church of Russia. The Indians, however, +never learned to care for the Russians, and often were cruelly treated by +them. The Russians, however, tried to do something for their education, +and established several schools. One as early as 1775, on Kadiak Island, +had thirty pupils, who studied arithmetic, reading, navigation, and four +of the mechanical trades, and this is a better record than the American +purchasers can show, I am sorry to say. + +"One of the recent travellers[6] in Alaska says that he met in the +country 'American citizens who never in their lives heard a prayer for +the President of the United States, nor of the Fourth of July, nor the +name of the capital of the nation, but who have been taught to pray for +the Emperor of Russia, to celebrate his birthday, and to commemorate the +victories of ancient Greece.' In March, 1867, the Russians sold Alaska to +the United States for $7,200,000 in gold. It was bought for a song +almost, when we consider the immense amount of money made for the +government by the seal fisheries, the cod and salmon industries, and the +opening of the gold fields. The resources of the country are not +half-known, and the government is beginning to see this. That is one of +the reasons they have sent me here, with the other men, to find out what +the earth holds for those who do not know how to look for its treasures. +Gold is not the best thing the earth produces. There is land in Alaska +little known full of coal and other useful minerals. Other land is +covered with magnificent timber which could be shipped to all parts of +the world. There are pasture-lands where stock will fatten like pigs +without any other feeding; there are fertile soils which will raise +almost any crops, and there are intelligent Indians who can be taught to +work and be useful members of society. I do not mean dragged off to the +United States to learn things they could never use in their home lives, +but who should be educated here to make the best of their talents in +their home surroundings. + +[Footnote 6: Dr. Sheldon Jackson, General Agent of Education in the +Territory.] + +"That is one crying shame to our government, that they have neglected the +Alaskan citizens. Forty years have been wasted, but we are beginning to +wake up now, and twenty years more will see the Indians of Kalitan's +generation industrious men and women, not only clever hunters and +fishermen, but lumbermen, coopers, furniture makers, farmers, miners, and +stock-raisers." + +At this moment their quiet conversation was interrupted by a wild shout +from the shore, and, springing to their feet, they saw Chetwoof +gesticulating wildly and shouting to the Tyee, who had been mending his +canoe by the riverbank. Kalitan dropped everything and ran without a +word, scudding like the arrow from which he took his name. Before Ted +could follow or ask what was the matter, from the ocean a huge body +rose ten feet out of the water spouting jets of spray twenty feet into +the air, the sun striking his sides and turning them to glistening +silver. Then it fell back, the waters churning into frothy foam for a +mile around. + +"It's a whale, Ted, sure as you live. Luck certainly is coming your way," +said his father; but, at the word "whale," Ted had started after Kalitan, +losing no time in getting to the scene of action as fast as possible. + +"Watch the Tyee!" called Kalitan over his shoulder, as both boys ran down +to the water's edge. + +The old chief was launching his _kiak_ into the seething waters, and to +Ted it seemed incredible that he meant to go in that frail bark in +pursuit of the mighty monster. The old man's face, however, was as calm +as though starting on a pleasure-trip in peaceful waters, and Ted watched +in breathless admiration to see what would happen next. Klake paddled +swiftly out to sea, drawing as near as he dared to where the huge monster +splashed idly up and down like a great puppy at play. He stopped the +_kiak_ and watched; then poised his spear and threw it, and so swift and +graceful was his gesture that Ted exclaimed in amazement. + +"Tyee Klake best harpoon-thrower of all the Thlinkits;" said Kalitan, +proudly. "Watch!" + +Ted needed no such instructions. His keen eyes passed from fish to man +and back again, and no movement of the Tyee escaped him. + +The instant the harpoon was thrown, the Tyee paddled furiously away, for +when a harpoon strikes a whale, he is likely to lash violently with his +tail, and may destroy his enemy, and this is a moment of terrible danger +to the harpooner. But the whale was too much astonished to fight, and, +with a terrific splash, he dived deep, deep into the water, to get rid of +that stinging thing in his side, in the cold green waters below. + +[Illustration: "AWAY WENT ANOTHER STINGING LANCE."] + +The Tyee waited, his grim face tense and earnest. It might have been +fifteen minutes, for whales often stay under water for twenty minutes +before coming to the surface to breathe, but to Kalitan and Ted it +seemed an hour. + +Then the spray dashed high into the air again, and the instant the huge +body appeared, Klake drew near, and away went another stinging lance +again, swift and, oh! so sure of aim. This time the whale struck out +wildly, and Kalitan held his breath, while Ted gasped at the Tyee's +danger, for his _kiak_ rocked like a shell and then was quite hidden +from their sight by the spray which was dashed heavenward like clouds of +white smoke. + +Once more the creature dived, and this time he stayed down only a few +minutes, and, when he came up, blood spouted into the air and dyed the +sea crimson, and Kalitan exclaimed: + +"Pierced his lungs! Now he must die." + +There was one more bright, glancing weapon flying through the air, and +Ted noticed attached to it by a thong a curious-looking bulb, and +asked Kalitan: + +"What is on that lance?" + +"Sealskin buoy," said Kalitan. "We make the bag and blow it up? tie it to +the harpoon, and when the lance sticks into the whale, the buoy makes it +very hard for him to dive. After awhile he dies and drifts ashore." + +The waters about the whale were growing red, and the carcass seemed +drifting out to sea, and at last the Tyee seemed satisfied. He sent a +last look toward the huge body, then turned his _kiak_ toward the +watchers on the banks. + +"If it only comes to shore," said Kalitan. + +"What will you do with it?" asked Ted. + +"Oh, there are lots of things we can do with a whale," said Kalitan. "The +blubber is the best thing to eat in all the world. Then we use the oil In +a bowl with a bit of pith in it to light our huts. The bones are all +useful in building our houses. Whales were once bears, but they played +too much on the shore and ran away to sea, so they wore off all their fur +on the rocks, and had their feet nibbled off by the fishes." + +"Well, this one didn't have his tail nibbled off at any rate," +laughed Ted. "I saw it flap at the Tyee, and thought that was the +last of him, sure." + +"Tyee much big chief," said Kalitan, and just then the old man's _kiak_ +drew near them, and he stepped ashore as calmly as though he had not just +been through so exciting a scene with a mighty monster of the deep. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE ISLAND HOME OF KALITAN + + +Swift and even were the strokes of the paddles as the canoes sped over +the water toward Kalitan's Island home. Ted was so excited that he could +hardly sit still, and Tyee Klake gave him a warning glance and a muttered +"Kooletchika."[7] + +[Footnote 7: "Dangerous channel."] + +The day before a big canoe had come to the camp, the paddlers bearing +messages for the Tyee, and he had had a long conversation with Mr. +Strong. The result was astonishing to Teddy, for his father told him that +he was to go for a month to the island with Kalitan. This delighted him +greatly, but he was a little frightened when he found that his father +was to stay behind. + +"It's just this way, son," Mr. Strong explained to him. "I'm here in +government employ, taking government pay to do government work. I must do +it and do it well in the shortest time possible. You will have a far +better time on the island with Kalitan than you could possibly have +loafing around the camp here. You couldn't go to many places where I am +going, and, if my mind is easy about you, I can take Chetwoof and do my +work in half the time. I'll come to the island in three or four weeks, +and we'll take a week's vacation together, and then we'll hit the trail +for the gold-fields. Are you satisfied with this arrangement?" + +"Yes, sir." Ted's tone was dubious, but his face soon cleared up. "A +month won't be very long, father." + +"No, I'll wager you'll be sorry to leave when I come for you. Try and not +make any trouble. Of course Indian ways are not ours, but you'll get +used to it all and enjoy it. It's a chance most boys would be crazy over, +and you'll have tales to tell when you get home to make your playmates +envy you. I'm glad I have a son I can trust to keep straight when he is +out of my sight," and he laid his hand affectionately on the boy's +shoulder. Ted looked his father squarely in the eye, but gave only a +little nod in answer, then he laughed his clear, ringing laugh. + +"Wouldn't mother have spasms!" he exclaimed. Mr. Strong laughed +too, but said: + +"You'll be just as well off tumbling around with Kalitan as falling off a +glacier or two, as you would be certain to do if you were with me." + +Teddy felt a little blue when he said good-bye to his father, but Kalitan +quickly dispelled his gloom by a great piece of news. "Great time on +island," he said, as the canoe glided toward the dim outline of land to +which Ted's thoughts had so often turned. "Tyee's whale came ashore. We +go to see him cut up." + +"Hurrah!" cried Ted, delighted. "To think I shall see all that! What else +will we do, Kalitan?" + +"Hunt, fish, hear old Kala-kash stories. See berry dance if you stay long +enough, perhaps a potlatch; do many things," said the Indian. + +One of the Indian paddlers said something to Kalitan, and he laughed a +little, and Ted asked, curiously: "What did he say?" + +"Said Kalitan Tenas learned to talk as much as a Boston boy," said +Kalitan, laughing heartily, and Ted laughed, too. + +The canoes were nearing the shore of a wooded island, and Ted saw a +fringe of trees and some native houses clustered picturesquely against +them at the crest of a small hill which sloped down to the water's edge +where stood a group of people awaiting the canoes. + +"My home," said Kalitan, pointing to the largest house, "my people." +There was a great deal of pride in his tone and look, and he received a +warm welcome as the canoes touched land and their occupants sprang on +shore. The boys crowded around the young Indian and chattered and +gesticulated toward Ted, while a bright-looking little Malamute sprang +upon Kalitan and nearly knocked him down, covering his face with eager +puppy kisses. + +The girls were less boisterous, and regarded Teddy with shy curiosity. +Some of them were quite pretty, and the babies were as cunning as the +puppies. They barked every time the dogs did, in a funny, hoarse +little way, and, indeed, Alaskan babies learn to bark long before they +learn to talk. + +The Tyee's wife received Teddy kindly, and he soon found himself quite +at home among these hospitable people, who seemed always friendly and +natural. Nearly all spoke some English, and he rapidly added to his store +of Chinook, so that he had no trouble in making himself understood or in +understanding. Of course he missed his father, but he had little time to +be lonely. Life in the village was anything but uneventful. + +At first there was the whale to be attended to, and all the village +turned out for that. The huge creature had drifted ashore on the farther +side of the island, and Ted was much interested in seeing him gradually +disposed of. Great masses of blubber were stripped from the sides to be +used later both for food and fuel, the whalebone was carefully secured to +be sold to the traders, and it seemed to Ted that there was not one thing +in that vast carcass for which the Indians did not have some use. + +Ted soon tired of watching the many things done with the whale, but there +was plenty to do and see in the village. The village houses were all +alike. There was one large room in which the people cooked, ate, and +slept. The girls had blankets strung across one corner, behind which were +their beds. Teddy was given one also for his corner of the great room in +the Tyee's house. + +He learned to eat the food and to like it very much. There was dried +fish, herons' eggs, berries, or those put up in seal oil, which is +obtained by frying the fat out of the blubber of the seal. The Alaskans +use this oil in nearly all their cooking, and are very fond of it. Ted +ate also dried seaweed, chopped and boiled in seal oil, which tasted very +much like boiled and salted leather, but he liked it very well. Indeed he +grew so strong and well, out-of-doors all day in the clear air and bright +sunshine of the Alaskan June, that he could eat anything and tramp all +day without being too tired to sleep like a top all night, and wake ready +for a new day with a zest he never felt at home. + +Fresh fish were plentiful. The boys caught salmon, smelts, and whitefish, +and many were dried for the coming winter, while clams, gum-boots, +sea-cucumbers, and devil-fish, found on the rocks of the shore, were +every-day diet. + +Kalitan's sister and Ted became great friends. She was older than +Kalitan, and, though only fifteen, was soon to be married to Tah-ge-ah, a +fine young Indian who was ready to pay high for her, which was not +strange, for she was both pretty and sweet. + +"At the next full moon," said Kalitan, "there will be a potlatch, and +Tanana will be sold to Tah-ge-ah. He says he will give four hundred +blankets for her, and my uncle is well pleased. Many only pay ten +blankets for a wife, but of course we would not sell my sister for that. +She is of high caste, chief's daughter, niece, and sister," the boy +spoke proudly, and Ted answered: + +"She's so pretty, too. She's not like the Indian girls I saw at Wrangel +and Juneau. Why, there the women sat around as dirty as dogs on the +sidewalk, and didn't seem to care how they looked. They had baskets to +sell, and were too lazy to care whether any one bought them or not. They +weren't a bit like Tanana. She's as pretty as a Japanese." + +Kalitan smiled, well pleased, and Ted added, "I guess the Thlinkits must +be the best Indians in Alaska." + +Kalitan laughed outright at this. + +"Thlinkits pretty good," he said. "Tanana good girl. She learned much +good at the mission school, marry Tah-ge-ah, and make people better. She +can weave blankets, make fine baskets, and keep house like a white girl." + "She's all right," said Ted. "But, Kalitan, what is a potlatch?" + +"Potlatch is a good-will feast," said his friend, "Very fine thing, but +white men do not like. Say Indian feasts are all bad. Why is it bad when +an Indian gives away all his goods for others? That is what a great +potlatch is. When white men give us whiskey and it is drunk too much, +then it is very bad. But Tyee will not have that for Tanana's feast. We +will drink only quass[8], as my people made it before they learned evil +drinks and fire-water, which make them crazy." + +[Footnote 8: Quass is a native drink, harmless and acid, made with rye +and water fermented. The bad Indians mix it with sugar, flour, dried +apples, and hops, and make a terribly intoxicating drink.] + +"I guess Tyee Klake was right when he said all men were alike," said Ted, +sagely. "It seems to me that there are good and bad ones in all +countries. It's a pity you have had such bad white ones here in Alaska, +but I guess you have had good ones, too." + +"Plenty good, plenty bad, Thlinkit men and Boston men," said Kalitan, +"all same." + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +TWILIGHT TALES AND TOTEMS + + +"Once a small girl child went by night to bring water. In the skies above +she saw the Moon shining brightly, pale and placid, and she put forth her +tongue at it, which was an evil thing, for the Moon is old, and a +Thlinkit child should show respect for age. So the Moon would not endure +so rude a thing from a girl child, and it came down from the sky and took +her thither. She cried out in fear and caught at the long grass to keep +herself from going up, but the Moon was strong and took her with her +water-bucket and her bunch of grass, and she never came back. Her mother +wept for her, but her father said: 'Cease. We have other girl children; +she is now wedded to the Moon; to him we need not give a potlatch.' + +"You may see her still, if you will look at the Moon, there, grass in one +hand, bucket in the other, and when the new Moon tips to one side and +the water spills from the clouds and it is the months of rain, it is the +bad Moon maiden tipping over her water-bucket upon the earth. No Thlinkit +child would dare ever to put her tongue forth at the Moon, for fear of a +like fate to that of Squiance, the Moon maiden." + +Tanana's voice was soft and low and she looked very pretty as she sat in +the moonlight at the door of the hut and told Kalitan and Ted quaint old +stories. Ted was delighted with her tales, and begged for another and yet +another, and Tanana told the quaint story of Kagamil. + +"A mighty _toyon_[9] dwelt on the island of Kagamil. By name he was +Kat-haya-koochat, and he was of great strength and much to be feared. He +had long had a death feud with people of the next totem, but the bold +warrior Yakaga, chieftain of the tribe, married the toyon's daughter, and +there was no more feud. Zampa was the son of Kat-haya-koochat, and his +pride. He built for this son a fine _bidarka_,[10] and the boy launched +it on the sea. His father watched him sail and called him to return, lest +evil befall. But Zampa heard not his father's voice and pursued diving +birds,[11] and, lo! he was far from land and the dark fell. He sailed to +the nearest shore and beheld the village of Yakaga, where the people of +his sister's husband made him welcome, though Yakaga was not within his +hut. There was feasting and merry-making, and, according to their custom, +he, the stranger, was given a chieftain's daughter to wife, and her name +was Kitt-a-youx; and Zampa loved her and she him, and he returned not +home. But Kitt-a-youx's father liked him not, and treated him with +rudeness because of the old enmity with his Tyee father, so Zampa said to +Kitt-a-youx: 'Let us go hence. We cannot be happy here. Let us go from +your father, who is unfriendly to me, and seek the _barrabora_ of my +father, the mighty chief, that happiness may come upon us,' and +Kitt-a-youx said: 'What my lord says is well.' + +[Footnote 9: Chieftain.] + +[Footnote 10: Canoe.] + +[Footnote 11: Ducks.] + +"Then Zampa placed her in his canoe, and alone beneath the stars they +sailed and it was well, and Zampa's arm was strong at his paddle. But, +lo! they heard another paddle, and one came after them, and soon arrows +flew about them, arrows swift and cruel, and one struck his paddle from +his hand and his canoe was overturned. The pursuer came and placed +Kitt-a-youx in his canoe, seeking, too, for Zampa, but, alas! Zampa was +drowned. And when his pursuer dragged his body to the surface, he gave a +mighty cry, for, lo! it was his brother-in-law whom he had pursued, for +he was Yakaga. Then fearing the terrible rage of Zampa's father, he dared +not return with the body, so he left it with the overturned canoe in the +kelp and weeds. Kitt-a-youx he bore with him to his own island. There she +was sad as the sea-gull's scream, for the lord she loved was dead. And +her father gave her to another _toyon_, who was cruel to her, and her +life was as a slave's, and she loathed her life until Zampa's child was +born to her, and for it she lived. Alas, it was a girl child and her +husband hated it, and Kitt-a-youx saw nothing for it but to be sold as a +slave as was she herself. And she looked by day and by night at the sea, +and its cold, cold waves seemed warmer to her than the arms of men. 'With +my girl child I shall go hence,' she whispered to herself, 'and the Great +Unknown Spirit will be kind.' + +"So by night she stole away in a canoe and steered to sea, ere she knew +where she was, reaching the seaweeds where she had journeyed with her +young husband. The morning broke, and she saw the weeds and the kelp +where her lover had gone from her sight, and, with a glad sigh, she +clasped Zampa's child to her breast and sank down among the weeds where +he had died. So her tired spirit was at rest, for a woman is happier who +dies with him she loves. + +"Now Zampa's father had found his boy's body and mourned over it, and +buried it in a mighty cave, the which he had once made for his furs and +stores. With it he placed bows and arrows and many valuables in respect +for the dead. And Zampa's sister, going to his funeral feast, fell upon a +stone with her child, so that both were killed. Then broke the old +chief's heart. Beside her brother he laid her in the cave, and gave +orders that he himself should be placed there as well, when grief should +have made way with him. Then he died of sorrow for his children, and his +people interred him in his burial cave, and with him they put much wealth +and blankets and weapons. + +"When, therefore, the people of his tribe found the bodies of Kitt-a-youx +and her child among the kelp, having heard of her love for Zampa, they +bore them to the same cave, and, wrapping them in furs, they placed +Kitt-a-youx beside her beloved husband, and in her burial she found her +home and felt the kindness of the Great Spirit. This, then, is the story +of the burial cave of Kagamil, and since that day no man dwelt upon the +island, and it is known as the 'island of the dead.'" + +"I'd like to see it, I can tell you," said Ted. "Are there any burial +caves around here?" + +"The Thlinkits do not bury in caves," said Tanana. "We used to burn our +dead, but often we place them in totem-poles." + +"I thought those great poles by your doors were totems," said Ted, +puzzled. + +"Yes," said the girl. "They are caste totems, and all who are of any rank +have them. As we belong to the Raven, or Bear, or Eagle clan, we have the +carved poles to show our rank, but the totem of the dead is quite +different. It does not stand beside the door, but far away. It is alone, +as the soul of the dead in whose honour it is made. It is but little +carved. A square hole is cut at the back of the pole, and the body of the +dead, wrapped in a matting of cedar bark, is placed within, a board being +nailed so that the body will not fall to the ground. A potlatch is given, +and food from the feast is put in the fire for the dead person." + +"It seems queer to put weapons and blankets and things to eat on people's +graves," said Ted. "Why do they do it?" + +"Of the dead we know nothing," said Tanana, "Perhaps the warrior spirit +wishes his arrows in the Land of the Great Unknown." + +"Yes, but he can't come back for them," persisted Ted. + +"At Wrangel, Boston man put flowers on his girl's grave," said Kalitan, +drily. "She come back and smell posy?" + +Having no answer ready, Ted changed the subject and asked: + +"Why do you have the raven at the top of your totem pole?" + +"Indian cannot marry same totem," said Kalitan. "My father was eagle +totem, my mother was raven totem. He carve her totem at the top of the +pole, then his totem and those of the family are carved below. The +greater the family the taller the totem." + +"How do you get these totems?" demanded Ted. + +"Clan totems we take from our parents, but a man may choose his own +totem. Before he becomes a man he must go alone into the forest to fast, +and there he chooses his totem, and he is brother to that animal all his +life, and may not kill it. When he comes forth, he may take part in all +the ceremonies of his tribe." + +"Why, it is something like knighthood and the vigil at arms and +escutcheons, and all those Round-Table things," exclaimed Ted, in +delight, for he dearly loved the stirring tales of King Arthur and his +knights and the doughty deeds of Camelot. + +"Tell us about that," said Kalitan, so Ted told them many tales in the +moonlight, as they sat beneath the shadows of the quaint and curious +totem-poles of Kalitan's tribe. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +THE BERRY DANCE + + +Teddy's month upon the island stretched out into two. His father came and +went, finding the boy so happy and well that he left him with an easy +mind. Ted's fair skin was tanned to a warm brown, and, clad in Indian +clothes, save for his aureole of copper-coloured hair, so strong a +contrast to the straight black locks of his Indian brothers, he could +hardly be told from one of the island lads who roamed all day by wood and +shore. They called him "Yakso pil chicamin,"[12] and all the village +liked him. + +[Footnote 12: Copper hair.] + +Tanana's marriage-feast was held, and she and Tah-ge-ah went to +housekeeping in a little hut, where the one room was as clean and neat +as could be, and not a bit like the dirty rooms of some of the natives. +Tanana spent all her spare time weaving beautiful baskets, for her slim +fingers were very skillful. Some of the baskets which she made out of the +inner bark of the willow-tree were woven so closely that they would hold +water, and Teddy never tired of watching her weave the gay colours in and +out, nor of seeing the wonderful patterns grow. Tahgeah would take them +to the mainland when she had enough made, and sell them to the travellers +from the States. Meantime Tah-ge-ah himself was very, very busy carving +the totem-pole for his new home, for Tanana was a chieftain's daughter, +and he, too, was of high caste, and their totem must be carved and stand +one hundred feet high beside their door, lest they be reproached. + +Ted also enjoyed seeing old Kala-kash carve, for he was the finest carver +among the Indians, and it was wonderful to see him cut strange figures +out of bone, wood, horn, fish-bones, and anything his gnarled old fingers +could get hold of, and he would carve grasshoppers, bears, minnows, +whales, sea-gulls, babies, or idols. He made, too, a canoe for Ted, a +real Alaskan dugout, shaping the shell from a log and making it soft by +steam, filling the hole with water and throwing in red-hot stones. The +wood was then left to season, and Ted could hardly wait patiently until +sun and wind and rain had made his precious craft seaworthy. Then it was +painted with paint made by rubbing a certain rock over the surface of a +coarse stone and the powder mixed with oil or water. + +At last it was done, a shapely thing, more beautiful in Ted's eyes than +any launch or yacht he had ever seen at home. His canoe had a carved +stern and a sharp prow which came out of the water, and which had carved +upon it a fine eagle. Kalakash had not asked Ted what his totem was, but +supposing that the American eagle on the buttons of the boy's coat was +his emblem, had carved the rampant bird upon the canoe as the boy's +totem. Ted learned to paddle and to fish, never so well as Kalitan, of +course, for he was born to it, but still he did very well, and enjoyed +it hugely. + +Happily waned the summer days, and then came the time of the berry dance, +which Kalitan had spoken of so often that Ted was very anxious to see it. + +The salmon-berry was fully ripe, a large and luscious berry, found in two +colours, yellow and dark red. Besides these there were other small +berries, maruskins, like the New England dewberries, huckleberries, and +whortleberries. + +"We have five kinds of berries on our island," said Kalitan. "All good. +The birds, flying from the mainland, first brought the seeds, and our +berries grow larger than almost any place in Alaska." + +"They're certainly good," said Ted, his mouth full as he spoke. "These +salmon-berries are a kind of a half-way between our blackberries and +strawberries. I never saw anything prettier than the way the red and +yellow berries grow so thick on the same bush--" + +"There come the canoes!" interrupted Kalitan, and the two boys ran down +to the water's edge, eager to be the first to greet the visitors. Tyee +Klake was giving a feast to the people of the neighbouring islands, and a +dozen canoes glided over the water from different directions. The canoes +were all gaily decorated, and they came swiftly onward to the weird chant +of the paddlers, which the breeze wafted to the listeners' ears in a +monotonous melody. + +Every one in the village had been astir since daybreak, preparing for the +great event. Parallel lines had been strung from the chief's house to the +shore, and from these were hung gay blankets, pieces of bright calico, +and festoons of leaves and flowers. As the canoes landed their +occupants, the dancers thronged to welcome their guests. The great drum +sounded its loud note, and the dancers, arrayed in wonderful blankets +woven in all manner of fanciful designs and trimmed with long woollen +fringes, swayed back and forth, up and down, to and fro, in a very +graceful manner, keeping time to the music. + +In the centre of the largest canoe stood the Tyee of a neighbouring +island, a tall Indian, dressed in a superb blanket with fringe a foot +long, fringed leggins and moccasins of walrus hide, and the chiefs hat to +show his rank. It was a peculiar head-dress half a foot high, trimmed in +down and feathers. + +The Tyee, in perfect time to the music, swayed back and forth, never +ceasing for a moment, shaking his head so that the down was wafted in a +snowy cloud all over him. + +As the canoes reached the shallows, the shore Indians dashed into the +water to draw them up to land, and the company was joyously received. +Teddy was delighted, for in one of the canoes was his father, whom he had +not seen for several weeks. After the greetings were over, the dancers +arranged themselves in opposite lines, men on one side, women on the +other, and swayed their bodies while the drum kept up its unceasing +tum-tum-tum. + +"It's a little bit like square dances at home," said Ted. "It's ever so +pretty, isn't it? First they sway to the right, then to the left, over +and over and over; then they bend their bodies forward and backward +without bending their knees, then sway again, and bend to one side and +then the other, singing all the time. Isn't it odd, father?" + +"It certainly is, but it's very graceful," said Mr. Strong. "Some of +the girls are quite pretty, gentle-looking creatures, but the older +women are ugly." + +"The very old women look like the mummies in the museum at home," said +Ted. "There's one old woman, over a hundred years old, whose skin is like +a piece of parchment, and she wears the hideous lip-button which most of +the Thlinkits have stopped using. Kalitan says all the women used to wear +them. The girls used to make a cut in their chins between the lip and the +chin, and put in a piece of wood, changing it every few days for a piece +a little larger until the opening was stretched like a second mouth. When +they grew up, a wooden button like the bowl of a spoon was set in the +hole and constantly enlarged. The largest I have seen was three inches +long. Isn't it a curious idea father?" + +"It certainly is, but there is no telling what women will admire. A +Chinese lady binds her feet, and an American her waist; a Maori woman +slits her nose, and an English belle pierces her ears. It's on the same +principle that your Thlinkit friends slit their chins for the +lip-button." + +"I'm mighty glad they don't do it now, for Tanana's as pretty as a +pink, and it would be a shame to spoil her face that way," said Ted. +"The dancing has stopped, father; let's see what they'll do next. There +comes Kalitan." + +A feast of berries was to follow the dance, and Kalitan led Mr. Strong +and Ted to the chief's house, which was gaily decorated with blankets and +bits of bright cloth. A table covered with a cloth was laid around three +sides of the room, and on this was spread hardtack and huge bowls of +berries of different colours. These were beaten up with sugar into a +foamy mixture, pink, purple, and yellow, according to the colour of the +berries, which tasted good and looked pretty. + +Ted and Kalitan had helped gather the berries, and their appetites were +quite of the best. Mr. Strong smiled to see how the once fussy little +gentleman helped himself with a right good-will to the Indian dainties of +his friends. + +Many pieces of goods had been provided for the potlatch; and these were +given away, given and received with dignified politeness. There was +laughing and merriment with the feast, and when it was all over, the +canoes floated away as they had come, into the sunset, which gilded all +the sea to rosy, golden beauty. + +Ted's share of the potlatch was a beautiful blanket of Tanana's weaving, +and he was delighted beyond measure. + +"You're a lucky boy, Ted," said his father. "People pay as high as +sixty-five dollars for an Alaskan blanket, and not always a perfect one +at that. Many of the Indians are using dyed yarns to weave them, but +yours is the genuine article, made from white goat's wool, long and soft, +and dyed only in the native reds and blacks. We shall have to do +something nice for Tanana when you leave." + +"I'd like to give her something, and Kalitan, too." Ted's face looked +very grave. "When do I have to go, father?" + +"Right away, I'm afraid," was the reply. "I've let you stay as long as +possible, and now we must start for our northern trip, if you are to see +anything at all of mines and Esquimos before we start home. The +mail-steamer passes Nuchek day after to-morrow, and we must go over there +in time to take it." + +"Yes, sir," said Ted, forlornly. He wanted to see the mines and all +the wonderful things of the far north, but he hated to leave his +Indian friends. + +"What's the trouble, Ted?" His father laid his hand on his shoulder, +disliking to see the bright face so clouded. + +"I was only thinking of Kalitan," said Ted. "Suppose we take Kalitan +with us," said Mr. Strong. + +"Oh, daddy, could we really?" Ted jumped in excitement. + +"I'll ask the Tyee if he will lend him to us for a month," said Mr. +Strong, and in a few minutes it was decided, and Ted, with one great +bear's hug to thank his father, rushed off to find his friend and tell +him the glorious news. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +ON THE WAY TO NOME + + +"Well, boys, we're off for a long sail, and I'm afraid you will be rather +tired with the steamer before you are done with her," said Mr. Strong. +They had boarded the mail-steamer late the night before, and, going +right to bed, had wakened early next day and rushed on deck to find the +August sun shining in brilliant beauty, the islands quite out of sight, +and nought but sea and sky around and above them. + +"Oh, I don't know; we'll find something to do," said Teddy. "You'll +have to tell us lots about the places we pass, and, if there aren't any +other boys on board, Kalitan and I will be together. What's the first +place we stop?" + +"We passed the Kenai Peninsula in the night. I wish you could have +caught a glimpse of some of the waterfalls, volcanoes, and glaciers. They +are as fine as any in Alaska," said Mr. Strong. "Our next stop will be +Kadiak Island." + +"Kadiak Island was once near the mainland," said Kalitan. "There was only +the narrowest passage of water, but a great Kenai otter tried to swim the +pass, and was caught fast. He struggled so that he made it wider and +wider, and at last pushed Kadiak way out to sea." + +"He must have been a whopper," said Ted, "to push it so far away. Is that +the island?" + +"Yes," said his father. "There are no splendid forests on the island as +there are on the mainland, but the grasses are superb, for the fog and +rain here keeps them green as emerald." + +"What a queer canoe that Indian has!" exclaimed Ted. "It isn't a bit +like yours, Kalitan." + +"It is _bidarka_," said Kalitan. "Kadiak people make canoe out of walrus +hide. They stretch it over frames of driftwood. It holds two people. They +sit in small hatch with apron all around their bodies, and the _bidarka_ +goes over the roughest sea and floats like a bladder. Big _bidarka_ +called an _oomiak_, and holds whole family." + +"Some one has called the _bldarkas_ the 'Cossacks of the sea,'" said Mr. +Strong. "They skim along like swallows, and are as perfectly built as any +vessel I ever saw." + +"What are those huge buildings on the small island?" asked Ted, as the +steamer wound through the shallows. + +"Ice-houses," said his father. "Before people learned to manufacture ice, +immense cargoes were shipped from here to as far south as San Francisco." + +"It was fun to see them go fishing for ice from the steamer when we came +up to Skaguay," said Ted. "The sailors went out in a boat, slipped a net +around a block of ice and towed it to the side of the ship, then it was +hitched to a derrick and swung on deck." + +"Huh!" said Kalitan. "What people want ice for stored up? Think they'd +store sunshine!" + +"If you could invent a way to do that, you could make a fortune, my +boy," said Mr. Strong, laughing. "The next place of any interest is +Karluk. It's around on the other side of the island in Shelikoff Strait, +and is famous for its salmon canneries. Nearly half of the entire salmon +pack of Alaska comes from Kadiak Island, most of the fish coming from +the Karluk River." + +"Very bad for Indians," said Kalitan. "Used to have plenty fish. Tyee +Klake said salmon used to come up this river in shoal sixteen miles long, +and now Boston men take them all." + +"It does seem a pity that the Indians don't even have a chance to earn +their living in the canneries," said Mr. Strong. "The largest cannery in +the world is at Karluk. There are thousands of men employed, and in one +year over three million salmon were packed, yet with all this work for +busy hands to do, the canneries employ Chinese, Greek, Portuguese, and +American workmen in preference to the Indians, bringing them by the +shipload from San Francisco." + +"What other places do we pass?" asked Ted. + +"A lot of very interesting ones, and I wish we could coast along, +stopping wherever we felt like it," said Mr. Strong. "The Shumagin +Islands are where Bering, the great discoverer and explorer, landed in +1741 to bury one of his crew. Codfish were found there, and Captain +Cook, in his 'Voyages and Discoveries,' speaks of the same fish. There +is a famous fishery there now called the Davidson Banks, and the +codfishing fleet has its headquarters on Popoff Island. Millions of +codfish are caught here every year. These islands are also a favourite +haunt of the sea otter, Belofsky, at the foot of Mt. Pavloff, is the +centre of the trade." + +"What kind of fur is otter?" asked Ted, whose mind was so inquiring that +his father often called him the "living catechism." + +"It is the court fur of China and Russia, and at one time the common +people were forbidden by law to wear it," said Mr. Strong. "It is a +rich, purplish brown sprinkled with silver-tipped hairs, and the skins +are very costly." + +"At one time any one could have otter," said Kalitan. "We hunted them +with spears and bows and arrows. Now they are very few, and we find them +only in dangerous spots, hiding on rocks or floating kelp. Sometimes the +hunters have to lie in hiding for days watching them. Only Indians can +kill the otter. Boston men can if they marry Indian women. That makes +them Indian." + +"Rather puts otter at a discount and women at a premium," laughed Mr. +Strong. "Now we pass along near the Alaska peninsula, past countless +isles and islets, through the Fox Islands to Unalaska, and then into the +Bering Sea. One of the most interesting things in this region is called +the 'Pacific Ring of Fire,' a chain of volcanoes which stretches along +the coast. Often the passengers can see from the ships at night a strange +red glow over the sky, and know that the fire mountains are burning. The +most beautiful of these volcanoes is Mt. Shishaldin, nearly nine thousand +feet high, and almost as perfect a cone in shape as Fuji Yama, which the +Japanese love so much and call 'the Honourable Mountain.' At Unalaska or +Ilinlink, the 'curving beach,' we stop. If we could stay over for awhile, +there are a great many interesting things we could see; an old Greek +church and the government school are in the town, and Bogoslov's volcano +and the sea-lion rookeries are on the island of St. John, which rose +right up out of the sea in 1796 after a day's roaring and rumbling and +thundering. In 1815 there was a similar performance, and from time to +time the island has grown larger ever since. One fine day in 1883 there +was a great shower of ashes, and, when the clouds had rolled away, two +peaks were seen where only one had been, separated by a sandy isthmus. +This last was reduced to a fine thread by the earthquake of 1891, and I +don't know what new freaks it may have developed by now. I know some +friends of mine landed there not long ago and cooked eggs over the jets +of steam which gush out of the mountainside. Did you ever hear of using a +volcano for a cook-stove?" + +"Well, I should say not," said Ted, amused. "These Alaskan volcanoes are +great things." + +"The one called Makushin has a crater filled with snow in a part of +which there is always a cloud of sulphurous smoke. That's making +extremes meet, isn't it?" + +"Yehl[13] made many strange things," said Kalitan, who had been taking in +all this information even more eagerly than Teddy. "He first dwelt on +Nass River, and turned two blades of grass into the first man and woman. +Then the Thlinkits grew and prospered, till darkness fell upon the earth. +A Thlinkit stole the sun and hid it in a box, but Yehl found it and set +it so high in the heavens that none could touch it. Then the Thlinkits +grew and spread abroad. But a great flood came, and all were swept away +save two, who tossed long upon the flood on a raft of logs until Yehl +pitied, and carried them to Mt. Edgecomb, where they dwelt until the +waters fell." + +[Footnote 13: Yehl, embodied in the raven, is the Thlinkit Great Spirit] + +"Old Kala-kash tells this story, and he says that one of these people, +when very old, went down through the crater of the mountain, and, given +long life by Yehl, stays there always to hold up the earth out of the +water. But the other lives in the crater as the Thunder Bird, Hahtla, +whose wing-flap is the thunder and whose glance is the lightning. The +osprey is his totem, and his face glares in our blankets and totems." + +"I've wondered what that fierce bird was," said Teddy, who was always +quite carried away with Kalitan's strange legends. + +"Well, what else do we see on the way to Nome, father?" + +"The most remarkable thing happening in the Bering Sea is the seal +industry, but I do not think we pass near enough to the islands to see +any of that. You'd better run about and see the ship now," and the boys +needed no second permission. + +It was not many days before they knew everybody on board, from captain +to deck hands, and were prime favourites with them all. Ted and Kalitan +enjoyed every moment. There was always something new to see or hear, and +ere they reached their journey's end, they had heard all about seals and +sealing, although the famous Pribylov Islands were too far to the west of +the vessel's route for them to see them. They sighted the United States +revenue cutter which plies about the seal islands to keep off poachers, +for no one is allowed to kill seals or to land on this government +reservation except from government vessels. The scent of the rookeries, +where millions of seals have been killed in the last hundred years, is +noticed far out at sea, and often the barking of the animals can be heard +by passing vessels. + +"Why is sealskin so valuable, father?" asked Ted. + +"It has always been admired because it is so warm and soft," replied Mr. +Strong. "All the ladies fancy it, and it never seems to go out of +fashion. There was a time, when the Pribylov Islands were first +discovered, that sealskins were so plentiful that they sold in Alaska for +a dollar apiece. Hunters killed so many, killing old and young that soon +there were scarcely any left, so a law was passed by the Russian +government forbidding any killing for five years. Since the Americans +have owned Alaska they have protected the seals, allowing them to be +killed only at certain times, and only male seals from two to four years +old are killed. The Indians are always the killers, and are wonderfully +swift and clever, never missing a blow and always killing instantly, so +that there is almost no suffering." + +"How do they know where to find the seals?" asked Ted. + +"For half the year the seals swim about the sea, but in May they return +to their favourite haunts. In these rookeries families of them herd on +the rocks, the male staying at home with his funny little black puppies, +while the mother swims about seeking food. The seals are very timid, and +will rush into the water at the least strange noise. A story is told that +the barking of a little pet dog belonging to a Russian at one of the +rookeries lost him a hundred thousand dollars, for the seals took fright +and scurried away before any one could say 'Jack Robinson!'" + +"Rather an expensive pup!" commented Ted. "But what about the +seals, daddy?" + +"You seem to think I am an encyclopedia on the seal question," said his +father. "There is not much else to tell you." + +"How can they manage always to kill the right ones?" demanded Ted. + +"The gay bachelor seals herd together away from the rest and sleep at +night on the rocks. Early in the morning the Aleuts slip in between them +and the herd and drive them slowly to the killing-ground, where they are +quickly killed and skinned and the skins taken to the salting-house. The +Indians use the flesh and blubber, and the climate is such that before +another year the hollow bones are lost in the grass and earth." + +"What becomes of the skins after they are salted?" + +"They are usually sent to London, where they are prepared for market. +The work is all done by hand, which is one reason that they are so +expensive. They are first worked in saw-dust; cleaned, scraped, washed, +shaved, plucked, dyed with a hand-brush from eight to twelve times, +washed again and freed from the least speck of grease by a last bath in +hot sawdust or sand." + +"I don't wonder a sealskin coat costs so much," said Ted? "if they have +got to go through all that performance. I wish we could have seen the +islands, but I'd hate to see the seals killed. It doesn't seem like +hunting just to knock them on the head. It's too much like the +stock-yards at home." + +"Yes, but it's a satisfaction to know that it's done in the easiest +possible way for the animals. + +"What a lot you are learning way up here in Alaska, aren't you, son? +To-morrow we'll be at Nome, and then your head will be so stuffed with +mines and mining that you will forget all about everything else." + +"I don't want to forget any of it," said Ted. "It's all bully." + + + + +CHAPTER X + +IN THE GOLD COUNTRY + + +A low sandy beach, without a tree to break its level, rows of plain +frame-houses, some tents and wooden shanties scattered about, the surf +breaking over the shore in splendid foam,--this was Teddy's first +impression of Nome. They had sailed over from St. Michael's to see the +great gold-fields, and both the boys were full of eagerness to be on +land. It seemed, however, as if their desires were not to be realized, +for landing at Nome is a difficult matter. + +Nome is on the south shore of that part of Alaska known as Seward +Peninsula, and it has no harbour. It is on the open seacoast and catches +all the fierce storms that sweep northward over Bering Sea. Generally +seacoast towns are built in certain spots because there is a harbour, +but Nome was not really built, it "jes' growed," for, when gold was +found there, the miners sat down to gather the harvest, caring nothing +about a harbour. + +Ships cannot go within a mile of land, and passengers have to go ashore +in small lighters. Sometimes when they arrive they cannot go ashore at +all, but have to wait several days, taking refuge behind a small island +ten miles away, lest they drag their anchors and be dashed to pieces on +the shore. + +There had been a tremendous storm at Nome the day before Ted arrived, and +landing was more difficult than usual, but, impatient as the boys were, +at last it seemed safe to venture, and the party left the steamer to be +put on a rough barge, flat-bottomed and stout, which was hauled by cable +to shore until it grounded on the sands. They were then put in a sort of +wooden cage, let down by chains from a huge wooden beam, and swung round +in the air like the unloading cranes of a great city, over the surf to a +high platform on the land. + +"Well, this is a new way to land," cried Ted, who had been rather quiet +during the performance, and his father thought a trifle frightened. "It's +a sort of a balloon ascension, isn't it?" + +"It must be rather hard for the miners, who have been waiting weeks for +their mail, when the boat can't land her bags at all," said Mr. Strong. +"That sometimes happens. From November to May, Nome is cut off from the +world by snow and ice. The only news they receive is by the monthly mail +when it comes. + +"Over at Kronstadt the Russians have ice-breaking boats which keep the +Baltic clear enough of ice for navigation, and plow their way through ice +fourteen feet thick for two hundred miles. The Nome miners are very +anxious for the government to try this ice-boat service at Nome." + +"Why did people settle here in such a forlorn place?" asked Ted, as they +made their way to the town, which they found anything but civilized. "I +like the Indian houses on the island better than this." + +"Your island is more picturesque," said Mr. Strong, "but people came here +for what they could get. + +"In 1898 gold was discovered on Anvil Creek, which runs into Snake River, +and this turned people's eyes in the direction of Nome. Miners rushed +here and set to work in the gulches inland, but it was not till the +summer of 1899 that gold was found on the beach. A soldier from the +barracks--you know this is part of a United States Military +Reservation--found gold while digging a well near the beach, and an old +miner took out $1,200 worth in twenty days. Then a perfect frenzy seized +the people. They flocked to Nome from far and near; they camped on the +beach in hundreds and staked their claims. Between one and two thousand +men were at work on the beach at one time, yet so good-natured were they +that no quarrels seem to have occurred. Doctors, lawyers, barkeepers, and +all dropped their business and went to-rocking, as they call +beach-mining." + +"Oh, dad, let's hurry and go and see it," cried Ted, as they hurried +through their dinner at the hotel. "I thought gold came out of deep +mines like copper, and had to be melted out or something, but this seems +to be different. Do they just walk along the beach and pick it up? I +wish I could." + +"Well, it's not quite so simple as that," said Mr. Strong, laughing. +"We'll go and see, and then you'll understand," and they went down the +crooked streets to the sandy beach. + +Men were standing about talking and laughing, others working hard. All +manner of men were there scattered over the _tundra,_[14] and Ted became +interested in two who were working together in silence. + +[Footnote 14: The name given to the boggy soil of the beach.] + +[Illustration: "'LET'S WATCH THOSE TWO MEN. THEY HAVE EVIDENTLY STAKED A +CLAIM TOGETHER.'"] + +"What are they doing?" he asked his father. "I can't see how they expect +to get anything worth having out of this mess." + +"Beach-mining is quite different from any other," said his father. "Let's +watch those two men. They have evidently staked a claim together, which +means that nobody but these two can work on the ground they have staked +out, and that they must share all the gold they find. They came here to +prospect, and evidently found a block of ground which suited them. They +then dug a prospect hole down two to five feet until they struck +'bedrock,' which happens to be clay around here. They passed through +several layers of sand and gravel before reaching this, and these were +carefully examined to see how much gold they contained. Upon reaching a +layer which seemed to be a good one, the gravel on top was stripped off +and thrown aside and the 'pay streak' worked with the rocker." + +"What is that?" asked Ted, who was all ears, while Kalitan was taking in +everything with his sharp black eyes. + +"That arrangement that looks like a square pan on a saw-buck is the +rocker. The rockers usually have copper bottoms, and there is a great +demand for sheet copper at Nome, but often there is not enough of it, and +the miners have been known to cover them with silver coins. That man you +are watching has silver dollars in his, about fifty, I should say. It +seems extravagant, doesn't it, but he'll take out many times that amount +if he has good luck." + +The man, who had glanced up at them, smiled at that and said: + +"And, if I don't have luck, I'm broke, anyhow, so fifty or sixty plunks +won't make much difference. You going to be a miner, youngster?" + +"Not this trip," said Ted, with a smile. "Say, I'd like to know how you +get the gold out with that." + +"At first we used to put a blanket in the rocker, and wash the pay dirt +on that. Our prospect hole has water in it, and we can use it over and +over. Some of the holes are dry, and there the men have to pack their pay +dirt down to the shore and use surf water for washing. Most of our gold +is so fine that the blanket didn't stop it, so now we use 'quick.' I +reckon you'd call it mercury, but we call it quick. You see, it saves +time, and work-time up here is so short, on account of winter setting in +so early, that we have to save up our spare minutes and not waste 'em on +long words." + +Ted grinned cheerfully and asked: "What do you do with the quick?" + +"We paint it over the bottom of the rocker, and it acts like a charm and +catches every speck of gold that comes its way as the dirt is washed over +it. The quick and the gold make a sort of amalgam." + +"But how do you get at the gold after it amalgams, or whatever you call +it?" asked Ted. + +"Sure we fry it in the frying-pan, and it's elegant pancakes it makes," +said the man. "See here," and he pulled from his pocket several flat +masses that looked like pieces of yellow sponge. "This is pure gold. All +the quick has gone off, and this is the real stuff, just as good as +money. An ounce will buy sixteen dollars' worth of anything in Nome." + +"It looks mighty pretty," said Ted. "Seems to me it's redder than any +gold I ever saw." + +"It is," said his father. "Nome beach gold is redder and brighter than +any other Alaskan gold. I guess I'll have to get you each a piece for a +souvenir," and both boys were made happy by the present of a quaintly +shaped nugget, bought by Mr. Strong from the very miner who had mined it, +which of course added to its value. + +"You're gathering quite a lot of souvenirs, Ted," said his father. "It's +a great relief that you have not asked me for anything alive yet. I have +been expecting a modest request for a Maiamute or a Husky pup, or perhaps +a pet reindeer to take home, but so far you have been quite moderate in +your demands." + +"Kalitan never asks for anything," said Ted. "I asked him once why it +was, and he said Indian boys never got what they asked for; that +sometimes they had things given to them that they hadn't asked for, but, +if he asked the Tyee for anything, all he got was 'Good Indian get things +for himself,' and he had to go to work to get the thing he wanted. I +guess it's a pretty good plan, too, for I notice that I get just as much +as I did when I used to tease you for things," Teddy added, sagely. +"Wise boy," said his father. "You're certainly more agreeable to live +with. The next thing you are to have is a visit to an Esquimo village, +and, if I can find some of the Esquimo carvings, you shall have something +to take home to mother. Kalitan, what would you like to remember the +Esquimos by?" + +Kalitan smiled and replied, simply, "_Mukluks_." + +"What are _mukluks_?" demanded Ted. + +"Esquimo moccasins," said Mr. Strong. "Well, you shall both have a pair, +and they are rather pretty things, too, as the Esquimos make them." + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +AFTERNOON TEA IN AN EGLU + + +The Esquimo village was reached across the _tundra_, and Teddy and +Kalitan were much interested in the queer houses. Built for the long +winter of six or eight months, when it is impossible to do anything +out-of-doors, the _eglu_[15] seems quite comfortable from the Esquimo +point of view, but very strange to their American cousins. + +[Footnote 15: The _eglu_ is the Esquimo house. Often they occupy tents +during the summer, but return to the huts the first cool nights.] + +"I thought the Esquimos lived in snow houses," said Ted, as they looked +at the queer little huts, and Kalitan exclaimed: + +"Huh! Innuit queer Indian!" + +"No," said Mr. Strong; "his hut is built by digging a hole about six feet +deep and standing logs up side by side around the hole. On the top of +these are placed logs which rest even with the ground. Stringers are put +across these, and other logs and moss and mud roofed over it, leaving an +opening in the middle about two feet square. This is covered with a piece +of walrus entrail so thin and transparent that light easily passes +through it, and it serves as a window, the only one they have. A +smoke-hole is cut through the roof, but there is no door, for the hut is +entered through another room built in the same way, fifteen or twenty +feet distant, and connected by an underground passage about two feet +square with the main room. The entrance-room is entered through a hole in +the roof, from which a ladder reaches the bottom of the passage." + +"Can we go into a hut?" asked Ted. + +"I'll ask that woman cooking over there," said Mr. Strong, as they went +up to a woman who was cooking over a peat fire, holding over the coals an +old battered skillet in which she was frying fish. She nodded and smiled +at the boys, and, as Esquimos are always friendly and hospitable souls, +told them to go right into her _iglu_, which was close by. + +They climbed down the ladder, crawled along the narrow passage to where a +skin hung before an opening, and, pushing it aside, entered the +living-room. Here they found an old man busily engaged in carving a +walrus tooth, another sewing _mukluks_, while a girl was singing a quaint +lullaby to a child of two in the corner. + +The young girl rose, and, putting the baby down on a pile of skins, spoke +to them in good English, saying quietly: + +"You are welcome. I am Alalik." + +"May we see your wares? We wish to buy," said Mr. Strong, courteously. +"You may see, whether you buy or not," she said, with a smile, which +showed a mouth full of even white teeth, and she spread out before them +a collection of Esquimo goods. There were all kinds of carvings from +walrus tusks, grass baskets, moccasins of walrus hide, stone bowls and +cups, _parkas_ made of reindeer skin, and one superb one of bird +feathers, _ramleikas_, and all manner of carved trinkets, the most +charming of which, to Ted's eyes, being a tiny _oomiak_ with an Esquimo +in it, made to be used as a breast-pin. This he bought for his mother, +and a carving of a baby for Judith; while his father made him and +Kalitan happy with presents. + +"Where did you learn such English?" asked Mr. Strong of Alalik, +wondering, too, where she learned her pretty, modest ways, for Esquimo +women are commonly free and easy. + +"I was for two years at the Mission at Holy Cross," she said. "There I +learned much that was good. Then my mother died, and I came home." + +She spoke simply, and Mr. Strong wondered what would be the fate of this +sweet-faced girl. + +"Did you learn to sew from the sisters?" asked Ted, who had been looking +at the garments she had made, in which the stitches, though made in skins +and sewn with deer sinew, were as even as though done with a machine. + +"Oh, no," she said. "We learn that at home. When I was no larger than +Zaksriner there, my mother taught me to braid thread from deer and whale +sinew, and we must sew very much in winter if we have anything to sell +when summer comes. It is very hard to get enough to live. Since the +Boston men come, our people waste the summer in idleness, so we have +nothing stored for the winter's food. Hundreds die and many sicknesses +come upon us. In the village where my people lived, in each house lay the +dead of what the Boston men called measles, and there were not left +enough living to bury the dead. Only we escaped, and a Black Gown came +from the Mission to help, and he took me and Antisarlook, my brother, to +the school. The rest came here, where we live very well because there +are in the summer, people who buy what we make in the winter." + +"How do you get your skins so soft?" asked Ted, feeling the exquisite +texture of a bag she had just finished. It was a beautiful bit of work, a +tobacco-pouch or "Tee-rum-i-ute," made of reindeer skin, decorated with +beads and the soft creamy fur of the ermine in its summer hue. + +"We scrape it a very long time and pull and rub," she said. "Plenty of +time for patience in winter." + +"Your hands are too small and slim. I shouldn't think you could do much +with those stiff skins," said Teddy. + +Alalik smiled at the compliment, and a little flush crept into the clear +olive of her skin. She was clean and neat, and the _eglu_, though close +from being shut up, was neater than most of the Esquimo houses. The bowl +filled with seal oil, which served as fire and light, was unlighted, and +Alalik's father motioned to her and said something in Innuit, to which +she smilingly replied: + +"My father wishes you to eat with us," she said, and produced her flint +bag. In this were some wads of fibrous material used for wicks. Rolling a +piece of this in wood ashes, she held it between her thumb and a flint, +struck her steel against the stone, and sparks flew out which lighted the +fibre so that it burst into flame. This was thrown into the bowl of oil, +and she deftly began preparing tea. She served it in cups of grass, and +Ted thought he had never tasted anything nicer than the cup of afternoon +tea served in an _eglu_. + +"Alalik, what were you singing as we came in?" asked Ted. + +"A song my mother always sang to us," she replied. "It is called 'Ahmi,' +and is an Esquimo slumber song." + +"Will you sing it now?" asked Mr. Strong, and she smiled in assent and +sang the quaint, crooning lullaby of her Esquimo mother-- + +"The wind blows over the Yukon. +My husband hunts the deer on the Koyukun Mountains, +Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not. +Long since my husband departed. Why does he wait in the mountains? +Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, softly. +Where is my own? +Does he lie starving on the hillside? Why does he linger? +Comes he not soon, I will seek him among the mountains. +Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, sleep. +The crow has come laughing. +His beak is red, his eyes glisten, the false one. +'Thanks for a good meal to Kuskokala the Shaman. +On the sharp mountain quietly lies your husband.' +Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not. +'Twenty deers' tongues tied to the pack on his shoulders; +Not a tongue in his mouth to call to his wife with, +Wolves, foxes, and ravens are fighting for morsels. +Tough and hard are the sinews, not so the child in your bosom.' +Ahmi, Ahmi, sleep, little one, wake not. +Over the mountains slowly staggers the hunter. +Two bucks' thighs on his shoulders with bladders of fat between them. +Twenty deers' tongues in his belt. Go, gather wood, old woman! +Off flew the crow, liar, cheat, and deceiver! +Wake, little sleeper, and call to your father. +He brings you back fat, marrow and venison fresh from the mountain. +Tired and worn, he has carved a toy of the deer's horn, +While he was sitting and waiting long for the deer on the hillside. +Wake, and see the crow hiding himself from the arrow, +Wake, little one, wake, for here is your father." + +Thanking Alalik for the quaint song, sung in a sweet, touching voice, +they all took their departure, laden with purchases and delighted with +their visit. "But you must not think this is a fair sample of Esquimo +hut or Esquimo life," said Mr. Strong to the boys. "These are near enough +civilized to show the best side of their race, but theirs must be a +terrible existence who are inland or on islands where no one ever comes, +and whose only idea of life is a constant struggle for food." + +"I think I would rather be an American," remarked Ted, while Kalitan +said, briefly: "I like Thlinkit." + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE SPLENDOUR OF SAGHALIE TYEE + + +The _tundra_ was greenish-brown in colour, and looked like a great meadow +stretching from the beach, like a new moon, gently upward to the cones of +volcanic mountains far away. The ground, frozen solid all the year, +thaws out for a foot or two on the surface during the warm months, and +here and there were scattered wild flowers; spring beauties, purple +primroses, yellow anemone, and saxifrages bloomed in beauty, and wild +honey-bees, gay bumblebees, and fat mosquitoes buzzed and hummed +everywhere. + +Ted and Kalitan were going to see the reindeer farm at Port Clarence, +and, as this was to be their last jaunt in Alaska, they were determined +to make the best of it. Next day they were to take ship from Cape Prince +of Wales and go straight to Sitka. Here Ted was to start for home, and +Mr. Strong was to leave Kalitan at the Mission School for a year's +schooling, which, to Kalitan's great delight, was to be a present to him +from his American friends. + +"Tell us about the reindeer farms, daddy. Have they always been here?" +demanded Ted, as they tramped over the _tundra_, covered with moss, +grass, and flowers. + +"No," said his father. "They are quite recent arrivals in Alaska. The +Esquimos used to live entirely upon the game they killed before the +whites came. There were many walruses, which they used for many things; +whales, too, they could easily capture before the whalers drove them +north, and then they hunted the wild reindeer, until now there are +scarcely any left. There was little left for them to eat but small fish, +for you see the whites had taken away or destroyed their food supplies. + +"One day, in 1891, an American vessel discovered an entire village of +Esquimos starving, being reduced to eating their dogs, and it was thought +quite time that the government did something for these people whose land +they had bought. Finding that people of the same race in Siberia were +prosperous and healthy, they sent to investigate conditions, and found +that the Siberian Esquimos lived entirely by means of the reindeer. The +government decided to start a reindeer farm and see if it would not +benefit the natives." + +"How does it work?" asked Ted. + +"Very well indeed," said his father. "At first about two hundred animals +were brought over, and they increased about fifty per cent, the first +year. Everywhere in the arctic region the _tundra_ gives the reindeer the +moss he lives on. It is never dry in summer because the frost prevents +any underground drainage, and even in winter the animals feed upon it and +thrive. There are, it is said, hundreds of thousands of square miles of +reindeer moss in Alaska, and reindeer stations have been established in +many places, and, as the natives are the only ones allowed to raise them, +it seems as if this might be the way found to help the industrious +Esquimos to help themselves." + +"But if it all belongs to the government, how can it help the natives?" +asked Ted. + +"Of course they have to be taught the business," said Mr. Strong. "The +government brought over some Lapps and Finlanders to care for the deer at +first, and these took young Esquimos to train. Each one serves five years +as herder, having a certain number of deer set apart for him each year, +and at the end of his service goes into business for himself." + +"Why, I think that's fine," cried Ted. "Oh, Daddy, what is that? It +looks like a queer, tangled up forest, all bare branches in the summer." + +"That's a reindeer herd lying down for their noonday rest. What you see +are their antlers. How would you like to be in the midst of that forest +of branches?" asked Mr. Strong. + +"No, thank you," said Teddy, but Kalitan said: + +"Reindeer very gentle; they will not hurt unless very much frightened." + +"What queer-looking animals they are," said Ted, as they approached +nearer. "A sort of a cross between a deer and a cow." + +"Perhaps they are more useful than handsome, but I think there is +something picturesque about them, especially when hitched to sleds and +skimming over the frozen ground." + +The farm at Teller was certainly an interesting spot. Teddy saw the deer +fed and milked, the Lapland women being experts in that line, and found +the herders, in their quaint _parkas_ tied around the waist, and conical +caps, scarcely less interesting than the deer. Two funny little Lapp +babies he took to ride on a large reindeer, which proceeding did not +frighten the babies half so much as did the white boy who put them on the +deer. A reindeer was to them an everyday occurrence, but a Boston boy was +quite another matter. + +Better than the reindeer, however, Teddy and Kalitan liked the +draught dogs who hauled the water at the station. A great cask on +wheels was pulled by five magnificent dogs, beautiful fellows with +bright alert faces. + +"They are the most faithful creatures in the world," said Mr. Strong, +"devoted to their masters, even though the masters are cruel to them. +Reindeer can work all day without a mouthful to eat, living on one meal +at night of seven pounds of corn-meal mush, with a pound or so of dried +fish cooked into it. On long journeys they can live on dried fish and +snow, and five dogs will haul four hundred pounds thirty-five miles a +day. They carry the United States mails all over Alaska." + +"I should think the dog would be worth more than the reindeer," said Ted. + +"Many Alaskan travellers say he is by far the best for travelling, but he +cannot feed himself on the _tundra_, nor can he be eaten himself if +necessary. The Jarvis expedition proved the value of the reindeer," said +Mr. Strong. + +"What was that?" asked Ted. + +"Some years ago a whale fleet was caught in the ice near Point Barrow, +and in danger of starving to death, and word of this was sent to the +government. The President ordered the revenue cutter _Bear_ to go as far +north as possible and send a relief party over the ice by sledge with +provisions. When the _Bear_ could go no farther, her commander landed +Lieutenant Jarvis, who was familiar with the region, and a relief party. +They were to seek the nearest reindeer station and drive a reindeer herd +to the relief of the starving people. The party reached Cape Nome and +secured some deer, and the rescue was made, but under such difficulties +that it is one of the most heroic stories of the age. These men drove +four hundred reindeer over two thousand miles north of the Arctic Circle, +over frozen seas and snow-covered mountains, and found the starving +sailors, who ate the fresh reindeer meat, which lasted until the ice +melted in the spring and set them free." + +"I think that was fine," said Ted. "But it seems a little hard on the +reindeer, doesn't it, to tramp all that distance just to be eaten?" + +"Animals made for man," said Kalitan, briefly. + + * * * * * + +A golden glory filled the sky, running upwards toward the zenith, +spreading there in varying colours from palest yellow to orange and +deepest, richest red. Glowing streams of light streamed heavenward like +feathery wings, as Ted and Kalitan sailed southward, and Ted exclaimed in +wonder: "What is it?" + +"The splendour of _Saghalie Tyee_,"[16] said Kalitan, solemnly. + +[Footnote 16: Way-up High Chief, i.e., God.] + +"The Aurora Borealis," said Mr. Strong, "and very fortunate you are to +see it. Indeed, Teddy, you seem to have brought good luck, for everything +has gone well this trip. Our faces are turned homeward now, but we will +have to come again next summer and bring mother and Judith." + +"I'll be glad to get home to mother again," said Ted, then noting +Kalitan's wistful face, "We'll find you at Sitka and go home with you to +the island," and he put his arm affectionately over the Indian boy's +shoulder. Kalitan pointed to the sky, whence the splendour was fading, +and a flock of birds was skimming southwards. + +"From the sky fades the splendour of _Saghalle Tyee_," he said. "The +summer is gone, the birds fly southward. The light goes from me when my +White Brother goes with the birds. Unless he return with them, all is +dark for Kalitan!" + + +THE END. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Kalitan, Our Little Alaskan Cousin +by Mary F. Nixon-Roulet + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK KALITAN, OUR LITTLE ALASKAN COUSIN *** + +***** This file should be named 10224.txt or 10224.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.net/1/0/2/2/10224/ + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Mary Meehan, and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.net/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.net + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.net), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS," WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.net + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + + http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext06 + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + + http://www.gutenberg.net/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: + http://www.gutenberg.net/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: + http://www.gutenberg.net/GUTINDEX.ALL + + diff --git a/old/old/20031124-10224.zip b/old/old/20031124-10224.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ac07bca --- /dev/null +++ b/old/old/20031124-10224.zip |
